Title: | 'Amazon Web Services' Database Services |
Version: | 0.9.0 |
Description: | Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' database services, including 'Relational Database Service' ('RDS'), 'DynamoDB' 'NoSQL' database, and more https://aws.amazon.com/. |
License: | Apache License (≥ 2.0) |
URL: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.database |
BugReports: | https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues |
Imports: | paws.common (≥ 0.8.0) |
Suggests: | testthat |
Encoding: | UTF-8 |
RoxygenNote: | 7.3.2 |
Collate: | 'dax_service.R' 'dax_interfaces.R' 'dax_operations.R' 'docdb_service.R' 'docdb_interfaces.R' 'docdb_operations.R' 'docdbelastic_service.R' 'docdbelastic_interfaces.R' 'docdbelastic_operations.R' 'dynamodb_service.R' 'dynamodb_interfaces.R' 'dynamodb_operations.R' 'dynamodbstreams_service.R' 'dynamodbstreams_interfaces.R' 'dynamodbstreams_operations.R' 'elasticache_service.R' 'elasticache_interfaces.R' 'elasticache_operations.R' 'keyspaces_service.R' 'keyspaces_interfaces.R' 'keyspaces_operations.R' 'lakeformation_service.R' 'lakeformation_interfaces.R' 'lakeformation_operations.R' 'memorydb_service.R' 'memorydb_interfaces.R' 'memorydb_operations.R' 'neptune_service.R' 'neptune_interfaces.R' 'neptune_operations.R' 'neptunedata_service.R' 'neptunedata_interfaces.R' 'neptunedata_operations.R' 'qldb_service.R' 'qldb_interfaces.R' 'qldb_operations.R' 'qldbsession_service.R' 'qldbsession_interfaces.R' 'qldbsession_operations.R' 'rds_service.R' 'rds_operations.R' 'rds_custom.R' 'rds_interfaces.R' 'rdsdataservice_service.R' 'rdsdataservice_interfaces.R' 'rdsdataservice_operations.R' 'redshift_service.R' 'redshift_interfaces.R' 'redshift_operations.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_service.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_interfaces.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_operations.R' 'redshiftserverless_service.R' 'redshiftserverless_interfaces.R' 'redshiftserverless_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' 'simpledb_service.R' 'simpledb_interfaces.R' 'simpledb_operations.R' 'timestreamquery_service.R' 'timestreamquery_interfaces.R' 'timestreamquery_operations.R' 'timestreamwrite_service.R' 'timestreamwrite_interfaces.R' 'timestreamwrite_operations.R' |
NeedsCompilation: | no |
Packaged: | 2025-03-14 09:21:20 UTC; dyfanjones |
Author: | David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph] |
Maintainer: | Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com> |
Repository: | CRAN |
Date/Publication: | 2025-03-14 14:40:02 UTC |
Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator (DAX)
Description
DAX is a managed caching service engineered for Amazon DynamoDB. DAX dramatically speeds up database reads by caching frequently-accessed data from DynamoDB, so applications can access that data with sub-millisecond latency. You can create a DAX cluster easily, using the AWS Management Console. With a few simple modifications to your code, your application can begin taking advantage of the DAX cluster and realize significant improvements in read performance.
Usage
dax(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- dax( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_cluster | Creates a DAX cluster |
create_parameter_group | Creates a new parameter group |
create_subnet_group | Creates a new subnet group |
decrease_replication_factor | Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster |
delete_cluster | Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster |
delete_parameter_group | Deletes the specified parameter group |
delete_subnet_group | Deletes a subnet group |
describe_clusters | Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied |
describe_default_parameters | Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software |
describe_events | Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups |
describe_parameter_groups | Returns a list of parameter group descriptions |
describe_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group |
describe_subnet_groups | Returns a list of subnet group descriptions |
increase_replication_factor | Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster |
list_tags | List all of the tags for a DAX cluster |
reboot_node | Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster |
tag_resource | Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource |
untag_resource | Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource |
update_cluster | Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster |
update_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a parameter group |
update_subnet_group | Modifies an existing subnet group |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- dax()
svc$create_cluster(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a DAX cluster
Description
Creates a DAX cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same DAX caching software.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_create_cluster(
ClusterName,
NodeType,
Description = NULL,
ReplicationFactor,
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
SubnetGroupName = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
IamRoleArn,
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SSESpecification = NULL,
ClusterEndpointEncryptionType = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
NodeType |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the cluster. |
Description |
A description of the cluster. |
ReplicationFactor |
[required] The number of nodes in the DAX cluster. A replication factor of 1 will
create a single-node cluster, without any read replicas. For additional
fault tolerance, you can create a multiple node cluster with one or more
read replicas. To do this, set AWS recommends that you have at least two read replicas per cluster. |
AvailabilityZones |
The Availability Zones (AZs) in which the cluster nodes will reside
after the cluster has been created or updated. If provided, the length
of this list must equal the |
SubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to be used for the replication group. DAX clusters can only run in an Amazon VPC environment. All of the subnets that you specify in a subnet group must exist in the same VPC. |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of security group IDs to be assigned to each node in the DAX cluster. (Each of the security group ID is system-generated.) If this parameter is not specified, DAX assigns the default VPC security group to each node. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the DAX
cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format
ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window
is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: If you don't specify a preferred maintenance window when you create or modify a cache cluster, DAX assigns a 60-minute maintenance window on a randomly selected day of the week. |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications will be sent. The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the DAX cluster owner. |
IamRoleArn |
[required] A valid Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that identifies an IAM role. At runtime, DAX will assume this role and use the role's permissions to access DynamoDB on your behalf. |
ParameterGroupName |
The parameter group to be associated with the DAX cluster. |
Tags |
A set of tags to associate with the DAX cluster. |
SSESpecification |
Represents the settings used to enable server-side encryption on the cluster. |
ClusterEndpointEncryptionType |
The type of encryption the cluster's endpoint should support. Values are:
|
Creates a new parameter group
Description
Creates a new parameter group. A parameter group is a collection of parameters that you apply to all of the nodes in a DAX cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_create_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, Description = NULL)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to apply to all of the clusters in this replication group. |
Description |
A description of the parameter group. |
Creates a new subnet group
Description
Creates a new subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_create_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName, Description = NULL, SubnetIds)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] A name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
Description |
A description for the subnet group |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the subnet group. |
Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster
Description
Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_decrease_replication_factor/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_decrease_replication_factor(
ClusterName,
NewReplicationFactor,
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
NodeIdsToRemove = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the DAX cluster from which you want to remove nodes. |
NewReplicationFactor |
[required] The new number of nodes for the DAX cluster. |
AvailabilityZones |
The Availability Zone(s) from which to remove nodes. |
NodeIdsToRemove |
The unique identifiers of the nodes to be removed from the cluster. |
Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster. DeleteCluster deletes all associated nodes, node endpoints and the DAX cluster itself. When you receive a successful response from this action, DAX immediately begins deleting the cluster; you cannot cancel or revert this action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_delete_cluster(ClusterName)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified parameter group
Description
Deletes the specified parameter group. You cannot delete a parameter group if it is associated with any DAX clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_delete_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to delete. |
Deletes a subnet group
Description
Deletes a subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_delete_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group to delete. |
Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied
Description
Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_clusters(ClusterNames = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterNames |
The names of the DAX clusters being described. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software
Description
Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_default_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_default_parameters(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups
Description
Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular DAX cluster or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_events(
SourceName = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceName |
The identifier of the event source for which events will be returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. |
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. |
Duration |
The number of minutes' worth of events to retrieve. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Returns a list of parameter group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of parameter group descriptions. If a parameter group name is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions for that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_parameter_groups(
ParameterGroupNames = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupNames |
The names of the parameter groups. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_parameters(
ParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group. |
Source |
How the parameter is defined. For example, |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Returns a list of subnet group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list will contain only the description of that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_describe_subnet_groups(
SubnetGroupNames = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SubnetGroupNames |
The name of the subnet group. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
results exist than the specified The value for |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for
pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified,
the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value
specified by |
Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster
Description
Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_increase_replication_factor/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_increase_replication_factor(
ClusterName,
NewReplicationFactor,
AvailabilityZones = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the DAX cluster that will receive additional nodes. |
NewReplicationFactor |
[required] The new number of nodes for the DAX cluster. |
AvailabilityZones |
The Availability Zones (AZs) in which the cluster nodes will be created. All nodes belonging to the cluster are placed in these Availability Zones. Use this parameter if you want to distribute the nodes across multiple AZs. |
List all of the tags for a DAX cluster
Description
List all of the tags for a DAX cluster. You can call list_tags
up to 10 times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_list_tags(ResourceName, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The name of the DAX resource to which the tags belong. |
NextToken |
An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token. |
Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster
Description
Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster. The reboot action takes place as soon as possible. During the reboot, the node status is set to REBOOTING.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_reboot_node/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_reboot_node(ClusterName, NodeId)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the DAX cluster containing the node to be rebooted. |
NodeId |
[required] The system-assigned ID of the node to be rebooted. |
Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource
Description
Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource. You can call tag_resource
up to 5 times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_tag_resource(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The name of the DAX resource to which tags should be added. |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the DAX resource. |
Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource
Description
Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource. You can call untag_resource
up to 5 times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_untag_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The name of the DAX resource from which the tags should be removed. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys. If the DAX cluster has any tags with these keys, then the tags are removed from the cluster. |
Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster
Description
Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster. You can use this action to change one or more cluster configuration parameters by specifying the parameters and the new values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_update_cluster(
ClusterName,
Description = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the DAX cluster to be modified. |
Description |
A description of the changes being made to the cluster. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
A range of time when maintenance of DAX cluster software will be
performed. For example: |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that identifies the topic. |
NotificationTopicStatus |
The current state of the topic. A value of “active” means that notifications will be sent to the topic. A value of “inactive” means that notifications will not be sent to the topic. |
ParameterGroupName |
The name of a parameter group for this cluster. |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of user-specified security group IDs to be assigned to each node in the DAX cluster. If this parameter is not specified, DAX assigns the default VPC security group to each node. |
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_update_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, ParameterNameValues)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group. |
ParameterNameValues |
[required] An array of name-value pairs for the parameters in the group. Each element in the array represents a single parameter.
|
Modifies an existing subnet group
Description
Modifies an existing subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
dax_update_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName, Description = NULL, SubnetIds = NULL)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group. |
Description |
A description of the subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
A list of subnet IDs in the subnet group. |
Amazon DocumentDB with MongoDB compatibility
Description
Amazon DocumentDB is a fast, reliable, and fully managed database service. Amazon DocumentDB makes it easy to set up, operate, and scale MongoDB-compatible databases in the cloud. With Amazon DocumentDB, you can run the same application code and use the same drivers and tools that you use with MongoDB.
Usage
docdb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- docdb( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_source_identifier_to_subscription | Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription |
add_tags_to_resource | Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource |
apply_pending_maintenance_action | Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance) |
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group | Copies the specified cluster parameter group |
copy_db_cluster_snapshot | Copies a snapshot of a cluster |
create_db_cluster | Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster |
create_db_cluster_parameter_group | Creates a new cluster parameter group |
create_db_cluster_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of a cluster |
create_db_instance | Creates a new instance |
create_db_subnet_group | Creates a new subnet group |
create_event_subscription | Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription |
create_global_cluster | Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions |
delete_db_cluster | Deletes a previously provisioned cluster |
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group | Deletes a specified cluster parameter group |
delete_db_cluster_snapshot | Deletes a cluster snapshot |
delete_db_instance | Deletes a previously provisioned instance |
delete_db_subnet_group | Deletes a subnet group |
delete_event_subscription | Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription |
delete_global_cluster | Deletes a global cluster |
describe_certificates | Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account |
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups | Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions |
describe_db_cluster_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group |
describe_db_clusters | Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters |
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes | Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot |
describe_db_cluster_snapshots | Returns information about cluster snapshots |
describe_db_engine_versions | Returns a list of the available engines |
describe_db_instances | Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances |
describe_db_subnet_groups | Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions |
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine |
describe_event_categories | Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type |
describe_events | Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days |
describe_event_subscriptions | Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account |
describe_global_clusters | Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters |
describe_orderable_db_instance_options | Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine |
describe_pending_maintenance_actions | Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action |
failover_db_cluster | Forces a failover for a cluster |
failover_global_cluster | Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource |
modify_db_cluster | Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster |
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group |
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute | Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot |
modify_db_instance | Modifies settings for an instance |
modify_db_subnet_group | Modifies an existing subnet group |
modify_event_subscription | Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription |
modify_global_cluster | Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster |
reboot_db_instance | You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons |
remove_from_global_cluster | Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster |
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription | Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource |
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value |
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot | Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot |
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time | Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time |
start_db_cluster | Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier |
stop_db_cluster | Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier |
switchover_global_cluster | Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- docdb()
svc$add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription
Description
Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(SubscriptionName, SourceIdentifier)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to add a source identifier to. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the event source to be added:
|
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource
Description
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource. You can use these tags with cost allocation reporting to track costs that are associated with Amazon DocumentDB resources or in a Condition
statement in an Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy for Amazon DocumentDB.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name . |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon DocumentDB resource. |
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance)
Description
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
ResourceIdentifier,
ApplyAction,
OptInType
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. |
ApplyAction |
[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource. Valid values: |
OptInType |
[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request or undoes an opt-in
request. An opt-in request of type Valid values:
|
Copies the specified cluster parameter group
Description
Copies the specified cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source cluster parameter group. Constraints:
|
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied cluster parameter group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the copied cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags that are to be assigned to the parameter group. |
Copies a snapshot of a cluster
Description
Copies a snapshot of a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the new cluster snapshot to create from the source cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
KmsKeyId |
The KMS key ID for an encrypted cluster snapshot. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), KMS key identifier, or the KMS key alias for the KMS encryption key. If you copy an encrypted cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services
account, you can specify a value for If you copy an encrypted cluster snapshot that is shared from another
Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for
To copy an encrypted cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services
Region, set If you copy an unencrypted cluster snapshot and specify a value for the
|
PreSignedUrl |
The URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for
the If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
|
CopyTags |
Set to |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the cluster snapshot. |
Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster
Description
Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_db_cluster(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
A list of Amazon EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the cluster can be created in. |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the cluster parameter group to associate with this cluster. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A subnet group to associate with this cluster. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing Example: |
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this cluster. Valid values: |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. The |
Port |
The port number on which the instances in the cluster accept connections. |
MasterUsername |
The name of the master user for the cluster. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@). Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the cluster. |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the cluster is encrypted. |
KmsKeyId |
The KMS key identifier for an encrypted cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key that is used to encrypt the new cluster, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. If an encryption key is not specified in
KMS creates the default encryption key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Web Services Regions. |
PreSignedUrl |
Not currently supported. |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
A list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. You can enable audit logs or profiler logs. For more information, see Auditing Amazon DocumentDB Events and Profiling Amazon DocumentDB Operations. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If |
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier of the new global cluster. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. Valid values for storage type - Default value is When you create a DocumentDB DB cluster with the storage type set to
|
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. Constraint: You can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web
Services Secrets Manager if |
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by Amazon DocumentDB in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If you don't specify There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
Creates a new cluster parameter group
Description
Creates a new cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The cluster parameter group family name. |
Description |
[required] The description for the cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the cluster parameter group. |
Creates a snapshot of a cluster
Description
Creates a snapshot of a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
DBClusterIdentifier,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the cluster snapshot. |
Creates a new instance
Description
Creates a new instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
DBInstanceClass,
Engine,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBInstanceClass |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the instance; for example,
|
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance. Valid value: |
AvailabilityZone |
The Amazon EC2 Availability Zone that the instance is created in. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region. Example: |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
This parameter does not apply to Amazon DocumentDB. Amazon DocumentDB does not perform minor version upgrades regardless of the value set. Default: |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the instance. You can assign up to 10 tags to an instance. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster that the instance will belong to. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
A value that indicates whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied. |
PromotionTier |
A value that specifies the order in which an Amazon DocumentDB replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. Default: 1 Valid values: 0-15 |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB Instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon DocumentDB uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services region. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. For more information, see Updating Your Amazon DocumentDB TLS Certificates and Encrypting Data in Transit in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. |
Creates a new subnet group
Description
Creates a new subnet group. subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two Availability Zones in the Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens. Must not be default. Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
[required] The description for the subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the subnet group. |
Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
Description
Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription. This action requires a topic Amazon Resource Name (ARN) created by using the Amazon DocumentDB console, the Amazon SNS console, or the Amazon SNS API. To obtain an ARN with Amazon SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the Amazon SNS console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
SourceIds = NULL,
Enabled = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the subscription. Constraints: The name must be fewer than 255 characters. |
SnsTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. Amazon SNS creates the ARN when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you
want to be notified of events generated by an instance, you would set
this parameter to Valid values: |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a |
SourceIds |
The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens. Constraints:
|
Enabled |
A Boolean value; set to |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the event subscription. |
Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions
Description
Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions. The global cluster contains one primary cluster with read-write capability, and up-to give read-only secondary clusters. Global clusters uses storage-based fast replication across regions with latencies less than one second, using dedicated infrastructure with no impact to your workload’s performance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_create_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the new global cluster. |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global cluster. This parameter is optional. |
Engine |
The name of the database engine to be used for this cluster. |
EngineVersion |
The engine version of the global cluster. |
DeletionProtection |
The deletion protection setting for the new global cluster. The global cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
DatabaseName |
The name for your database of up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon DocumentDB will not create a database in the global cluster you are creating. |
StorageEncrypted |
The storage encryption setting for the new global cluster. |
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster. When you delete a cluster, all automated backups for that cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified cluster are not deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case sensitive. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Determines whether a final cluster snapshot is created before the
cluster is deleted. If If Default: |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The cluster snapshot identifier of the new cluster snapshot created when
Specifying this parameter and also setting the Constraints:
|
Deletes a specified cluster parameter group
Description
Deletes a specified cluster parameter group. The cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group. Constraints:
|
Deletes a cluster snapshot
Description
Deletes a cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot to delete. Constraints: Must be the name of an existing cluster snapshot in the
|
Deletes a previously provisioned instance
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The instance identifier for the instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case sensitive. Constraints:
|
Deletes a subnet group
Description
Deletes a subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete. You can't delete the default subnet group. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing Example: |
Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
Description
Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to delete. |
Deletes a global cluster
Description
Deletes a global cluster. The primary and secondary clusters must already be detached or deleted before attempting to delete a global cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the global cluster being deleted. |
Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_certificates(
CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateIdentifier |
The user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is
specified, information for only the specified certificate is returned.
If this parameter is omitted, a list of up to Constraints
|
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup
descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName
parameter is specified, the list contains only the description of the specified cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific cluster parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific cluster parameter group to return parameter details for. Constraints:
|
Source |
A value that indicates to return only parameters for a specific source.
Parameter sources can be |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
Description
Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for. |
Returns information about cluster snapshots
Description
Returns information about cluster snapshots. This API operation supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL,
IncludePublic = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The ID of the cluster to retrieve the list of cluster snapshots for.
This parameter can't be used with the Constraints:
|
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
A specific cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can't
be used with the Constraints:
|
SnapshotType |
The type of cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a The |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
IncludeShared |
Set to |
IncludePublic |
Set to |
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters
Description
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters. This API operation supports pagination. For certain management features such as cluster and instance lifecycle management, Amazon DocumentDB leverages operational technology that is shared with Amazon RDS and Amazon Neptune. Use the filterName=engine,Values=docdb
filter parameter to return only Amazon DocumentDB clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_clusters(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The user-provided cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more clusters to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns a list of the available engines
Description
Returns a list of the available engines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_engine_versions(
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DefaultOnly = NULL,
ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
ListSupportedTimezones = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The database engine to return. |
EngineVersion |
The database engine version to return. Example: |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific parameter group family to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
DefaultOnly |
Indicates that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is returned. |
ListSupportedCharacterSets |
If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the
|
ListSupportedTimezones |
If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the
|
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances
Description
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_instances(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The user-provided instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific instance is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more instances to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup
descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName
is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_db_subnet_groups(
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to return details for. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group family to return the engine parameter information for. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
Description
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. Valid values: |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
Description
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName
, SNSTopicARN
, CustomerID
, SourceType
, SourceID
, CreationTime
, and Status
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_event_subscriptions(
SubscriptionName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to describe. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days
Description
Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days. You can obtain events specific to a particular DB instance, security group, snapshot, or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the events of the past hour are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_events(
SourceIdentifier = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceIdentifier |
The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. Constraints:
|
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
Duration |
The number of minutes to retrieve events for. Default: 60 |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories that trigger notifications for an event notification subscription. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters
Description
Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_global_clusters(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more global DB clusters to describe. Supported filters: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine
Description
Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Vpc = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The name of the engine to retrieve instance options for. |
EngineVersion |
The engine version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified engine version. |
DBInstanceClass |
The instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified instance class. |
LicenseModel |
The license model filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified license model. |
Vpc |
The virtual private cloud (VPC) filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available VPC or non-VPC offerings. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
Description
Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for. Supported filters:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Forces a failover for a cluster
Description
Forces a failover for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_failover_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
A cluster identifier to force a failover for. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
|
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier |
The name of the instance to promote to the primary instance. You must specify the instance identifier for an Amazon DocumentDB
replica in the cluster. For example, |
Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs
Description
Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_failover_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
TargetDbClusterIdentifier,
AllowDataLoss = NULL,
Switchover = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster to apply this operation. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the cluster is created. In other words, it's the name of the global cluster. Constraints:
Pattern: |
TargetDbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster that you want to promote to the primary for the global cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Amazon DocumentDB can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services region. Constraints:
Pattern: |
AllowDataLoss |
Specifies whether to allow data loss for this global cluster operation. Allowing data loss triggers a global failover operation. If you don't specify Constraints:
|
Switchover |
Specifies whether to switch over this global database cluster. Constraints:
|
Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource
Description
Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster
Description
Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster that is being modified. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
|
NewDBClusterIdentifier |
The new cluster identifier for the cluster when renaming a cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
ApplyImmediately |
A value that specifies whether the changes in this request and any
pending changes are asynchronously applied as soon as possible,
regardless of the The Default: |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the cluster parameter group to use for the cluster. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups that the cluster will belong to. |
Port |
The port number on which the cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Must be a value from Default: The same port as the original cluster. |
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@). Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration |
The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to
Amazon CloudWatch Logs for a specific instance or cluster. The
|
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.
Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied
during the next maintenance window unless To list all of the available engine versions for Amazon DocumentDB use the following command:
|
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed. Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a
value for the |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. Valid values for storage type - Default value is |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web
Services Secrets Manager. If the cluster doesn't manage the master user
password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this
management. In this case, you can't specify |
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
RotateMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by Amazon DocumentDB in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the cluster. The secret value contains the updated password. Constraint: You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password. |
Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
, ParameterValue
, and ApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
Parameters
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to modify. |
Parameters |
[required] A list of parameters in the cluster parameter group to modify. |
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot
Description
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
AttributeName,
ValuesToAdd = NULL,
ValuesToRemove = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for. |
AttributeName |
[required] The name of the cluster snapshot attribute to modify. To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual cluster snapshot, set this value to |
ValuesToAdd |
A list of cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified
by To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a
manual cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web
Services account IDs. To make the manual cluster snapshot restorable by
any Amazon Web Services account, set it to |
ValuesToRemove |
A list of cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute
specified by To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or
more Amazon Web Services account identifiers. To remove authorization
for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the cluster
snapshot, set it to |
Modifies settings for an instance
Description
Modifies settings for an instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
CertificateRotationRestart = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
DBInstanceClass |
The new compute and memory capacity of the instance; for example,
If you modify the instance class, an outage occurs during the change.
The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless
Default: Uses existing setting. |
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending
modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless
of the If this parameter is set to Default: |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, changing this parameter causes a reboot of the instance. If you are moving this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure that pending changes are applied. Default: Uses existing setting. Format: Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
This parameter does not apply to Amazon DocumentDB. Amazon DocumentDB does not perform minor version upgrades regardless of the value set. |
NewDBInstanceIdentifier |
The new instance identifier for the instance when renaming an instance.
When you change the instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs
immediately if you set Constraints:
Example: |
CACertificateIdentifier |
Indicates the certificate that needs to be associated with the instance. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied. |
PromotionTier |
A value that specifies the order in which an Amazon DocumentDB replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. Default: 1 Valid values: 0-15 |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB Instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon DocumentDB uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services region. |
CertificateRotationRestart |
Specifies whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted. Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance. If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, see Updating Your Amazon DocumentDB TLS Certificates and Encrypting Data in Transit in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. |
Modifies an existing subnet group
Description
Modifies an existing subnet group. subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two Availability Zones in the Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
SubnetIds
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
The description for the subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group. |
Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
Description
Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Enabled = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription. |
SnsTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you
want to be notified of events generated by an instance, set this
parameter to Valid values: |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a |
Enabled |
A Boolean value; set to |
Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster
Description
Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster. You can change one or more configuration parameters (for example: deletion protection), or the global cluster identifier by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_modify_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the global cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier |
The new identifier for a global cluster when you modify a global cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.
Example: |
DeletionProtection |
Indicates if the global cluster has deletion protection enabled. The global cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons
Description
You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain changes, or if you change the cluster parameter group that is associated with the instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
ForceFailover |
When Constraint: You can't specify |
Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster
Description
Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster. The cluster becomes a standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only and receiving data from a primary in a different region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_remove_from_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier, DbClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier to detach from the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster. |
DbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster. |
Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
Description
Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SourceIdentifier
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to remove a source identifier from. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the instance identifier for an instance, or the name of a security group. |
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed. |
Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
and ApplyMethod
. To reset the entire cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName
and ResetAllParameters
parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to reset. |
ResetAllParameters |
A value that is set to |
Parameters |
A list of parameter names in the cluster parameter group to reset to the
default values. You can't use this parameter if the |
Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot
Description
Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
SnapshotIdentifier,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
Provides the list of Amazon EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the restored DB cluster can be created in. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the cluster to create from the snapshot or cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the snapshot or cluster snapshot to restore from. You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a snapshot. Constraints:
|
Engine |
[required] The database engine to use for the new cluster. Default: The same as source. Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source. |
EngineVersion |
The version of the database engine to use for the new cluster. |
Port |
The port number on which the new cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Must be a value from Default: The same port as the original cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to use for the new cluster. Constraints: If provided, must match the name of an existing
Example: |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups that the new cluster will belong to. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the restored cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted cluster from a DB snapshot or cluster snapshot. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a cluster with the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. If you do not specify a value for the
|
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
A list of log types that must be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. Type: String. Required: No. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group is used. If supplied, must match the name of an existing default DB cluster parameter group. The string must consist of from 1 to 255 letters, numbers or hyphens. Its first character must be a letter, and it cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. Valid values for storage type - Default value is |
Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time
Description
Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime
for up to BackupRetentionPeriod
days. The target cluster is created from the source cluster with the same configuration as the original cluster, except that the new cluster is created with the default security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RestoreType = NULL,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier,
RestoreToTime = NULL,
UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the new cluster to be created. Constraints:
|
RestoreType |
The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:
Constraints: You can't specify If you don't specify a |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the source cluster from which to restore. Constraints:
|
RestoreToTime |
The date and time to restore the cluster to. Valid values: A time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format. Constraints:
Example: |
UseLatestRestorableTime |
A value that is set to Default: Constraints: Cannot be specified if the |
Port |
The port number on which the new cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Must be a value from Default: The default port for the engine. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The subnet group name to use for the new cluster. Constraints: If provided, must match the name of an existing
Example: |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the new cluster belongs to. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the restored cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted cluster from an encrypted cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a cluster with the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. You can restore to a new cluster and encrypt the new cluster with an KMS
key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source
cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by
the If you do not specify a value for the
If |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
A list of log types that must be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide. Valid values for storage type - Default value is |
Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
Description
Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
. For more information, see Stopping and Starting an Amazon DocumentDB Cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to restart. Example:
|
Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
Description
Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
. The cluster must be in the available state. For more information, see Stopping and Starting an Amazon DocumentDB Cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to stop. Example:
|
Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster
Description
Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_switchover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdb_switchover_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon DocumentDB global database cluster to switch over. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the cluster is created. In other words, it's the name of the global cluster. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. Constraints:
Pattern: |
TargetDbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to promote to the new primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Amazon DocumentDB can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services region. Constraints:
Pattern: |
Amazon DocumentDB Elastic Clusters
Description
Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters
Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters support workloads with millions of reads/writes per second and petabytes of storage capacity. Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters also simplify how developers interact with Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters by eliminating the need to choose, manage or upgrade instances.
Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters were created to:
provide a solution for customers looking for a database that provides virtually limitless scale with rich query capabilities and MongoDB API compatibility.
give customers higher connection limits, and to reduce downtime from patching.
continue investing in a cloud-native, elastic, and class leading architecture for JSON workloads.
Usage
docdbelastic(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- docdbelastic( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
apply_pending_maintenance_action | The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource |
copy_cluster_snapshot | Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster |
create_cluster | Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure |
create_cluster_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster |
delete_cluster | Delete an elastic cluster |
delete_cluster_snapshot | Delete an elastic cluster snapshot |
get_cluster | Returns information about a specific elastic cluster |
get_cluster_snapshot | Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot |
get_pending_maintenance_action | Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending |
list_clusters | Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters |
list_cluster_snapshots | Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster |
list_pending_maintenance_actions | Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource |
restore_cluster_from_snapshot | Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot |
start_cluster | Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN |
stop_cluster | Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn |
tag_resource | Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource |
untag_resource | Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource |
update_cluster | Modifies an elastic cluster |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- docdbelastic()
svc$apply_pending_maintenance_action(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource
Description
The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
applyAction,
applyOn = NULL,
optInType,
resourceArn
)
Arguments
applyAction |
[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to the resource. Valid actions are:
|
applyOn |
A specific date to apply the pending maintenance action. Required if
opt-in-type is |
optInType |
[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in
request. An opt-in request of type |
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon DocumentDB Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the pending maintenance action applies. |
Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster
Description
Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_copy_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_copy_cluster_snapshot(
copyTags = NULL,
kmsKeyId = NULL,
snapshotArn,
tags = NULL,
targetSnapshotName
)
Arguments
copyTags |
Set to |
kmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key ID for an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier, or the Amazon Web Services KMS key alias for the Amazon Web Services KMS encryption key. If you copy an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web
Services account, you can specify a value for To copy an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web
Services region, set If you copy an unencrypted elastic cluster snapshot and specify a value
for the |
snapshotArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot. |
tags |
The tags to be assigned to the elastic cluster snapshot. |
targetSnapshotName |
[required] The identifier of the new elastic cluster snapshot to create from the source cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure
Description
Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_create_cluster(
adminUserName,
adminUserPassword,
authType,
backupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
clusterName,
kmsKeyId = NULL,
preferredBackupWindow = NULL,
preferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
shardCapacity,
shardCount,
shardInstanceCount = NULL,
subnetIds = NULL,
tags = NULL,
vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
adminUserName |
[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters administrator. Constraints:
|
adminUserPassword |
[required] The password for the Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters administrator. The password can contain any printable ASCII characters. Constraints:
|
authType |
[required] The authentication type used to determine where to fetch the password
used for accessing the elastic cluster. Valid types are |
backupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automatic snapshots are retained. |
clientToken |
The client token for the elastic cluster. |
clusterName |
[required] The name of the new elastic cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
kmsKeyId |
The KMS key identifier to use to encrypt the new elastic cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon account that owns this KMS encryption key, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN as the KMS encryption key. If an encryption key is not specified, Amazon DocumentDB uses the default encryption key that KMS creates for your account. Your account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region. |
preferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, as determined by the
|
preferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: Default: a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
shardCapacity |
[required] The number of vCPUs assigned to each elastic cluster shard. Maximum is 64. Allowed values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. |
shardCount |
[required] The number of shards assigned to the elastic cluster. Maximum is 32. |
shardInstanceCount |
The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic
cluster. A |
subnetIds |
The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the new elastic cluster. |
tags |
The tags to be assigned to the new elastic cluster. |
vpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the new elastic cluster. |
Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster
Description
Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_create_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_create_cluster_snapshot(clusterArn, snapshotName, tags = NULL)
Arguments
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster of which you want to create a snapshot. |
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the new elastic cluster snapshot. |
tags |
The tags to be assigned to the new elastic cluster snapshot. |
Delete an elastic cluster
Description
Delete an elastic cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_delete_cluster(clusterArn)
Arguments
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster that is to be deleted. |
Delete an elastic cluster snapshot
Description
Delete an elastic cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_delete_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_delete_cluster_snapshot(snapshotArn)
Arguments
snapshotArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot that is to be deleted. |
Returns information about a specific elastic cluster
Description
Returns information about a specific elastic cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_get_cluster(clusterArn)
Arguments
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster. |
Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot
Description
Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_get_cluster_snapshot(snapshotArn)
Arguments
snapshotArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot. |
Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending
Description
Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_get_pending_maintenance_action(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] Retrieves pending maintenance actions for a specific Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster
Description
Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_list_cluster_snapshots(
clusterArn = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
snapshotType = NULL
)
Arguments
clusterArn |
The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster. |
maxResults |
The maximum number of elastic cluster snapshot results to receive in the response. |
nextToken |
A pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond this token, up to
the value specified by If there is no more data in the responce, the |
snapshotType |
The type of cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
|
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters
Description
Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_list_clusters(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of elastic cluster snapshot results to receive in the response. |
nextToken |
A pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond this token, up to
the value specified by If there is no more data in the responce, the |
Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending
Description
Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_list_pending_maintenance_actions(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
nextToken |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource
Description
Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource. |
Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot
Description
Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_restore_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_restore_cluster_from_snapshot(
clusterName,
kmsKeyId = NULL,
shardCapacity = NULL,
shardInstanceCount = NULL,
snapshotArn,
subnetIds = NULL,
tags = NULL,
vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
clusterName |
[required] The name of the elastic cluster. |
kmsKeyId |
The KMS key identifier to use to encrypt the new Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon account that owns this KMS encryption key, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN as the KMS encryption key. If an encryption key is not specified here, Amazon DocumentDB uses the default encryption key that KMS creates for your account. Your account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region. |
shardCapacity |
The capacity of each shard in the new restored elastic cluster. |
shardInstanceCount |
The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic
cluster. A |
snapshotArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot. |
subnetIds |
The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the elastic cluster. |
tags |
A list of the tag names to be assigned to the restored elastic cluster, in the form of an array of key-value pairs in which the key is the tag name and the value is the key value. |
vpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the elastic cluster. |
Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN
Description
Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_start_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_start_cluster(clusterArn)
Arguments
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster. |
Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn
Description
Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn
. The elastic cluster must be in the available state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_stop_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_stop_cluster(clusterArn)
Arguments
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster. |
Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource
Description
Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource. |
tags |
[required] The tags that are assigned to the elastic cluster resource. |
Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource. |
tagKeys |
[required] The tag keys to be removed from the elastic cluster resource. |
Modifies an elastic cluster
Description
Modifies an elastic cluster. This includes updating admin-username/password, upgrading the API version, and setting up a backup window and maintenance window
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_update_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
docdbelastic_update_cluster(
adminUserPassword = NULL,
authType = NULL,
backupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
clientToken = NULL,
clusterArn,
preferredBackupWindow = NULL,
preferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
shardCapacity = NULL,
shardCount = NULL,
shardInstanceCount = NULL,
subnetIds = NULL,
vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
adminUserPassword |
The password associated with the elastic cluster administrator. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@). Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters. |
authType |
The authentication type used to determine where to fetch the password
used for accessing the elastic cluster. Valid types are |
backupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automatic snapshots are retained. |
clientToken |
The client token for the elastic cluster. |
clusterArn |
[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster. |
preferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, as determined by the
|
preferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: Default: a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
shardCapacity |
The number of vCPUs assigned to each elastic cluster shard. Maximum is 64. Allowed values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. |
shardCount |
The number of shards assigned to the elastic cluster. Maximum is 32. |
shardInstanceCount |
The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic
cluster. A |
subnetIds |
The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the elastic cluster. |
vpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the elastic cluster. |
Amazon DynamoDB
Description
Amazon DynamoDB is a fully managed NoSQL database service that provides fast and predictable performance with seamless scalability. DynamoDB lets you offload the administrative burdens of operating and scaling a distributed database, so that you don't have to worry about hardware provisioning, setup and configuration, replication, software patching, or cluster scaling.
With DynamoDB, you can create database tables that can store and retrieve any amount of data, and serve any level of request traffic. You can scale up or scale down your tables' throughput capacity without downtime or performance degradation, and use the Amazon Web Services Management Console to monitor resource utilization and performance metrics.
DynamoDB automatically spreads the data and traffic for your tables over a sufficient number of servers to handle your throughput and storage requirements, while maintaining consistent and fast performance. All of your data is stored on solid state disks (SSDs) and automatically replicated across multiple Availability Zones in an Amazon Web Services Region, providing built-in high availability and data durability.
Usage
dynamodb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- dynamodb( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_execute_statement | This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL |
batch_get_item | The BatchGetItem operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables |
batch_write_item | The BatchWriteItem operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables |
create_backup | Creates a backup for an existing table |
create_global_table | Creates a global table from an existing table |
create_table | The CreateTable operation adds a new table to your account |
delete_backup | Deletes an existing backup of a table |
delete_item | Deletes a single item in a table by primary key |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream |
delete_table | The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its items |
describe_backup | Describes an existing backup of a table |
describe_continuous_backups | Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table |
describe_contributor_insights | Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index |
describe_endpoints | Returns the regional endpoint information |
describe_export | Describes an existing table export |
describe_global_table | Returns information about the specified global table |
describe_global_table_settings | Describes Region-specific settings for a global table |
describe_import | Represents the properties of the import |
describe_kinesis_streaming_destination | Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming |
describe_limits | Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there |
describe_table | Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table |
describe_table_replica_auto_scaling | Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once |
describe_time_to_live | Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table |
disable_kinesis_streaming_destination | Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream |
enable_kinesis_streaming_destination | Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow |
execute_statement | This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL |
execute_transaction | This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL |
export_table_to_point_in_time | Exports table data to an S3 bucket |
get_item | The GetItem operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key |
get_resource_policy | Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format |
import_table | Imports table data from an S3 bucket |
list_backups | List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup |
list_contributor_insights | Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes |
list_exports | Lists completed exports within the past 90 days |
list_global_tables | Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region |
list_imports | Lists completed imports within the past 90 days |
list_tables | Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint |
list_tags_of_resource | List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource |
put_item | Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item |
put_resource_policy | Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream |
query | You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute |
restore_table_from_backup | Creates a new table from an existing backup |
restore_table_to_point_in_time | Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime and LatestRestorableDateTime |
scan | The Scan operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index |
tag_resource | Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource |
transact_get_items | TransactGetItems is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region |
transact_write_items | TransactWriteItems is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests |
untag_resource | Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource |
update_continuous_backups | UpdateContinuousBackups enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table |
update_contributor_insights | Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index |
update_global_table | Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table |
update_global_table_settings | Updates settings for a global table |
update_item | Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist |
update_kinesis_streaming_destination | The command to update the Kinesis stream destination |
update_table | Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table |
update_table_replica_auto_scaling | Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once |
update_time_to_live | The UpdateTimeToLive method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- dynamodb()
# This example reads multiple items from the Music table using a batch of
# three GetItem requests. Only the AlbumTitle attribute is returned.
svc$batch_get_item(
RequestItems = list(
Music = list(
Keys = list(
list(
Artist = list(
S = "No One You Know"
),
SongTitle = list(
S = "Call Me Today"
)
),
list(
Artist = list(
S = "Acme Band"
),
SongTitle = list(
S = "Happy Day"
)
),
list(
Artist = list(
S = "No One You Know"
),
SongTitle = list(
S = "Scared of My Shadow"
)
)
),
ProjectionExpression = "AlbumTitle"
)
)
)
## End(Not run)
This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
Description
This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL. Each read statement in a batch_execute_statement
must specify an equality condition on all key attributes. This enforces that each SELECT
statement in a batch returns at most a single item. For more information, see Running batch operations with PartiQL for DynamoDB .
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_batch_execute_statement(Statements, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)
Arguments
Statements |
[required] The list of PartiQL statements representing the batch to run. |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
The BatchGetItem operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables
Description
The batch_get_item
operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables. You identify requested items by primary key.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_get_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_batch_get_item(RequestItems, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)
Arguments
RequestItems |
[required] A map of one or more table names or table ARNs and, for each table, a
map that describes one or more items to retrieve from that table. Each
table name or ARN can be used only once per
Each element in the map of items to retrieve consists of the following:
|
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
The BatchWriteItem operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables
Description
The batch_write_item
operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables. A single call to batch_write_item
can transmit up to 16MB of data over the network, consisting of up to 25 item put or delete operations. While individual items can be up to 400 KB once stored, it's important to note that an item's representation might be greater than 400KB while being sent in DynamoDB's JSON format for the API call. For more details on this distinction, see Naming Rules and Data Types.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_write_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_batch_write_item(
RequestItems,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL
)
Arguments
RequestItems |
[required] A map of one or more table names or table ARNs and, for each table, a
list of operations to be performed (
|
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics |
Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to
|
Creates a backup for an existing table
Description
Creates a backup for an existing table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_create_backup(TableName, BackupName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
BackupName |
[required] Specified name for the backup. |
Creates a global table from an existing table
Description
Creates a global table from an existing table. A global table creates a replication relationship between two or more DynamoDB tables with the same table name in the provided Regions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_global_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_create_global_table(GlobalTableName, ReplicationGroup)
Arguments
GlobalTableName |
[required] The global table name. |
ReplicationGroup |
[required] The Regions where the global table needs to be created. |
The CreateTable operation adds a new table to your account
Description
The create_table
operation adds a new table to your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, table names must be unique within each Region. That is, you can have two tables with same name if you create the tables in different Regions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_create_table(
AttributeDefinitions,
TableName,
KeySchema,
LocalSecondaryIndexes = NULL,
GlobalSecondaryIndexes = NULL,
BillingMode = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughput = NULL,
StreamSpecification = NULL,
SSESpecification = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
TableClass = NULL,
DeletionProtectionEnabled = NULL,
WarmThroughput = NULL,
ResourcePolicy = NULL,
OnDemandThroughput = NULL
)
Arguments
AttributeDefinitions |
[required] An array of attributes that describe the key schema for the table and indexes. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to create. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
KeySchema |
[required] Specifies the attributes that make up the primary key for a table or an
index. The attributes in Each
The partition key of an item is also known as its hash attribute. The term "hash attribute" derives from the DynamoDB usage of an internal hash function to evenly distribute data items across partitions, based on their partition key values. The sort key of an item is also known as its range attribute. The term "range attribute" derives from the way DynamoDB stores items with the same partition key physically close together, in sorted order by the sort key value. For a simple primary key (partition key), you must provide exactly one
element with a For a composite primary key (partition key and sort key), you must
provide exactly two elements, in this order: The first element must have
a For more information, see Working with Tables in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
LocalSecondaryIndexes |
One or more local secondary indexes (the maximum is 5) to be created on the table. Each index is scoped to a given partition key value. There is a 10 GB size limit per partition key value; otherwise, the size of a local secondary index is unconstrained. Each local secondary index in the array includes the following:
|
GlobalSecondaryIndexes |
One or more global secondary indexes (the maximum is 20) to be created on the table. Each global secondary index in the array includes the following:
|
BillingMode |
Controls how you are charged for read and write throughput and how you manage capacity. This setting can be changed later.
|
ProvisionedThroughput |
Represents the provisioned throughput settings for a specified table or
index. The settings can be modified using the
If you set BillingMode as For current minimum and maximum provisioned throughput values, see Service, Account, and Table Quotas in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
StreamSpecification |
The settings for DynamoDB Streams on the table. These settings consist of:
|
SSESpecification |
Represents the settings used to enable server-side encryption. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs to label the table. For more information, see Tagging for DynamoDB. |
TableClass |
The table class of the new table. Valid values are |
DeletionProtectionEnabled |
Indicates whether deletion protection is to be enabled (true) or disabled (false) on the table. |
WarmThroughput |
Represents the warm throughput (in read units per second and write units per second) for creating a table. |
ResourcePolicy |
An Amazon Web Services resource-based policy document in JSON format that will be attached to the table. When you attach a resource-based policy while creating a table, the policy application is strongly consistent. The maximum size supported for a resource-based policy document is 20 KB. DynamoDB counts whitespaces when calculating the size of a policy against this limit. For a full list of all considerations that apply for resource-based policies, see Resource-based policy considerations. You need to specify the |
OnDemandThroughput |
Sets the maximum number of read and write units for the specified table
in on-demand capacity mode. If you use this parameter, you must specify
|
Deletes an existing backup of a table
Description
Deletes an existing backup of a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_delete_backup(BackupArn)
Arguments
BackupArn |
[required] The ARN associated with the backup. |
Deletes a single item in a table by primary key
Description
Deletes a single item in a table by primary key. You can perform a conditional delete operation that deletes the item if it exists, or if it has an expected attribute value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_delete_item(
TableName,
Key,
Expected = NULL,
ConditionalOperator = NULL,
ReturnValues = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
ConditionExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table from which to delete the item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Key |
[required] A map of attribute names to For the primary key, you must provide all of the key attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key. |
Expected |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConditionalOperator |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ReturnValues |
Use
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. The |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics |
Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to
|
ConditionExpression |
A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional
An expression can contain any of the following:
For more information about condition expressions, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeValues |
One or more values that can be substituted in an expression. Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:
You would first need to specify
You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:
For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure |
An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for a
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. |
Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream
Description
Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_delete_resource_policy(ResourceArn, ExpectedRevisionId = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource from which the policy will be removed. The resources you can specify include tables and streams. If you remove the policy of a table, it will also remove the permissions for the table's indexes defined in that policy document. This is because index permissions are defined in the table's policy. |
ExpectedRevisionId |
A string value that you can use to conditionally delete your policy.
When you provide an expected revision ID, if the revision ID of the
existing policy on the resource doesn't match or if there's no policy
attached to the resource, the request will fail and return a
|
The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its items
Description
The delete_table
operation deletes a table and all of its items. After a delete_table
request, the specified table is in the DELETING
state until DynamoDB completes the deletion. If the table is in the ACTIVE
state, you can delete it. If a table is in CREATING
or UPDATING
states, then DynamoDB returns a ResourceInUseException
. If the specified table does not exist, DynamoDB returns a ResourceNotFoundException
. If table is already in the DELETING
state, no error is returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_delete_table(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to delete. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Describes an existing backup of a table
Description
Describes an existing backup of a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_backup(BackupArn)
Arguments
BackupArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the backup. |
Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table
Description
Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table. Continuous backups are ENABLED
on all tables at table creation. If point in time recovery is enabled, PointInTimeRecoveryStatus
will be set to ENABLED.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_continuous_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_continuous_backups(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] Name of the table for which the customer wants to check the continuous backups and point in time recovery settings. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index
Description
Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_contributor_insights(TableName, IndexName = NULL)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to describe. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
IndexName |
The name of the global secondary index to describe, if applicable. |
Returns the regional endpoint information
Description
Returns the regional endpoint information. For more information on policy permissions, please see Internetwork traffic privacy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_endpoints()
Describes an existing table export
Description
Describes an existing table export.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_export/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_export(ExportArn)
Arguments
ExportArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the export. |
Returns information about the specified global table
Description
Returns information about the specified global table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_global_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_global_table(GlobalTableName)
Arguments
GlobalTableName |
[required] The name of the global table. |
Describes Region-specific settings for a global table
Description
Describes Region-specific settings for a global table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_global_table_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_global_table_settings(GlobalTableName)
Arguments
GlobalTableName |
[required] The name of the global table to describe. |
Represents the properties of the import
Description
Represents the properties of the import.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_import/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_import(ImportArn)
Arguments
ImportArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table you're importing to. |
Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming
Description
Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_kinesis_streaming_destination(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table being described. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there
Description
Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_limits()
Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table
Description
Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_table(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to describe. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once
Description
Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_table_replica_auto_scaling/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_table_replica_auto_scaling(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table
Description
Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_time_to_live/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_describe_time_to_live(TableName)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be described. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream
Description
Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream. This is done without deleting either of the resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_disable_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_disable_kinesis_streaming_destination(
TableName,
StreamArn,
EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the DynamoDB table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
StreamArn |
[required] The ARN for a Kinesis data stream. |
EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration |
The source for the Kinesis streaming information that is being enabled. |
Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow
Description
Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow. If this operation doesn't return results immediately, use DescribeKinesisStreamingDestination to check if streaming to the Kinesis data stream is ACTIVE.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_enable_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_enable_kinesis_streaming_destination(
TableName,
StreamArn,
EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the DynamoDB table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
StreamArn |
[required] The ARN for a Kinesis data stream. |
EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration |
The source for the Kinesis streaming information that is being enabled. |
This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
Description
This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_execute_statement(
Statement,
Parameters = NULL,
ConsistentRead = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)
Arguments
Statement |
[required] The PartiQL statement representing the operation to run. |
Parameters |
The parameters for the PartiQL statement, if any. |
ConsistentRead |
The consistency of a read operation. If set to |
NextToken |
Set this value to get remaining results, if |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
Limit |
The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of
matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the
limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns
the matching values up to that point, along with a key in
|
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure |
An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for an
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. |
This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
Description
This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_execute_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_execute_transaction(
TransactStatements,
ClientRequestToken = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL
)
Arguments
TransactStatements |
[required] The list of PartiQL statements representing the transaction to run. |
ClientRequestToken |
Set this value to get remaining results, if |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
Determines the level of detail about either provisioned or on-demand
throughput consumption that is returned in the response. For more
information, see |
Exports table data to an S3 bucket
Description
Exports table data to an S3 bucket. The table must have point in time recovery enabled, and you can export data from any time within the point in time recovery window.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_export_table_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_export_table_to_point_in_time(
TableArn,
ExportTime = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
S3Bucket,
S3BucketOwner = NULL,
S3Prefix = NULL,
S3SseAlgorithm = NULL,
S3SseKmsKeyId = NULL,
ExportFormat = NULL,
ExportType = NULL,
IncrementalExportSpecification = NULL
)
Arguments
TableArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table to export. |
ExportTime |
Time in the past from which to export table data, counted in seconds from the start of the Unix epoch. The table export will be a snapshot of the table's state at this point in time. |
ClientToken |
Providing a A client token is valid for 8 hours after the first request that uses it is completed. After 8 hours, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 8 hours, or the result might not be idempotent. If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other
parameters within the 8-hour idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an
|
S3Bucket |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot to. |
S3BucketOwner |
The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket the export will be stored in. S3BucketOwner is a required parameter when exporting to a S3 bucket in another account. |
S3Prefix |
The Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported snapshot. |
S3SseAlgorithm |
Type of encryption used on the bucket where export data will be stored.
Valid values for
|
S3SseKmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS managed key used to encrypt the S3 bucket where export data will be stored (if applicable). |
ExportFormat |
The format for the exported data. Valid values for |
ExportType |
Choice of whether to execute as a full export or incremental export. Valid values are FULL_EXPORT or INCREMENTAL_EXPORT. The default value is FULL_EXPORT. If INCREMENTAL_EXPORT is provided, the IncrementalExportSpecification must also be used. |
IncrementalExportSpecification |
Optional object containing the parameters specific to an incremental export. |
The GetItem operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key
Description
The get_item
operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key. If there is no matching item, get_item
does not return any data and there will be no Item
element in the response.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_get_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_get_item(
TableName,
Key,
AttributesToGet = NULL,
ConsistentRead = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ProjectionExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table containing the requested item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Key |
[required] A map of attribute names to For the primary key, you must provide all of the attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key. |
AttributesToGet |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConsistentRead |
Determines the read consistency model: If set to |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ProjectionExpression |
A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the table. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas. If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes are returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they do not appear in the result. For more information, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format
Description
Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource to which the policy is attached. The resources you can specify include tables and streams. |
Imports table data from an S3 bucket
Description
Imports table data from an S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_import_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_import_table(
ClientToken = NULL,
S3BucketSource,
InputFormat,
InputFormatOptions = NULL,
InputCompressionType = NULL,
TableCreationParameters
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
Providing a A client token is valid for 8 hours after the first request that uses it is completed. After 8 hours, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 8 hours, or the result might not be idempotent. If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other
parameters within the 8-hour idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an
|
S3BucketSource |
[required] The S3 bucket that provides the source for the import. |
InputFormat |
[required] The format of the source data. Valid values for |
InputFormatOptions |
Additional properties that specify how the input is formatted, |
InputCompressionType |
Type of compression to be used on the input coming from the imported table. |
TableCreationParameters |
[required] Parameters for the table to import the data into. |
List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup
Description
List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup. To list these backups for a given table, specify TableName
. list_backups
returns a paginated list of results with at most 1 MB worth of items in a page. You can also specify a maximum number of entries to be returned in a page.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_backups(
TableName = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
TimeRangeLowerBound = NULL,
TimeRangeUpperBound = NULL,
ExclusiveStartBackupArn = NULL,
BackupType = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
Lists the backups from the table specified in |
Limit |
Maximum number of backups to return at once. |
TimeRangeLowerBound |
Only backups created after this time are listed. |
TimeRangeUpperBound |
Only backups created before this time are listed. |
ExclusiveStartBackupArn |
|
BackupType |
The backups from the table specified by Where
|
Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes
Description
Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_contributor_insights(
TableName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
NextToken |
A token to for the desired page, if there is one. |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results to return per page. |
Lists completed exports within the past 90 days
Description
Lists completed exports within the past 90 days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_exports/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_exports(TableArn = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
TableArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the exported table. |
MaxResults |
Maximum number of results to return per page. |
NextToken |
An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of
a previous call to |
Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region
Description
Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_global_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_global_tables(
ExclusiveStartGlobalTableName = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
RegionName = NULL
)
Arguments
ExclusiveStartGlobalTableName |
The first global table name that this operation will evaluate. |
Limit |
The maximum number of table names to return, if the parameter is not specified DynamoDB defaults to 100. If the number of global tables DynamoDB finds reaches this limit, it
stops the operation and returns the table names collected up to that
point, with a table name in the |
RegionName |
Lists the global tables in a specific Region. |
Lists completed imports within the past 90 days
Description
Lists completed imports within the past 90 days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_imports/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_imports(TableArn = NULL, PageSize = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
TableArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table that was imported to. |
PageSize |
The number of |
NextToken |
An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of
a previous call to |
Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint
Description
Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint. The output from list_tables
is paginated, with each page returning a maximum of 100 table names.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_tables(ExclusiveStartTableName = NULL, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
ExclusiveStartTableName |
The first table name that this operation will evaluate. Use the value
that was returned for |
Limit |
A maximum number of table names to return. If this parameter is not specified, the limit is 100. |
List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource
Description
List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can call ListTagsOfResource up to 10 times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_tags_of_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_list_tags_of_resource(ResourceArn, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon DynamoDB resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
NextToken |
An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of a previous call to ListTagOfResource. When provided in this manner, this API fetches the next page of results. |
Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item
Description
Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item. If an item that has the same primary key as the new item already exists in the specified table, the new item completely replaces the existing item. You can perform a conditional put operation (add a new item if one with the specified primary key doesn't exist), or replace an existing item if it has certain attribute values. You can return the item's attribute values in the same operation, using the ReturnValues
parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_put_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_put_item(
TableName,
Item,
Expected = NULL,
ReturnValues = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
ConditionalOperator = NULL,
ConditionExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to contain the item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Item |
[required] A map of attribute name/value pairs, one for each attribute. Only the primary key attributes are required; you can optionally provide other attribute name-value pairs for the item. You must provide all of the attributes for the primary key. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide both values for both the partition key and the sort key. If you specify any attributes that are part of an index key, then the data types for those attributes must match those of the schema in the table's attribute definition. Empty String and Binary attribute values are allowed. Attribute values of type String and Binary must have a length greater than zero if the attribute is used as a key attribute for a table or index. For more information about primary keys, see Primary Key in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. Each element in the |
Expected |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ReturnValues |
Use
The values returned are strongly consistent. There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. The |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics |
Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to
|
ConditionalOperator |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConditionExpression |
A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional
An expression can contain any of the following:
For more information on condition expressions, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeValues |
One or more values that can be substituted in an expression. Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:
You would first need to specify
You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:
For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure |
An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for a
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. |
Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream
Description
Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream. When you attach a resource-based policy using this API, the policy application is eventually consistent .
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_put_resource_policy(
ResourceArn,
Policy,
ExpectedRevisionId = NULL,
ConfirmRemoveSelfResourceAccess = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource to which the policy will be attached. The resources you can specify include tables and streams. You can control index permissions using the base table's policy. To
specify the same permission level for your table and its indexes, you
can provide both the table and index Amazon Resource Name (ARN)s in the
|
Policy |
[required] An Amazon Web Services resource-based policy document in JSON format.
For a full list of all considerations that apply while attaching a resource-based policy, see Resource-based policy considerations. |
ExpectedRevisionId |
A string value that you can use to conditionally update your policy. You can provide the revision ID of your existing policy to make mutating requests against that policy. When you provide an expected revision ID, if the revision ID of the
existing policy on the resource doesn't match or if there's no policy
attached to the resource, your request will be rejected with a
To conditionally attach a policy when no policy exists for the resource,
specify |
ConfirmRemoveSelfResourceAccess |
Set this parameter to |
You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute
Description
You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute. query
returns all items with that partition key value. Optionally, you can provide a sort key attribute and use a comparison operator to refine the search results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_query(
TableName,
IndexName = NULL,
Select = NULL,
AttributesToGet = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
ConsistentRead = NULL,
KeyConditions = NULL,
QueryFilter = NULL,
ConditionalOperator = NULL,
ScanIndexForward = NULL,
ExclusiveStartKey = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ProjectionExpression = NULL,
FilterExpression = NULL,
KeyConditionExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table containing the requested items. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
IndexName |
The name of an index to query. This index can be any local secondary
index or global secondary index on the table. Note that if you use the
|
Select |
The attributes to be returned in the result. You can retrieve all item attributes, specific item attributes, the count of matching items, or in the case of an index, some or all of the attributes projected into the index.
If neither If you use the |
AttributesToGet |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
Limit |
The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of
matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the
limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns
the matching values up to that point, and a key in |
ConsistentRead |
Determines the read consistency model: If set to Strongly consistent reads are not supported on global secondary indexes.
If you query a global secondary index with |
KeyConditions |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
QueryFilter |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConditionalOperator |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ScanIndexForward |
Specifies the order for index traversal: If Items with the same partition key value are stored in sorted order by sort key. If the sort key data type is Number, the results are stored in numeric order. For type String, the results are stored in order of UTF-8 bytes. For type Binary, DynamoDB treats each byte of the binary data as unsigned. If |
ExclusiveStartKey |
The primary key of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use
the value that was returned for The data type for |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ProjectionExpression |
A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the table. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas. If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes will be returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they will not appear in the result. For more information, see Accessing Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
FilterExpression |
A string that contains conditions that DynamoDB applies after the
A A For more information, see Filter Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
KeyConditionExpression |
The condition that specifies the key values for items to be retrieved by
the The condition must perform an equality test on a single partition key value. The condition can optionally perform one of several comparison tests on
a single sort key value. This allows The partition key equality test is required, and must be specified in the following format:
If you also want to provide a condition for the sort key, it must be
combined using
Valid comparisons for the sort key condition are as follows:
Use the You can optionally use the
To work around this, define a placeholder (such a
For a list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. For more information on |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeValues |
One or more values that can be substituted in an expression. Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:
You would first need to specify
You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:
For more information on expression attribute values, see Specifying Conditions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
Creates a new table from an existing backup
Description
Creates a new table from an existing backup. Any number of users can execute up to 50 concurrent restores (any type of restore) in a given account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_restore_table_from_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_restore_table_from_backup(
TargetTableName,
BackupArn,
BillingModeOverride = NULL,
GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
LocalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughputOverride = NULL,
OnDemandThroughputOverride = NULL,
SSESpecificationOverride = NULL
)
Arguments
TargetTableName |
[required] The name of the new table to which the backup must be restored. |
BackupArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the backup. |
BillingModeOverride |
The billing mode of the restored table. |
GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride |
List of global secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore. |
LocalSecondaryIndexOverride |
List of local secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore. |
ProvisionedThroughputOverride |
Provisioned throughput settings for the restored table. |
OnDemandThroughputOverride |
|
SSESpecificationOverride |
The new server-side encryption settings for the restored table. |
Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime and LatestRestorableDateTime
Description
Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime
and LatestRestorableDateTime
. You can restore your table to any point in time in the last 35 days. You can set the recovery period to any value between 1 and 35 days. Any number of users can execute up to 50 concurrent restores (any type of restore) in a given account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_restore_table_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_restore_table_to_point_in_time(
SourceTableArn = NULL,
SourceTableName = NULL,
TargetTableName,
UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
RestoreDateTime = NULL,
BillingModeOverride = NULL,
GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
LocalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughputOverride = NULL,
OnDemandThroughputOverride = NULL,
SSESpecificationOverride = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceTableArn |
The DynamoDB table that will be restored. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
SourceTableName |
Name of the source table that is being restored. |
TargetTableName |
[required] The name of the new table to which it must be restored to. |
UseLatestRestorableTime |
Restore the table to the latest possible time.
|
RestoreDateTime |
Time in the past to restore the table to. |
BillingModeOverride |
The billing mode of the restored table. |
GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride |
List of global secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore. |
LocalSecondaryIndexOverride |
List of local secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore. |
ProvisionedThroughputOverride |
Provisioned throughput settings for the restored table. |
OnDemandThroughputOverride |
|
SSESpecificationOverride |
The new server-side encryption settings for the restored table. |
The Scan operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index
Description
The scan
operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index. To have DynamoDB return fewer items, you can provide a FilterExpression
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_scan/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_scan(
TableName,
IndexName = NULL,
AttributesToGet = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
Select = NULL,
ScanFilter = NULL,
ConditionalOperator = NULL,
ExclusiveStartKey = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
TotalSegments = NULL,
Segment = NULL,
ProjectionExpression = NULL,
FilterExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
ConsistentRead = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table containing the requested items or if you provide
You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
IndexName |
The name of a secondary index to scan. This index can be any local
secondary index or global secondary index. Note that if you use the
|
AttributesToGet |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
Limit |
The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of
matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the
limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns
the matching values up to that point, and a key in |
Select |
The attributes to be returned in the result. You can retrieve all item attributes, specific item attributes, the count of matching items, or in the case of an index, some or all of the attributes projected into the index.
If neither If you use the |
ScanFilter |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConditionalOperator |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ExclusiveStartKey |
The primary key of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use
the value that was returned for The data type for In a parallel scan, a |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
TotalSegments |
For a parallel The value for If you specify |
Segment |
For a parallel Segment IDs are zero-based, so the first segment is always 0. For
example, if you want to use four application threads to scan a table or
an index, then the first thread specifies a The value of The value for If you provide |
ProjectionExpression |
A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the specified table or index. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas. If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes will be returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they will not appear in the result. For more information, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
FilterExpression |
A string that contains conditions that DynamoDB applies after the
A For more information, see Filter Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeValues |
One or more values that can be substituted in an expression. Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an
attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether
the value of the
You would first need to specify
You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:
For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ConsistentRead |
A Boolean value that determines the read consistency model during the scan:
The default setting for The |
Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource
Description
Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking. You can call TagResource up to five times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] Identifies the Amazon DynamoDB resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon DynamoDB resource. |
TransactGetItems is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region
Description
transact_get_items
is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region. A transact_get_items
call can contain up to 100 TransactGetItem
objects, each of which contains a Get
structure that specifies an item to retrieve from a table in the account and Region. A call to transact_get_items
cannot retrieve items from tables in more than one Amazon Web Services account or Region. The aggregate size of the items in the transaction cannot exceed 4 MB.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_transact_get_items/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_transact_get_items(TransactItems, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)
Arguments
TransactItems |
[required] An ordered array of up to 100 |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
A value of |
TransactWriteItems is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests
Description
transact_write_items
is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests. These actions can target items in different tables, but not in different Amazon Web Services accounts or Regions, and no two actions can target the same item. For example, you cannot both ConditionCheck
and Update
the same item. The aggregate size of the items in the transaction cannot exceed 4 MB.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_transact_write_items/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_transact_write_items(
TransactItems,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
ClientRequestToken = NULL
)
Arguments
TransactItems |
[required] An ordered array of up to 100 |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics |
Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to
|
ClientRequestToken |
Providing a Although multiple identical calls using the same client request token
produce the same result on the server (no side effects), the responses
to the calls might not be the same. If the A client request token is valid for 10 minutes after the first request that uses it is completed. After 10 minutes, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 10 minutes, or the result might not be idempotent. If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other
parameters within the 10-minute idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an
|
Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource
Description
Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can call untag_resource
up to five times per second, per account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The DynamoDB resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tag keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the DynamoDB resource. |
UpdateContinuousBackups enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table
Description
update_continuous_backups
enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table. A successful update_continuous_backups
call returns the current ContinuousBackupsDescription
. Continuous backups are ENABLED
on all tables at table creation. If point in time recovery is enabled, PointInTimeRecoveryStatus
will be set to ENABLED.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_continuous_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_continuous_backups(TableName, PointInTimeRecoverySpecification)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
PointInTimeRecoverySpecification |
[required] Represents the settings used to enable point in time recovery. |
Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index
Description
Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index. CloudWatch Contributor Insights for DynamoDB graphs display the partition key and (if applicable) sort key of frequently accessed items and frequently throttled items in plaintext. If you require the use of Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt this table’s partition key and sort key data with an Amazon Web Services managed key or customer managed key, you should not enable CloudWatch Contributor Insights for DynamoDB for this table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_contributor_insights(
TableName,
IndexName = NULL,
ContributorInsightsAction
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
IndexName |
The global secondary index name, if applicable. |
ContributorInsightsAction |
[required] Represents the contributor insights action. |
Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table
Description
Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table. The global table must already exist to be able to use this operation. Any replica to be added must be empty, have the same name as the global table, have the same key schema, have DynamoDB Streams enabled, and have the same provisioned and maximum write capacity units.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_global_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_global_table(GlobalTableName, ReplicaUpdates)
Arguments
GlobalTableName |
[required] The global table name. |
ReplicaUpdates |
[required] A list of Regions that should be added or removed from the global table. |
Updates settings for a global table
Description
Updates settings for a global table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_global_table_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_global_table_settings(
GlobalTableName,
GlobalTableBillingMode = NULL,
GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityUnits = NULL,
GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingSettingsUpdate = NULL,
GlobalTableGlobalSecondaryIndexSettingsUpdate = NULL,
ReplicaSettingsUpdate = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalTableName |
[required] The name of the global table |
GlobalTableBillingMode |
The billing mode of the global table. If
|
GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityUnits |
The maximum number of writes consumed per second before DynamoDB returns
a |
GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingSettingsUpdate |
Auto scaling settings for managing provisioned write capacity for the global table. |
GlobalTableGlobalSecondaryIndexSettingsUpdate |
Represents the settings of a global secondary index for a global table that will be modified. |
ReplicaSettingsUpdate |
Represents the settings for a global table in a Region that will be modified. |
Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist
Description
Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist. You can put, delete, or add attribute values. You can also perform a conditional update on an existing item (insert a new attribute name-value pair if it doesn't exist, or replace an existing name-value pair if it has certain expected attribute values).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_item/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_item(
TableName,
Key,
AttributeUpdates = NULL,
Expected = NULL,
ConditionalOperator = NULL,
ReturnValues = NULL,
ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
UpdateExpression = NULL,
ConditionExpression = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table containing the item to update. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
Key |
[required] The primary key of the item to be updated. Each element consists of an attribute name and a value for that attribute. For the primary key, you must provide all of the attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key. |
AttributeUpdates |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
Expected |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ConditionalOperator |
This is a legacy parameter. Use |
ReturnValues |
Use
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. The values returned are strongly consistent. |
ReturnConsumedCapacity |
|
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics |
Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to
|
UpdateExpression |
An expression that defines one or more attributes to be updated, the action to be performed on them, and new values for them. The following action values are available for
You can have many actions in a single expression, such as the following:
For more information on update expressions, see Modifying Items and Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ConditionExpression |
A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional update to succeed. An expression can contain any of the following:
For more information about condition expressions, see Specifying Conditions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeNames |
One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression.
The following are some use cases for using
Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:
The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot
be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved
words, see Reserved Words
in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.) To work around this, you
could specify the following for
You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:
Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime. For more information about expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ExpressionAttributeValues |
One or more values that can be substituted in an expression. Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an
attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether
the value of the
You would first need to specify
You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:
For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure |
An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for an
There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed. |
The command to update the Kinesis stream destination
Description
The command to update the Kinesis stream destination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_kinesis_streaming_destination(
TableName,
StreamArn,
UpdateKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The table name for the Kinesis streaming destination input. You can also provide the ARN of the table in this parameter. |
StreamArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the Kinesis stream input. |
UpdateKinesisStreamingConfiguration |
The command to update the Kinesis stream configuration. |
Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table
Description
Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_table(
AttributeDefinitions = NULL,
TableName,
BillingMode = NULL,
ProvisionedThroughput = NULL,
GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates = NULL,
StreamSpecification = NULL,
SSESpecification = NULL,
ReplicaUpdates = NULL,
TableClass = NULL,
DeletionProtectionEnabled = NULL,
MultiRegionConsistency = NULL,
OnDemandThroughput = NULL,
WarmThroughput = NULL
)
Arguments
AttributeDefinitions |
An array of attributes that describe the key schema for the table and
indexes. If you are adding a new global secondary index to the table,
|
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be updated. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
BillingMode |
Controls how you are charged for read and write throughput and how you manage capacity. When switching from pay-per-request to provisioned capacity, initial provisioned capacity values must be set. The initial provisioned capacity values are estimated based on the consumed read and write capacity of your table and global secondary indexes over the past 30 minutes.
|
ProvisionedThroughput |
The new provisioned throughput settings for the specified table or index. |
GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates |
An array of one or more global secondary indexes for the table. For each index in the array, you can request one action:
You can create or delete only one global secondary index per
For more information, see Managing Global Secondary Indexes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide. |
StreamSpecification |
Represents the DynamoDB Streams configuration for the table. You receive a |
SSESpecification |
The new server-side encryption settings for the specified table. |
ReplicaUpdates |
A list of replica update actions (create, delete, or update) for the table. For global tables, this property only applies to global tables using Version 2019.11.21 (Current version). |
TableClass |
The table class of the table to be updated. Valid values are |
DeletionProtectionEnabled |
Indicates whether deletion protection is to be enabled (true) or disabled (false) on the table. |
MultiRegionConsistency |
Specifies the consistency mode for a new global table. This parameter is only valid when you create a global table by specifying one or more Create actions in the ReplicaUpdates action list. You can specify one of the following consistency modes:
If you don't specify this parameter, the global table consistency mode
defaults to |
OnDemandThroughput |
Updates the maximum number of read and write units for the specified
table in on-demand capacity mode. If you use this parameter, you must
specify |
WarmThroughput |
Represents the warm throughput (in read units per second and write units per second) for updating a table. |
Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once
Description
Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_table_replica_auto_scaling/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_table_replica_auto_scaling(
GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates = NULL,
TableName,
ProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingUpdate = NULL,
ReplicaUpdates = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates |
Represents the auto scaling settings of the global secondary indexes of the replica to be updated. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the global table to be updated. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
ProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingUpdate |
|
ReplicaUpdates |
Represents the auto scaling settings of replicas of the table that will be modified. |
The UpdateTimeToLive method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table
Description
The update_time_to_live
method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table. A successful update_time_to_live
call returns the current TimeToLiveSpecification
. It can take up to one hour for the change to fully process. Any additional update_time_to_live
calls for the same table during this one hour duration result in a ValidationException
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_time_to_live/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodb_update_time_to_live(TableName, TimeToLiveSpecification)
Arguments
TableName |
[required] The name of the table to be configured. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter. |
TimeToLiveSpecification |
[required] Represents the settings used to enable or disable Time to Live for the specified table. |
Amazon DynamoDB Streams
Description
Amazon DynamoDB
Amazon DynamoDB Streams provides API actions for accessing streams and processing stream records. To learn more about application development with Streams, see Capturing Table Activity with DynamoDB Streams in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.
Usage
dynamodbstreams(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- dynamodbstreams( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
describe_stream | Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table |
get_records | Retrieves the stream records from a given shard |
get_shard_iterator | Returns a shard iterator |
list_streams | Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- dynamodbstreams()
# The following example describes a stream with a given stream ARN.
svc$describe_stream(
StreamArn = "arn:aws:dynamodb:us-west-2:111122223333:table/Forum/stream/2..."
)
## End(Not run)
Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table
Description
Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_describe_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodbstreams_describe_stream(
StreamArn,
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartShardId = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the stream. |
Limit |
The maximum number of shard objects to return. The upper limit is 100. |
ExclusiveStartShardId |
The shard ID of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use
the value that was returned for |
Retrieves the stream records from a given shard
Description
Retrieves the stream records from a given shard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_get_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodbstreams_get_records(ShardIterator, Limit = NULL)
Arguments
ShardIterator |
[required] A shard iterator that was retrieved from a previous GetShardIterator operation. This iterator can be used to access the stream records in this shard. |
Limit |
The maximum number of records to return from the shard. The upper limit is 1000. |
Returns a shard iterator
Description
Returns a shard iterator. A shard iterator provides information about how to retrieve the stream records from within a shard. Use the shard iterator in a subsequent get_records
request to read the stream records from the shard.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_get_shard_iterator/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodbstreams_get_shard_iterator(
StreamArn,
ShardId,
ShardIteratorType,
SequenceNumber = NULL
)
Arguments
StreamArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the stream. |
ShardId |
[required] The identifier of the shard. The iterator will be returned for this shard ID. |
ShardIteratorType |
[required] Determines how the shard iterator is used to start reading stream records from the shard:
|
SequenceNumber |
The sequence number of a stream record in the shard from which to start reading. |
Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint
Description
Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint. If the TableName
parameter is present, then list_streams
will return only the streams ARNs for that table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_list_streams/ for full documentation.
Usage
dynamodbstreams_list_streams(
TableName = NULL,
Limit = NULL,
ExclusiveStartStreamArn = NULL
)
Arguments
TableName |
If this parameter is provided, then only the streams associated with this table name are returned. |
Limit |
The maximum number of streams to return. The upper limit is 100. |
ExclusiveStartStreamArn |
The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the first item that this operation
will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for
|
Amazon ElastiCache
Description
Amazon ElastiCache is a web service that makes it easier to set up, operate, and scale a distributed cache in the cloud.
With ElastiCache, customers get all of the benefits of a high-performance, in-memory cache with less of the administrative burden involved in launching and managing a distributed cache. The service makes setup, scaling, and cluster failure handling much simpler than in a self-managed cache deployment.
In addition, through integration with Amazon CloudWatch, customers get enhanced visibility into the key performance statistics associated with their cache and can receive alarms if a part of their cache runs hot.
Usage
elasticache(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- elasticache( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_tags_to_resource | A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive |
authorize_cache_security_group_ingress | Allows network ingress to a cache security group |
batch_apply_update_action | Apply the service update |
batch_stop_update_action | Stop the service update |
complete_migration | Complete the migration of data |
copy_serverless_cache_snapshot | Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot |
copy_snapshot | Makes a copy of an existing snapshot |
create_cache_cluster | Creates a cluster |
create_cache_parameter_group | Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group |
create_cache_security_group | Creates a new cache security group |
create_cache_subnet_group | Creates a new cache subnet group |
create_global_replication_group | Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication |
create_replication_group | Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group |
create_serverless_cache | Creates a serverless cache |
create_serverless_cache_snapshot | This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time |
create_snapshot | Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time |
create_user | For Valkey engine version 7 |
create_user_group | For Valkey engine version 7 |
decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group | Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore |
decrease_replica_count | Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group |
delete_cache_cluster | Deletes a previously provisioned cluster |
delete_cache_parameter_group | Deletes the specified cache parameter group |
delete_cache_security_group | Deletes a cache security group |
delete_cache_subnet_group | Deletes a cache subnet group |
delete_global_replication_group | Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process: |
delete_replication_group | Deletes an existing replication group |
delete_serverless_cache | Deletes a specified existing serverless cache |
delete_serverless_cache_snapshot | Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot |
delete_snapshot | Deletes an existing snapshot |
delete_user | For Valkey engine version 7 |
delete_user_group | For Valkey engine version 7 |
describe_cache_clusters | Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied |
describe_cache_engine_versions | Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions |
describe_cache_parameter_groups | Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions |
describe_cache_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group |
describe_cache_security_groups | Returns a list of cache security group descriptions |
describe_cache_subnet_groups | Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions |
describe_engine_default_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine |
describe_events | Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups |
describe_global_replication_groups | Returns information about a particular global replication group |
describe_replication_groups | Returns information about a particular replication group |
describe_reserved_cache_nodes | Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node |
describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings | Lists available reserved cache node offerings |
describe_serverless_caches | Returns information about a specific serverless cache |
describe_serverless_cache_snapshots | Returns information about serverless cache snapshots |
describe_service_updates | Returns details of the service updates |
describe_snapshots | Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots |
describe_update_actions | Returns details of the update actions |
describe_user_groups | Returns a list of user groups |
describe_users | Returns a list of users |
disassociate_global_replication_group | Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name |
export_serverless_cache_snapshot | Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3 |
failover_global_replication_group | Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region |
increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group | Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore |
increase_replica_count | Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group |
list_allowed_node_type_modifications | Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags currently on a named resource |
modify_cache_cluster | Modifies the settings for a cluster |
modify_cache_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group |
modify_cache_subnet_group | Modifies an existing cache subnet group |
modify_global_replication_group | Modifies the settings for a Global datastore |
modify_replication_group | Modifies the settings for a replication group |
modify_replication_group_shard_configuration | Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards |
modify_serverless_cache | This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache |
modify_user | Changes user password(s) and/or access string |
modify_user_group | Changes the list of users that belong to the user group |
purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering | Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering |
rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group | Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster |
reboot_cache_cluster | Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys list from the named resource |
reset_cache_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value |
revoke_cache_security_group_ingress | Revokes ingress from a cache security group |
start_migration | Start the migration of data |
test_failover | Represents the input of a TestFailover operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console) |
test_migration | Async API to test connection between source and target replication group |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- elasticache()
# Adds up to 10 tags, key/value pairs, to a cluster or snapshot resource.
svc$add_tags_to_resource(
ResourceName = "arn:aws:elasticache:us-east-1:1234567890:cluster:my-mem-cluster",
Tags = list(
list(
Key = "APIVersion",
Value = "20150202"
),
list(
Key = "Service",
Value = "ElastiCache"
)
)
)
## End(Not run)
A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive
Description
A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your ElastiCache resources, with the exception of global replication group. When you add or remove tags on replication groups, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the replication group. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to
be added, for example
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Service Namespaces. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Allows network ingress to a cache security group
Description
Allows network ingress to a cache security group. Applications using ElastiCache must be running on Amazon EC2, and Amazon EC2 security groups are used as the authorization mechanism.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_authorize_cache_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_authorize_cache_security_group_ingress(
CacheSecurityGroupName,
EC2SecurityGroupName,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
)
Arguments
CacheSecurityGroupName |
[required] The cache security group that allows network ingress. |
EC2SecurityGroupName |
[required] The Amazon EC2 security group to be authorized for ingress to the cache security group. |
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
[required] The Amazon account number of the Amazon EC2 security group owner. Note that this is not the same thing as an Amazon access key ID - you must provide a valid Amazon account number for this parameter. |
Apply the service update
Description
Apply the service update. For more information on service updates and applying them, see Applying Service Updates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_batch_apply_update_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_batch_apply_update_action(
ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
CacheClusterIds = NULL,
ServiceUpdateName
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupIds |
The replication group IDs |
CacheClusterIds |
The cache cluster IDs |
ServiceUpdateName |
[required] The unique ID of the service update |
Stop the service update
Description
Stop the service update. For more information on service updates and stopping them, see Stopping Service Updates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_batch_stop_update_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_batch_stop_update_action(
ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
CacheClusterIds = NULL,
ServiceUpdateName
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupIds |
The replication group IDs |
CacheClusterIds |
The cache cluster IDs |
ServiceUpdateName |
[required] The unique ID of the service update |
Complete the migration of data
Description
Complete the migration of data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_complete_migration/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_complete_migration(ReplicationGroupId, Force = NULL)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The ID of the replication group to which data is being migrated. |
Force |
Forces the migration to stop without ensuring that data is in sync. It is recommended to use this option only to abort the migration and not recommended when application wants to continue migration to ElastiCache. |
Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot
Description
Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_copy_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_copy_serverless_cache_snapshot(
SourceServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
TargetServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
[required] The identifier of the existing serverless cache’s snapshot to be copied. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
TargetServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
[required] The identifier for the snapshot to be created. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
KmsKeyId |
The identifier of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to the target snapshot resource. A tag is a key-value pair. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL |
Makes a copy of an existing snapshot
Description
Makes a copy of an existing snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_copy_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_copy_snapshot(
SourceSnapshotName,
TargetSnapshotName,
TargetBucket = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceSnapshotName |
[required] The name of an existing snapshot from which to make a copy. |
TargetSnapshotName |
[required] A name for the snapshot copy. ElastiCache does not permit overwriting a snapshot, therefore this name must be unique within its context - ElastiCache or an Amazon S3 bucket if exporting. |
TargetBucket |
The Amazon S3 bucket to which the snapshot is exported. This parameter is used only when exporting a snapshot for external access. When using this parameter to export a snapshot, be sure Amazon ElastiCache has the needed permissions to this S3 bucket. For more information, see Step 2: Grant ElastiCache Access to Your Amazon S3 Bucket in the Amazon ElastiCache User Guide. For more information, see Exporting a Snapshot in the Amazon ElastiCache User Guide. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a cluster
Description
Creates a cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same protocol-compliant cache engine software, either Memcached, Valkey or Redis OSS.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_cache_cluster(
CacheClusterId,
ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
AZMode = NULL,
PreferredAvailabilityZone = NULL,
PreferredAvailabilityZones = NULL,
NumCacheNodes = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SnapshotArns = NULL,
SnapshotName = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL,
OutpostMode = NULL,
PreferredOutpostArn = NULL,
PreferredOutpostArns = NULL,
LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
IpDiscovery = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
[required] The node group (shard) identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
ReplicationGroupId |
The ID of the replication group to which this cluster should belong. If this parameter is specified, the cluster is added to the specified replication group as a read replica; otherwise, the cluster is a standalone primary that is not part of any replication group. If the specified replication group is Multi-AZ enabled and the Availability Zone is not specified, the cluster is created in Availability Zones that provide the best spread of read replicas across Availability Zones. This parameter is only valid if the |
AZMode |
Specifies whether the nodes in this Memcached cluster are created in a single Availability Zone or created across multiple Availability Zones in the cluster's region. This parameter is only supported for Memcached clusters. If the |
PreferredAvailabilityZone |
The EC2 Availability Zone in which the cluster is created. All nodes belonging to this cluster are placed in the preferred
Availability Zone. If you want to create your nodes across multiple
Availability Zones, use Default: System chosen Availability Zone. |
PreferredAvailabilityZones |
A list of the Availability Zones in which cache nodes are created. The order of the zones in the list is not important. This option is only supported on Memcached. If you are creating your cluster in an Amazon VPC (recommended) you can only locate nodes in Availability Zones that are associated with the subnets in the selected subnet group. The number of Availability Zones listed must equal the value of
If you want all the nodes in the same Availability Zone, use
Default: System chosen Availability Zones. |
NumCacheNodes |
The initial number of cache nodes that the cluster has. For clusters running Valkey or Redis OSS, this value must be 1. For clusters running Memcached, this value must be between 1 and 40. If you need more than 40 nodes for your Memcached cluster, please fill out the ElastiCache Limit Increase Request form at http://aws.amazon.com/contact-us/elasticache-node-limit-request/. |
CacheNodeType |
The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the node group (shard). The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.
Additional node type info
|
Engine |
The name of the cache engine to be used for this cluster. Valid values for this parameter are: |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the cache engine to be used for this cluster. To view the supported cache engine versions, use the DescribeCacheEngineVersions operation. Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster or replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version. |
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group to associate with this cluster. If this
argument is omitted, the default parameter group for the specified
engine is used. You cannot use any parameter group which has
|
CacheSubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to be used for the cluster. Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). If you're going to launch your cluster in an Amazon VPC, you need to create a subnet group before you start creating a cluster. For more information, see Subnets and Subnet Groups. |
CacheSecurityGroupNames |
A list of security group names to associate with this cluster. Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). |
SecurityGroupIds |
One or more VPC security groups associated with the cluster. Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. |
SnapshotArns |
A single-element string list containing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a Valkey or Redis OSS RDB snapshot file stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot file is used to populate the node group (shard). The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas. This parameter is only valid if the Example of an Amazon S3 ARN: |
SnapshotName |
The name of a Valkey or Redis OSS snapshot from which to restore data
into the new node group (shard). The snapshot status changes to
This parameter is only valid if the |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. |
Port |
The port number on which each of the cache nodes accepts connections. |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent. The Amazon SNS topic owner must be the same as the cluster owner. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
If you are running Valkey 7.2 and above or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 and above, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic snapshots
before deleting them. For example, if you set This parameter is only valid if the Default: 0 (i.e., automatic backups are disabled for this cache cluster). |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your node group (shard). Example: If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range. This parameter is only valid if the |
AuthToken |
Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server. Password constraints:
For more information, see AUTH password at http://redis.io/commands/AUTH. |
OutpostMode |
Specifies whether the nodes in the cluster are created in a single outpost or across multiple outposts. |
PreferredOutpostArn |
The outpost ARN in which the cache cluster is created. |
PreferredOutpostArns |
The outpost ARNs in which the cache cluster is created. |
LogDeliveryConfigurations |
Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs. |
TransitEncryptionEnabled |
A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to true. |
NetworkType |
Must be either |
IpDiscovery |
The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either |
Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group
Description
Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group. An ElastiCache cache parameter group is a collection of parameters and their values that are applied to all of the nodes in any cluster or replication group using the CacheParameterGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_cache_parameter_group(
CacheParameterGroupName,
CacheParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
[required] A user-specified name for the cache parameter group. |
CacheParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the cache parameter group family that the cache parameter group can be used with. Valid values are: |
Description |
[required] A user-specified description for the cache parameter group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a new cache security group
Description
Creates a new cache security group. Use a cache security group to control access to one or more clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_cache_security_group(
CacheSecurityGroupName,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheSecurityGroupName |
[required] A name for the cache security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Cannot be the word "Default". Example: |
Description |
[required] A description for the cache security group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a new cache subnet group
Description
Creates a new cache subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_cache_subnet_group(
CacheSubnetGroupName,
CacheSubnetGroupDescription,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheSubnetGroupName |
[required] A name for the cache subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens. Example: |
CacheSubnetGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the cache subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the cache subnet group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication
Description
Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication. Using Global Datastore with Valkey or Redis OSS, you can create cross-region read replica clusters for ElastiCache to enable low-latency reads and disaster recovery across regions. For more information, see Replication Across Regions Using Global Datastore.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupIdSuffix,
GlobalReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
PrimaryReplicationGroupId
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupIdSuffix |
[required] The suffix name of a Global datastore. Amazon ElastiCache automatically applies a prefix to the Global datastore ID when it is created. Each Amazon Region has its own prefix. For instance, a Global datastore ID created in the US-West-1 region will begin with "dsdfu" along with the suffix name you provide. The suffix, combined with the auto-generated prefix, guarantees uniqueness of the Global datastore name across multiple regions. For a full list of Amazon Regions and their respective Global datastore iD prefixes, see Using the Amazon CLI with Global datastores . |
GlobalReplicationGroupDescription |
Provides details of the Global datastore |
PrimaryReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the primary cluster that accepts writes and will replicate updates to the secondary cluster. |
Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
Description
Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_replication_group(
ReplicationGroupId,
ReplicationGroupDescription,
GlobalReplicationGroupId = NULL,
PrimaryClusterId = NULL,
AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL,
MultiAZEnabled = NULL,
NumCacheClusters = NULL,
PreferredCacheClusterAZs = NULL,
NumNodeGroups = NULL,
ReplicasPerNodeGroup = NULL,
NodeGroupConfiguration = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SnapshotArns = NULL,
SnapshotName = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL,
TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
AtRestEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
UserGroupIds = NULL,
LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
DataTieringEnabled = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
IpDiscovery = NULL,
TransitEncryptionMode = NULL,
ClusterMode = NULL,
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The replication group identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
ReplicationGroupDescription |
[required] A user-created description for the replication group. |
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
The name of the Global datastore |
PrimaryClusterId |
The identifier of the cluster that serves as the primary for this
replication group. This cluster must already exist and have a status of
This parameter is not required if |
AutomaticFailoverEnabled |
Specifies whether a read-only replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary fails.
Default: false |
MultiAZEnabled |
A flag indicating if you have Multi-AZ enabled to enhance fault tolerance. For more information, see Minimizing Downtime: Multi-AZ. |
NumCacheClusters |
The number of clusters this replication group initially has. This parameter is not used if there is more than one node group (shard).
You should use If The maximum permitted value for |
PreferredCacheClusterAZs |
A list of EC2 Availability Zones in which the replication group's clusters are created. The order of the Availability Zones in the list is the order in which clusters are allocated. The primary cluster is created in the first AZ in the list. This parameter is not used if there is more than one node group (shard).
You should use If you are creating your replication group in an Amazon VPC (recommended), you can only locate clusters in Availability Zones associated with the subnets in the selected subnet group. The number of Availability Zones listed must equal the value of
Default: system chosen Availability Zones. |
NumNodeGroups |
An optional parameter that specifies the number of node groups (shards) for this Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) either omit this parameter or set it to 1. Default: 1 |
ReplicasPerNodeGroup |
An optional parameter that specifies the number of replica nodes in each node group (shard). Valid values are 0 to 5. |
NodeGroupConfiguration |
A list of node group (shard) configuration options. Each node group
(shard) configuration has the following members:
If you're creating a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group, you can use this parameter to individually configure each node group (shard), or you can omit this parameter. However, it is required when seeding a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) cluster from a S3 rdb file. You must configure each node group (shard) using this parameter because you must specify the slots for each node group. |
CacheNodeType |
The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the node group (shard). The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.
Additional node type info
|
Engine |
The name of the cache engine to be used for the clusters in this
replication group. The value must be set to |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the cache engine to be used for the clusters in
this replication group. To view the supported cache engine versions, use
the
Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version) in the ElastiCache User Guide, but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster or replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version. |
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group to associate with this replication group. If this argument is omitted, the default cache parameter group for the specified engine is used. If you are running Valkey or Redis OSS version 3.2.4 or later, only one node group (shard), and want to use a default parameter group, we recommend that you specify the parameter group by name.
|
CacheSubnetGroupName |
The name of the cache subnet group to be used for the replication group. If you're going to launch your cluster in an Amazon VPC, you need to create a subnet group before you start creating a cluster. For more information, see Subnets and Subnet Groups. |
CacheSecurityGroupNames |
A list of cache security group names to associate with this replication group. |
SecurityGroupIds |
One or more Amazon VPC security groups associated with this replication group. Use this parameter only when you are creating a replication group in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. Tags are comma-separated
key,value pairs (e.g. Key= |
SnapshotArns |
A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARN) that uniquely identify the Valkey or Redis OSS RDB snapshot files stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot files are used to populate the new replication group. The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas. The new replication group will have the number of node groups (console: shards) specified by the parameter NumNodeGroups or the number of node groups configured by NodeGroupConfiguration regardless of the number of ARNs specified here. Example of an Amazon S3 ARN: |
SnapshotName |
The name of a snapshot from which to restore data into the new
replication group. The snapshot status changes to |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: |
Port |
The port number on which each member of the replication group accepts connections. |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent. The Amazon SNS topic owner must be the same as the cluster owner. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
If you are running Valkey 7.2 and above or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 and above, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic snapshots
before deleting them. For example, if you set Default: 0 (i.e., automatic backups are disabled for this cluster). |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your node group (shard). Example: If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range. |
AuthToken |
Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server.
For HIPAA compliance, you must specify Password constraints:
For more information, see AUTH password at http://redis.io/commands/AUTH. |
TransitEncryptionEnabled |
A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to This parameter is valid only if the If you enable in-transit encryption, you must also specify a value for
Required: Only available when creating a replication group in an
Amazon VPC using Redis OSS version Default: For HIPAA compliance, you must specify |
AtRestEncryptionEnabled |
A flag that enables encryption at rest when set to You cannot modify the value of Required: Only available when creating a replication group in an
Amazon VPC using Redis OSS version Default: |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the disk in the cluster. |
UserGroupIds |
The user group to associate with the replication group. |
LogDeliveryConfigurations |
Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs. |
DataTieringEnabled |
Enables data tiering. Data tiering is only supported for replication groups using the r6gd node type. This parameter must be set to true when using r6gd nodes. For more information, see Data tiering. |
NetworkType |
Must be either |
IpDiscovery |
The network type you choose when creating a replication group, either
|
TransitEncryptionMode |
A setting that allows you to migrate your clients to use in-transit encryption, with no downtime. When setting Setting This process will not trigger the replacement of the replication group. |
ClusterMode |
Enabled or Disabled. To modify cluster mode from Disabled to Enabled, you must first set the cluster mode to Compatible. Compatible mode allows your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to connect using both cluster mode enabled and cluster mode disabled. After you migrate all Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use cluster mode enabled, you can then complete cluster mode configuration and set the cluster mode to Enabled. |
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
The name of the snapshot used to create a replication group. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS only. |
Creates a serverless cache
Description
Creates a serverless cache.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_serverless_cache(
ServerlessCacheName,
Description = NULL,
Engine,
MajorEngineVersion = NULL,
CacheUsageLimits = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
SnapshotArnsToRestore = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
UserGroupId = NULL,
SubnetIds = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
DailySnapshotTime = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheName |
[required] User-provided identifier for the serverless cache. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Description |
User-provided description for the serverless cache. The default is NULL, i.e. if no description is provided then an empty string will be returned. The maximum length is 255 characters. |
Engine |
[required] The name of the cache engine to be used for creating the serverless cache. |
MajorEngineVersion |
The version of the cache engine that will be used to create the serverless cache. |
CacheUsageLimits |
Sets the cache usage limits for storage and ElastiCache Processing Units for the cache. |
KmsKeyId |
ARN of the customer managed key for encrypting the data at rest. If no KMS key is provided, a default service key is used. |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of the one or more VPC security groups to be associated with the serverless cache. The security group will authorize traffic access for the VPC end-point (private-link). If no other information is given this will be the VPC’s Default Security Group that is associated with the cluster VPC end-point. |
SnapshotArnsToRestore |
The ARN(s) of the snapshot that the new serverless cache will be created from. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
Tags |
The list of tags (key, value) pairs to be added to the serverless cache resource. Default is NULL. |
UserGroupId |
The identifier of the UserGroup to be associated with the serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL. |
SubnetIds |
A list of the identifiers of the subnets where the VPC endpoint for the serverless cache will be deployed. All the subnetIds must belong to the same VPC. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of snapshots that will be retained for the serverless cache that is being created. As new snapshots beyond this limit are added, the oldest snapshots will be deleted on a rolling basis. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
DailySnapshotTime |
The daily time that snapshots will be created from the new serverless cache. By default this number is populated with 0, i.e. no snapshots will be created on an automatic daily basis. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time
Description
This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_serverless_cache_snapshot(
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
ServerlessCacheName,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
[required] The name for the snapshot being created. Must be unique for the customer account. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Must be between 1 and 255 characters. |
ServerlessCacheName |
[required] The name of an existing serverless cache. The snapshot is created from this cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to the snapshot resource. A tag is a key-value pair. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time
Description
Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_snapshot(
ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
CacheClusterId = NULL,
SnapshotName,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
The identifier of an existing replication group. The snapshot is created from this replication group. |
CacheClusterId |
The identifier of an existing cluster. The snapshot is created from this cluster. |
SnapshotName |
[required] A name for the snapshot being created. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
For Valkey engine version 7
Description
For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 and onwards: Creates a user. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_user(
UserId,
UserName,
Engine,
Passwords = NULL,
AccessString,
NoPasswordRequired = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
AuthenticationMode = NULL
)
Arguments
UserId |
[required] The ID of the user. |
UserName |
[required] The username of the user. |
Engine |
[required] The current supported value is Redis. |
Passwords |
Passwords used for this user. You can create up to two passwords for each user. |
AccessString |
[required] Access permissions string used for this user. |
NoPasswordRequired |
Indicates a password is not required for this user. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
AuthenticationMode |
Specifies how to authenticate the user. |
For Valkey engine version 7
Description
For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Creates a user group. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC)
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_user_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_create_user_group(UserGroupId, Engine, UserIds = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
UserGroupId |
[required] The ID of the user group. |
Engine |
[required] The current supported value is Redis user. |
UserIds |
The list of user IDs that belong to the user group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. |
Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore
Description
Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
NodeGroupCount,
GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove = NULL,
GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain = NULL,
ApplyImmediately
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
NodeGroupCount |
[required] The number of node groups (shards) that results from the modification of the shard configuration |
GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove |
If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove is a list of NodeGroupIds to remove from the cluster. ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups listed by GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove from the cluster. |
GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain |
If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain is a list of NodeGroupIds to retain from the cluster. ElastiCache will attempt to retain all node groups listed by GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain from the cluster. |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] Indicates that the shard reconfiguration process begins immediately. At present, the only permitted value for this parameter is true. |
Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
Description
Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. This operation is performed with no cluster down time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_decrease_replica_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_decrease_replica_count(
ReplicationGroupId,
NewReplicaCount = NULL,
ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
ReplicasToRemove = NULL,
ApplyImmediately
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The id of the replication group from which you want to remove replica nodes. |
NewReplicaCount |
The number of read replica nodes you want at the completion of this operation. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in the replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in each of the replication group's node groups. The minimum number of replicas in a shard or replication group is:
|
ReplicaConfiguration |
A list of |
ReplicasToRemove |
A list of the node ids to remove from the replication group or node group (shard). |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] If |
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster. delete_cache_cluster
deletes all associated cache nodes, node endpoints and the cluster itself. When you receive a successful response from this operation, Amazon ElastiCache immediately begins deleting the cluster; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_cache_cluster(
CacheClusterId,
FinalSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter is not case sensitive. |
FinalSnapshotIdentifier |
The user-supplied name of a final cluster snapshot. This is the unique name that identifies the snapshot. ElastiCache creates the snapshot, and then deletes the cluster immediately afterward. |
Deletes the specified cache parameter group
Description
Deletes the specified cache parameter group. You cannot delete a cache parameter group if it is associated with any cache clusters. You cannot delete the default cache parameter groups in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_cache_parameter_group(CacheParameterGroupName)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache parameter group to delete. The specified cache security group must not be associated with any clusters. |
Deletes a cache security group
Description
Deletes a cache security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_cache_security_group(CacheSecurityGroupName)
Arguments
CacheSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache security group to delete. You cannot delete the default security group. |
Deletes a cache subnet group
Description
Deletes a cache subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_cache_subnet_group(CacheSubnetGroupName)
Arguments
CacheSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache subnet group to delete. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens. |
Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process:
Description
Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
RetainPrimaryReplicationGroup
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
RetainPrimaryReplicationGroup |
[required] The primary replication group is retained as a standalone replication group. |
Deletes an existing replication group
Description
Deletes an existing replication group. By default, this operation deletes the entire replication group, including the primary/primaries and all of the read replicas. If the replication group has only one primary, you can optionally delete only the read replicas, while retaining the primary by setting RetainPrimaryCluster=true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_replication_group(
ReplicationGroupId,
RetainPrimaryCluster = NULL,
FinalSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter is not case sensitive. |
RetainPrimaryCluster |
If set to |
FinalSnapshotIdentifier |
The name of a final node group (shard) snapshot. ElastiCache creates the snapshot from the primary node in the cluster, rather than one of the replicas; this is to ensure that it captures the freshest data. After the final snapshot is taken, the replication group is immediately deleted. |
Deletes a specified existing serverless cache
Description
Deletes a specified existing serverless cache.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_serverless_cache(
ServerlessCacheName,
FinalSnapshotName = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheName |
[required] The identifier of the serverless cache to be deleted. |
FinalSnapshotName |
Name of the final snapshot to be taken before the serverless cache is deleted. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL, i.e. a final snapshot is not taken. |
Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot
Description
Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_serverless_cache_snapshot(ServerlessCacheSnapshotName)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
[required] Idenfitier of the snapshot to be deleted. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
Deletes an existing snapshot
Description
Deletes an existing snapshot. When you receive a successful response from this operation, ElastiCache immediately begins deleting the snapshot; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_snapshot(SnapshotName)
Arguments
SnapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot to be deleted. |
For Valkey engine version 7
Description
For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Deletes a user. The user will be removed from all user groups and in turn removed from all replication groups. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_user(UserId)
Arguments
UserId |
[required] The ID of the user. |
For Valkey engine version 7
Description
For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Deletes a user group. The user group must first be disassociated from the replication group before it can be deleted. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_user_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_delete_user_group(UserGroupId)
Arguments
UserGroupId |
[required] The ID of the user group. |
Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied
Description
Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_clusters(
CacheClusterId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
ShowCacheNodeInfo = NULL,
ShowCacheClustersNotInReplicationGroups = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
The user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only information about that specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
ShowCacheNodeInfo |
An optional flag that can be included in the |
ShowCacheClustersNotInReplicationGroups |
An optional flag that can be included in the |
Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions
Description
Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_engine_versions(
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DefaultOnly = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The cache engine to return. Valid values: |
EngineVersion |
The cache engine version to return. Example: |
CacheParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific cache parameter group family to return details for. Valid values are: Constraints:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
DefaultOnly |
If |
Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions. If a cache parameter group name is specified, the list contains only the descriptions for that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_parameter_groups(
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific cache parameter group to return details for. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_parameters(
CacheParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific cache parameter group to return details for. |
Source |
The parameter types to return. Valid values: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns a list of cache security group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of cache security group descriptions. If a cache security group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group. This applicable only when you have ElastiCache in Classic setup
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_security_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_security_groups(
CacheSecurityGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheSecurityGroupName |
The name of the cache security group to return details for. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group. This is applicable only when you have ElastiCache in VPC setup. All ElastiCache clusters now launch in VPC by default.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_cache_subnet_groups(
CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheSubnetGroupName |
The name of the cache subnet group to return details for. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_engine_default_parameters(
CacheParameterGroupFamily,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the cache parameter group family. Valid values are: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups
Description
Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular cluster, cache security group, or cache parameter group by providing the name as a parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_events(
SourceIdentifier = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceIdentifier |
The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, all sources are included in the response. |
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z |
Duration |
The number of minutes worth of events to retrieve. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns information about a particular global replication group
Description
Returns information about a particular global replication group. If no identifier is specified, returns information about all Global datastores.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_global_replication_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_global_replication_groups(
GlobalReplicationGroupId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
ShowMemberInfo = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
The name of the Global datastore |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
ShowMemberInfo |
Returns the list of members that comprise the Global datastore. |
Returns information about a particular replication group
Description
Returns information about a particular replication group. If no identifier is specified, describe_replication_groups
returns information about all replication groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_replication_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_replication_groups(
ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
The identifier for the replication group to be described. This parameter is not case sensitive. If you do not specify this parameter, information about all replication groups is returned. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node
Description
Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes(
ReservedCacheNodeId = NULL,
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
ProductDescription = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedCacheNodeId |
The reserved cache node identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID. |
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier. |
CacheNodeType |
The cache node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified cache node type. The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.
Additional node type info
|
Duration |
The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for this duration. Valid Values: |
ProductDescription |
The product description filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid values:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Lists available reserved cache node offerings
Description
Lists available reserved cache node offerings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings(
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
ProductDescription = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier. Example: |
CacheNodeType |
The cache node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified cache node type. The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.
Additional node type info
|
Duration |
Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for a given duration. Valid Values: |
ProductDescription |
The product description filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified product description. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid Values:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns information about serverless cache snapshots
Description
Returns information about serverless cache snapshots. By default, this API lists all of the customer’s serverless cache snapshots. It can also describe a single serverless cache snapshot, or the snapshots associated with a particular serverless cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_serverless_cache_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_serverless_cache_snapshots(
ServerlessCacheName = NULL,
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheName |
The identifier of serverless cache. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific serverless cache are described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
The identifier of the serverless cache’s snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this snapshot is described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
SnapshotType |
The type of snapshot that is being described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
NextToken |
An optional marker returned from a prior request to support pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by max-results. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified max-results value, a market is included in the response so that remaining results can be retrieved. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.The default is 50. The Validation Constraints are a maximum of 50. |
Returns information about a specific serverless cache
Description
Returns information about a specific serverless cache. If no identifier is specified, then the API returns information on all the serverless caches belonging to this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_serverless_caches/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_serverless_caches(
ServerlessCacheName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheName |
The identifier for the serverless cache. If this parameter is specified, only information about that specific serverless cache is returned. Default: NULL |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records in the response. If more records exist than the specified max-records value, the next token is included in the response so that remaining results can be retrieved. The default is 50. |
NextToken |
An optional marker returned from a prior request to support pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxResults. |
Returns details of the service updates
Description
Returns details of the service updates
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_service_updates/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_service_updates(
ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
ServiceUpdateStatus = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ServiceUpdateName |
The unique ID of the service update |
ServiceUpdateStatus |
The status of the service update |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots
Description
Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots. By default, describe_snapshots
lists all of your snapshots; it can optionally describe a single snapshot, or just the snapshots associated with a particular cache cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_snapshots(
ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
CacheClusterId = NULL,
SnapshotName = NULL,
SnapshotSource = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
ShowNodeGroupConfig = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
A user-supplied replication group identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific replication group are described. |
CacheClusterId |
A user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific cluster are described. |
SnapshotName |
A user-supplied name of the snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this snapshot are described. |
SnapshotSource |
If set to |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 50 Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 50. |
ShowNodeGroupConfig |
A Boolean value which if true, the node group (shard) configuration is included in the snapshot description. |
Returns details of the update actions
Description
Returns details of the update actions
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_update_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_update_actions(
ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
CacheClusterIds = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
ServiceUpdateStatus = NULL,
ServiceUpdateTimeRange = NULL,
UpdateActionStatus = NULL,
ShowNodeLevelUpdateStatus = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ServiceUpdateName |
The unique ID of the service update |
ReplicationGroupIds |
The replication group IDs |
CacheClusterIds |
The cache cluster IDs |
Engine |
The Elasticache engine to which the update applies. Either Valkey, Redis OSS or Memcached. |
ServiceUpdateStatus |
The status of the service update |
ServiceUpdateTimeRange |
The range of time specified to search for service updates that are in available status |
UpdateActionStatus |
The status of the update action. |
ShowNodeLevelUpdateStatus |
Dictates whether to include node level update status in the response |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for
pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns a list of user groups
Description
Returns a list of user groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_user_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_user_groups(
UserGroupId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
UserGroupId |
The ID of the user group. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. \> |
Returns a list of users
Description
Returns a list of users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_describe_users(
Engine = NULL,
UserId = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The engine. |
UserId |
The ID of the user. |
Filters |
Filter to determine the list of User IDs to return. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
Marker |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. \> |
Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name
Description
Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name. The secondary cluster will no longer receive updates from the primary cluster, but will remain as a standalone cluster in that Amazon region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_disassociate_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_disassociate_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
ReplicationGroupId,
ReplicationGroupRegion
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the secondary cluster you wish to remove from the Global datastore |
ReplicationGroupRegion |
[required] The Amazon region of secondary cluster you wish to remove from the Global datastore |
Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3
Description
Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_export_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_export_serverless_cache_snapshot(
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
S3BucketName
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheSnapshotName |
[required] The identifier of the serverless cache snapshot to be exported to S3. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. |
S3BucketName |
[required] Name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot to. The Amazon S3 bucket must also be in same region as the snapshot. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. |
Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region
Description
Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region. The secondary region will become primary, and all other clusters will become secondary.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_failover_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_failover_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
PrimaryRegion,
PrimaryReplicationGroupId
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
PrimaryRegion |
[required] The Amazon region of the primary cluster of the Global datastore |
PrimaryReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the primary replication group |
Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore
Description
Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
NodeGroupCount,
RegionalConfigurations = NULL,
ApplyImmediately
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
NodeGroupCount |
[required] Total number of node groups you want |
RegionalConfigurations |
Describes the replication group IDs, the Amazon regions where they are stored and the shard configuration for each that comprise the Global datastore |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] Indicates that the process begins immediately. At present, the only permitted value for this parameter is true. |
Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
Description
Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. This operation is performed with no cluster down time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_increase_replica_count/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_increase_replica_count(
ReplicationGroupId,
NewReplicaCount = NULL,
ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
ApplyImmediately
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The id of the replication group to which you want to add replica nodes. |
NewReplicaCount |
The number of read replica nodes you want at the completion of this operation. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in the replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in each of the replication group's node groups. |
ReplicaConfiguration |
A list of |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] If |
Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type
Description
Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_list_allowed_node_type_modifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_list_allowed_node_type_modifications(
CacheClusterId = NULL,
ReplicationGroupId = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
The name of the cluster you want to scale up to a larger node instanced type. ElastiCache uses the cluster id to identify the current node type of this cluster and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to. You must provide a value for either the |
ReplicationGroupId |
The name of the replication group want to scale up to a larger node type. ElastiCache uses the replication group id to identify the current node type being used by this replication group, and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to. You must provide a value for either the |
Lists all tags currently on a named resource
Description
Lists all tags currently on a named resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want the
list of tags, for example
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces. |
Modifies the settings for a cluster
Description
Modifies the settings for a cluster. You can use this operation to change one or more cluster configuration parameters by specifying the parameters and the new values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_cache_cluster(
CacheClusterId,
NumCacheNodes = NULL,
CacheNodeIdsToRemove = NULL,
AZMode = NULL,
NewAvailabilityZones = NULL,
CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL,
AuthTokenUpdateStrategy = NULL,
LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
IpDiscovery = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
[required] The cluster identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
NumCacheNodes |
The number of cache nodes that the cluster should have. If the value for
If you are removing cache nodes, you must use the For clusters running Valkey or Redis OSS, this value must be 1. For clusters running Memcached, this value must be between 1 and 40. Adding or removing Memcached cache nodes can be applied immediately or
as a pending operation (see A pending operation to modify the number of cache nodes in a cluster
during its maintenance window, whether by adding or removing nodes in
accordance with the scale out architecture, is not queued. The
customer's latest request to add or remove nodes to the cluster
overrides any previous pending operations to modify the number of cache
nodes in the cluster. For example, a request to remove 2 nodes would
override a previous pending operation to remove 3 nodes. Similarly, a
request to add 2 nodes would override a previous pending operation to
remove 3 nodes and vice versa. As Memcached cache nodes may now be
provisioned in different Availability Zones with flexible cache node
placement, a request to add nodes does not automatically override a
previous pending operation to add nodes. The customer can modify the
previous pending operation to add more nodes or explicitly cancel the
pending request and retry the new request. To cancel pending operations
to modify the number of cache nodes in a cluster, use the
|
CacheNodeIdsToRemove |
A list of cache node IDs to be removed. A node ID is a numeric
identifier (0001, 0002, etc.). This parameter is only valid when
For example: If you have 3 active cache nodes, 7 pending cache nodes,
and the number of cache nodes in this
|
AZMode |
Specifies whether the new nodes in this Memcached cluster are all created in a single Availability Zone or created across multiple Availability Zones. Valid values: This option is only supported for Memcached clusters. You cannot specify Only newly created nodes are located in different Availability Zones. |
NewAvailabilityZones |
This option is only supported on Memcached clusters. The list of Availability Zones where the new Memcached cache nodes are created. This parameter is only valid when Scenarios:
The Availability Zone placement of nodes pending creation cannot be
modified. If you wish to cancel any nodes pending creation, add 0 nodes
by setting If Impact of new add/remove requests upon pending requests
|
CacheSecurityGroupNames |
A list of cache security group names to authorize on this cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. You can use this parameter only with clusters that are created outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Must not be "Default". |
SecurityGroupIds |
Specifies the VPC Security Groups associated with the cluster. This parameter can be used only with clusters that are created in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications are sent. The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the cluster owner. |
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of the cache parameter group to apply to this cluster. This
change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible for parameters when
the |
NotificationTopicStatus |
The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic. Notifications are sent
only if the status is Valid values: |
ApplyImmediately |
If If If you perform a
Valid values: Default: |
Engine |
Modifies the engine listed in a cluster message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey. |
EngineVersion |
The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the cache nodes. Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster and create it anew with the earlier engine version. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
If you are running Valkey 7.2 or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 or later, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic cluster
snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set
If the value of |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your cluster. |
CacheNodeType |
A valid cache node type that you want to scale this cluster up to. |
AuthToken |
Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected
server. This parameter must be specified with the
For more information, see AUTH password at AUTH. |
AuthTokenUpdateStrategy |
Specifies the strategy to use to update the AUTH token. This parameter
must be specified with the
For more information, see Authenticating Users with AUTH |
LogDeliveryConfigurations |
Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs. |
IpDiscovery |
The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either |
Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_cache_parameter_group(
CacheParameterGroupName,
ParameterNameValues
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache parameter group to modify. |
ParameterNameValues |
[required] An array of parameter names and values for the parameter update. You must supply at least one parameter name and value; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters may be modified per request. |
Modifies an existing cache subnet group
Description
Modifies an existing cache subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_cache_subnet_group(
CacheSubnetGroupName,
CacheSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
SubnetIds = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the cache subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens. Example: |
CacheSubnetGroupDescription |
A description of the cache subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
The EC2 subnet IDs for the cache subnet group. |
Modifies the settings for a Global datastore
Description
Modifies the settings for a Global datastore.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
ApplyImmediately,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
GlobalReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] This parameter causes the modifications in this request and any pending modifications to be applied, asynchronously and as soon as possible. Modifications to Global Replication Groups cannot be requested to be applied in PreferredMaintenceWindow. |
CacheNodeType |
A valid cache node type that you want to scale this Global datastore to. |
Engine |
Modifies the engine listed in a global replication group message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey. |
EngineVersion |
The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the clusters in the Global datastore. |
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of the cache parameter group to use with the Global datastore. It must be compatible with the major engine version used by the Global datastore. |
GlobalReplicationGroupDescription |
A description of the Global datastore |
AutomaticFailoverEnabled |
Determines whether a read replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary encounters a failure. |
Modifies the settings for a replication group
Description
Modifies the settings for a replication group. This is limited to Valkey and Redis OSS 7 and above.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_replication_group(
ReplicationGroupId,
ReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
PrimaryClusterId = NULL,
SnapshottingClusterId = NULL,
AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL,
MultiAZEnabled = NULL,
NodeGroupId = NULL,
CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
CacheNodeType = NULL,
AuthToken = NULL,
AuthTokenUpdateStrategy = NULL,
UserGroupIdsToAdd = NULL,
UserGroupIdsToRemove = NULL,
RemoveUserGroups = NULL,
LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
IpDiscovery = NULL,
TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
TransitEncryptionMode = NULL,
ClusterMode = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The identifier of the replication group to modify. |
ReplicationGroupDescription |
A description for the replication group. Maximum length is 255 characters. |
PrimaryClusterId |
For replication groups with a single primary, if this parameter is specified, ElastiCache promotes the specified cluster in the specified replication group to the primary role. The nodes of all other clusters in the replication group are read replicas. |
SnapshottingClusterId |
The cluster ID that is used as the daily snapshot source for the replication group. This parameter cannot be set for Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups. |
AutomaticFailoverEnabled |
Determines whether a read replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary encounters a failure. Valid values: |
MultiAZEnabled |
A flag to indicate MultiAZ is enabled. |
NodeGroupId |
Deprecated. This parameter is not used. |
CacheSecurityGroupNames |
A list of cache security group names to authorize for the clusters in this replication group. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. This parameter can be used only with replication group containing clusters running outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Must
not be |
SecurityGroupIds |
Specifies the VPC Security Groups associated with the clusters in the replication group. This parameter can be used only with replication group containing clusters running in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC). |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: |
NotificationTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications are sent. The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the replication group owner. |
CacheParameterGroupName |
The name of the cache parameter group to apply to all of the clusters in
this replication group. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as
possible for parameters when the |
NotificationTopicStatus |
The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic for the replication
group. Notifications are sent only if the status is Valid values: |
ApplyImmediately |
If If Valid values: Default: |
Engine |
Modifies the engine listed in a replication group message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey. |
EngineVersion |
The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the clusters in the replication group. Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
If you are running Valkey or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 or later, set this parameter to yes if you want to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic node group
(shard) snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set
Important If the value of SnapshotRetentionLimit is set to zero (0), backups are turned off. |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a
daily snapshot of the node group (shard) specified by
Example: If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range. |
CacheNodeType |
A valid cache node type that you want to scale this replication group to. |
AuthToken |
Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected
server. This parameter must be specified with the
For more information, see AUTH password at AUTH. |
AuthTokenUpdateStrategy |
Specifies the strategy to use to update the AUTH token. This parameter
must be specified with the
For more information, see Authenticating Users with AUTH |
UserGroupIdsToAdd |
The ID of the user group you are associating with the replication group. |
UserGroupIdsToRemove |
The ID of the user group to disassociate from the replication group, meaning the users in the group no longer can access the replication group. |
RemoveUserGroups |
Removes the user group associated with this replication group. |
LogDeliveryConfigurations |
Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs. |
IpDiscovery |
The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either |
TransitEncryptionEnabled |
A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to true. If you are
enabling in-transit encryption for an existing cluster, you must also
set |
TransitEncryptionMode |
A setting that allows you to migrate your clients to use in-transit encryption, with no downtime. You must set Setting |
ClusterMode |
Enabled or Disabled. To modify cluster mode from Disabled to Enabled, you must first set the cluster mode to Compatible. Compatible mode allows your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to connect using both cluster mode enabled and cluster mode disabled. After you migrate all Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use cluster mode enabled, you can then complete cluster mode configuration and set the cluster mode to Enabled. |
Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards
Description
Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_replication_group_shard_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_replication_group_shard_configuration(
ReplicationGroupId,
NodeGroupCount,
ApplyImmediately,
ReshardingConfiguration = NULL,
NodeGroupsToRemove = NULL,
NodeGroupsToRetain = NULL
)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) cluster (replication group) on which the shards are to be configured. |
NodeGroupCount |
[required] The number of node groups (shards) that results from the modification of the shard configuration. |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] Indicates that the shard reconfiguration process begins immediately. At
present, the only permitted value for this parameter is Value: true |
ReshardingConfiguration |
Specifies the preferred availability zones for each node group in the
cluster. If the value of You can specify this parameter only if the value of |
NodeGroupsToRemove |
If the value of ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups listed by
|
NodeGroupsToRetain |
If the value of ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups except those listed
by |
This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache
Description
This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_serverless_cache(
ServerlessCacheName,
Description = NULL,
CacheUsageLimits = NULL,
RemoveUserGroup = NULL,
UserGroupId = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
DailySnapshotTime = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
MajorEngineVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
ServerlessCacheName |
[required] User-provided identifier for the serverless cache to be modified. |
Description |
User provided description for the serverless cache. Default = NULL, i.e. the existing description is not removed/modified. The description has a maximum length of 255 characters. |
CacheUsageLimits |
Modify the cache usage limit for the serverless cache. |
RemoveUserGroup |
The identifier of the UserGroup to be removed from association with the Valkey and Redis OSS serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL. |
UserGroupId |
The identifier of the UserGroup to be associated with the serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL - the existing UserGroup is not removed. |
SecurityGroupIds |
The new list of VPC security groups to be associated with the serverless cache. Populating this list means the current VPC security groups will be removed. This security group is used to authorize traffic access for the VPC end-point (private-link). Default = NULL - the existing list of VPC security groups is not removed. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which Elasticache retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default = NULL, i.e. the existing snapshot-retention-limit will not be removed or modified. The maximum value allowed is 35 days. |
DailySnapshotTime |
The daily time during which Elasticache begins taking a daily snapshot of the serverless cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. The default is NULL, i.e. the existing snapshot time configured for the cluster is not removed. |
Engine |
Modifies the engine listed in a serverless cache request. The options are redis, memcached or valkey. |
MajorEngineVersion |
Modifies the engine vesion listed in a serverless cache request. |
Changes user password(s) and/or access string
Description
Changes user password(s) and/or access string.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_user(
UserId,
AccessString = NULL,
AppendAccessString = NULL,
Passwords = NULL,
NoPasswordRequired = NULL,
AuthenticationMode = NULL,
Engine = NULL
)
Arguments
UserId |
[required] The ID of the user. |
AccessString |
Access permissions string used for this user. |
AppendAccessString |
Adds additional user permissions to the access string. |
Passwords |
The passwords belonging to the user. You are allowed up to two. |
NoPasswordRequired |
Indicates no password is required for the user. |
AuthenticationMode |
Specifies how to authenticate the user. |
Engine |
The engine for a specific user. |
Changes the list of users that belong to the user group
Description
Changes the list of users that belong to the user group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_user_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_modify_user_group(
UserGroupId,
UserIdsToAdd = NULL,
UserIdsToRemove = NULL,
Engine = NULL
)
Arguments
UserGroupId |
[required] The ID of the user group. |
UserIdsToAdd |
The list of user IDs to add to the user group. |
UserIdsToRemove |
The list of user IDs to remove from the user group. |
Engine |
The engine for a user group. |
Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering
Description
Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering. Reserved nodes are not eligible for cancellation and are non-refundable. For more information, see Managing Costs with Reserved Nodes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering(
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId,
ReservedCacheNodeId = NULL,
CacheNodeCount = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId |
[required] The ID of the reserved cache node offering to purchase. Example: |
ReservedCacheNodeId |
A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. The Reserved Cache Node ID is an unique customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. If this parameter is not specified, ElastiCache automatically generates an identifier for the reservation. Example: myreservationID |
CacheNodeCount |
The number of cache node instances to reserve. Default: |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster
Description
Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group(
GlobalReplicationGroupId,
ApplyImmediately
)
Arguments
GlobalReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the Global datastore |
ApplyImmediately |
[required] If |
Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster
Description
Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster. This operation applies any modified cache parameter groups to the cluster. The reboot operation takes place as soon as possible, and results in a momentary outage to the cluster. During the reboot, the cluster status is set to REBOOTING.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_reboot_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_reboot_cache_cluster(CacheClusterId, CacheNodeIdsToReboot)
Arguments
CacheClusterId |
[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
CacheNodeIdsToReboot |
[required] A list of cache node IDs to reboot. A node ID is a numeric identifier (0001, 0002, etc.). To reboot an entire cluster, specify all of the cache node IDs. |
Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys list from the named resource
Description
Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys
list from the named resource. A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your ElastiCache resources, with the exception of global replication group. When you add or remove tags on replication groups, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the replication group. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource from which you want the
tags removed, for example
For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Service Namespaces. |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of |
Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value. You can reset specific parameters by submitting a list of parameter names. To reset the entire cache parameter group, specify the ResetAllParameters
and CacheParameterGroupName
parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_reset_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_reset_cache_parameter_group(
CacheParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
ParameterNameValues = NULL
)
Arguments
CacheParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache parameter group to reset. |
ResetAllParameters |
If Valid values: |
ParameterNameValues |
An array of parameter names to reset to their default values. If
|
Revokes ingress from a cache security group
Description
Revokes ingress from a cache security group. Use this operation to disallow access from an Amazon EC2 security group that had been previously authorized.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_revoke_cache_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_revoke_cache_security_group_ingress(
CacheSecurityGroupName,
EC2SecurityGroupName,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
)
Arguments
CacheSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the cache security group to revoke ingress from. |
EC2SecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the Amazon EC2 security group to revoke access from. |
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
[required] The Amazon account number of the Amazon EC2 security group owner. Note that this is not the same thing as an Amazon access key ID - you must provide a valid Amazon account number for this parameter. |
Start the migration of data
Description
Start the migration of data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_start_migration/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_start_migration(ReplicationGroupId, CustomerNodeEndpointList)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The ID of the replication group to which data should be migrated. |
CustomerNodeEndpointList |
[required] List of endpoints from which data should be migrated. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled), the list should have only one element. |
Represents the input of a TestFailover operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console)
Description
Represents the input of a test_failover
operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_test_failover/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_test_failover(ReplicationGroupId, NodeGroupId)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The name of the replication group (console: cluster) whose automatic failover is being tested by this operation. |
NodeGroupId |
[required] The name of the node group (called shard in the console) in this replication group on which automatic failover is to be tested. You may test automatic failover on up to 15 node groups in any rolling 24-hour period. |
Async API to test connection between source and target replication group
Description
Async API to test connection between source and target replication group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_test_migration/ for full documentation.
Usage
elasticache_test_migration(ReplicationGroupId, CustomerNodeEndpointList)
Arguments
ReplicationGroupId |
[required] The ID of the replication group to which data is to be migrated. |
CustomerNodeEndpointList |
[required] List of endpoints from which data should be migrated. List should have only one element. |
Amazon Keyspaces
Description
Amazon Keyspaces (for Apache Cassandra) is a scalable, highly available, and managed Apache Cassandra-compatible database service. Amazon Keyspaces makes it easy to migrate, run, and scale Cassandra workloads in the Amazon Web Services Cloud. With just a few clicks on the Amazon Web Services Management Console or a few lines of code, you can create keyspaces and tables in Amazon Keyspaces, without deploying any infrastructure or installing software.
In addition to supporting Cassandra Query Language (CQL) requests via open-source Cassandra drivers, Amazon Keyspaces supports data definition language (DDL) operations to manage keyspaces and tables using the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, as well as infrastructure as code (IaC) services and tools such as CloudFormation and Terraform. This API reference describes the supported DDL operations in detail.
For the list of all supported CQL APIs, see Supported Cassandra APIs, operations, and data types in Amazon Keyspaces in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.
To learn how Amazon Keyspaces API actions are recorded with CloudTrail, see Amazon Keyspaces information in CloudTrail in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.
For more information about Amazon Web Services APIs, for example how to implement retry logic or how to sign Amazon Web Services API requests, see Amazon Web Services APIs in the General Reference.
Usage
keyspaces(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- keyspaces( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_keyspace | The CreateKeyspace operation adds a new keyspace to your account |
create_table | The CreateTable operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace |
create_type | The CreateType operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace |
delete_keyspace | The DeleteKeyspace operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables |
delete_table | The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its data |
delete_type | The DeleteType operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT) |
get_keyspace | Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an UpdateKeyspace operation |
get_table | Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata |
get_table_auto_scaling_settings | Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format |
get_type | The GetType operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables |
list_keyspaces | The ListKeyspaces operation returns a list of keyspaces |
list_tables | The ListTables operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource |
list_types | The ListTypes operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace |
restore_table | Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp and the current time |
tag_resource | Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource |
untag_resource | Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource |
update_keyspace | Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace |
update_table | Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- keyspaces()
svc$create_keyspace(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
The CreateKeyspace operation adds a new keyspace to your account
Description
The create_keyspace
operation adds a new keyspace to your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, keyspace names must be unique within each Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_keyspace/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_create_keyspace(
keyspaceName,
tags = NULL,
replicationSpecification = NULL
)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace to be created. |
tags |
A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the keyspace. For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
replicationSpecification |
The replication specification of the keyspace includes:
|
The CreateTable operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace
Description
The create_table
operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace. Within a keyspace, table names must be unique.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_create_table(
keyspaceName,
tableName,
schemaDefinition,
comment = NULL,
capacitySpecification = NULL,
encryptionSpecification = NULL,
pointInTimeRecovery = NULL,
ttl = NULL,
defaultTimeToLive = NULL,
tags = NULL,
clientSideTimestamps = NULL,
autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
replicaSpecifications = NULL
)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace that the table is going to be created in. |
tableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
schemaDefinition |
[required] The For each column to be created:
The primary key of the table consists of the following columns:
|
comment |
This parameter allows to enter a description of the table. |
capacitySpecification |
Specifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the table. The options are:
The default is For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
encryptionSpecification |
Specifies how the encryption key for encryption at rest is managed for the table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):
The default is For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
pointInTimeRecovery |
Specifies if
If it's not specified, the default is For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
ttl |
Enables Time to Live custom settings for the table. The options are:
The default is For more information, see Expiring data by using Amazon Keyspaces Time to Live (TTL) in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
defaultTimeToLive |
The default Time to Live setting in seconds for the table. For more information, see Setting the default TTL value for a table in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
tags |
A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the resource. For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
clientSideTimestamps |
Enables client-side timestamps for the table. By default, the setting is disabled. You can enable client-side timestamps with the following option:
Once client-side timestamps are enabled for a table, this setting cannot be disabled. |
autoScalingSpecification |
The optional auto scaling settings for a table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity automatically on your behalf. Auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic. For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. By default, auto scaling is disabled for a table. |
replicaSpecifications |
The optional Amazon Web Services Region specific settings of a multi-Region table. These settings overwrite the general settings of the table for the specified Region. For a multi-Region table in provisioned capacity mode, you can configure the table's read capacity differently for each Region's replica. The write capacity, however, remains synchronized between all replicas to ensure that there's enough capacity to replicate writes across all Regions. To define the read capacity for a table replica in a specific Region, you can do so by configuring the following parameters.
|
The CreateType operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace
Description
The create_type
operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_create_type(keyspaceName, typeName, fieldDefinitions)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace. |
typeName |
[required] The name of the user-defined type. UDT names must contain 48 characters or less, must begin with an alphabetic character, and can only contain alpha-numeric characters and underscores. Amazon Keyspaces converts upper case characters automatically into lower case characters. Alternatively, you can declare a UDT name in double quotes. When declaring a UDT name inside double quotes, Amazon Keyspaces preserves upper casing and allows special characters. You can also use double quotes as part of the name when you create the UDT, but you must escape each double quote character with an additional double quote character. |
fieldDefinitions |
[required] The field definitions, consisting of names and types, that define this type. |
The DeleteKeyspace operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables
Description
The delete_keyspace
operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_keyspace/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_delete_keyspace(keyspaceName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace to be deleted. |
The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its data
Description
The delete_table
operation deletes a table and all of its data. After a delete_table
request is received, the specified table is in the DELETING
state until Amazon Keyspaces completes the deletion. If the table is in the ACTIVE
state, you can delete it. If a table is either in the CREATING
or UPDATING
states, then Amazon Keyspaces returns a ResourceInUseException
. If the specified table does not exist, Amazon Keyspaces returns a ResourceNotFoundException
. If the table is already in the DELETING
state, no error is returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_delete_table(keyspaceName, tableName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace of the to be deleted table. |
tableName |
[required] The name of the table to be deleted. |
The DeleteType operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT)
Description
The delete_type
operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT). You can only delete a type that is not used in a table or another UDT.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_delete_type(keyspaceName, typeName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace of the to be deleted type. |
typeName |
[required] The name of the type to be deleted. |
Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an UpdateKeyspace operation
Description
Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an update_keyspace
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_keyspace/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_get_keyspace(keyspaceName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace. |
Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata
Description
Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_get_table(keyspaceName, tableName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace that the table is stored in. |
tableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format
Description
Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format. If the table is a multi-Region table, the Amazon Web Services Region specific auto scaling settings of the table are included.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_table_auto_scaling_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_get_table_auto_scaling_settings(keyspaceName, tableName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace. |
tableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
The GetType operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables
Description
The get_type
operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_type/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_get_type(keyspaceName, typeName)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace that contains this type. |
typeName |
[required] The formatted name of the type. For example, if the name of the type was created without double quotes, Amazon Keyspaces saved the name in lower-case characters. If the name was created in double quotes, you must use double quotes to specify the type name. |
The ListKeyspaces operation returns a list of keyspaces
Description
The list_keyspaces
operation returns a list of keyspaces.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_keyspaces/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_list_keyspaces(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)
Arguments
nextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the |
maxResults |
The total number of keyspaces to return in the output. If the total
number of keyspaces available is more than the value specified, a
|
The ListTables operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace
Description
The list_tables
operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_list_tables(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, keyspaceName)
Arguments
nextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the |
maxResults |
The total number of tables to return in the output. If the total number
of tables available is more than the value specified, a |
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace. |
Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource
Description
Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_list_tags_for_resource(
resourceArn,
nextToken = NULL,
maxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Keyspaces resource. |
nextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the |
maxResults |
The total number of tags to return in the output. If the total number of
tags available is more than the value specified, a |
The ListTypes operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace
Description
The list_types
operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_types/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_list_types(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, keyspaceName)
Arguments
nextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the |
maxResults |
The total number of types to return in the output. If the total number
of types available is more than the value specified, a |
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace that contains the listed types. |
Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp and the current time
Description
Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp
and the current time. For more information about restore points, see Time window for PITR continuous backups in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_restore_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_restore_table(
sourceKeyspaceName,
sourceTableName,
targetKeyspaceName,
targetTableName,
restoreTimestamp = NULL,
capacitySpecificationOverride = NULL,
encryptionSpecificationOverride = NULL,
pointInTimeRecoveryOverride = NULL,
tagsOverride = NULL,
autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
replicaSpecifications = NULL
)
Arguments
sourceKeyspaceName |
[required] The keyspace name of the source table. |
sourceTableName |
[required] The name of the source table. |
targetKeyspaceName |
[required] The name of the target keyspace. |
targetTableName |
[required] The name of the target table. |
restoreTimestamp |
The restore timestamp in ISO 8601 format. |
capacitySpecificationOverride |
Specifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the target table. The options are:
The default is For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
encryptionSpecificationOverride |
Specifies the encryption settings for the target table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):
The default is For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
pointInTimeRecoveryOverride |
Specifies the
If it's not specified, the default is For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
tagsOverride |
A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the restored table. For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
autoScalingSpecification |
The optional auto scaling settings for the restored table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity of a provisioned table automatically on your behalf. Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic. For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
replicaSpecifications |
The optional Region specific settings of a multi-Regional table. |
Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource
Description
Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Cost Management Console for cost allocation tracking. For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Keyspaces resource to which to add tags. |
tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Keyspaces resource. |
Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource
Description
Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_untag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Keyspaces resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
tags |
[required] A list of existing tags to be removed from the Amazon Keyspaces resource. |
Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace
Description
Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace. You can add a new Region to a keyspace that is either a single or a multi-Region keyspace. Amazon Keyspaces is going to replicate all tables in the keyspace to the new Region. To successfully replicate all tables to the new Region, they must use client-side timestamps for conflict resolution. To enable client-side timestamps, specify clientSideTimestamps.status = enabled
when invoking the API. For more information about client-side timestamps, see Client-side timestamps in Amazon Keyspaces in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_update_keyspace/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_update_keyspace(
keyspaceName,
replicationSpecification,
clientSideTimestamps = NULL
)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace. |
replicationSpecification |
[required] |
clientSideTimestamps |
Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings
Description
Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings. Note that you can only update one specific table setting per update operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_update_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
keyspaces_update_table(
keyspaceName,
tableName,
addColumns = NULL,
capacitySpecification = NULL,
encryptionSpecification = NULL,
pointInTimeRecovery = NULL,
ttl = NULL,
defaultTimeToLive = NULL,
clientSideTimestamps = NULL,
autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
replicaSpecifications = NULL
)
Arguments
keyspaceName |
[required] The name of the keyspace the specified table is stored in. |
tableName |
[required] The name of the table. |
addColumns |
For each column to be added to the specified table:
|
capacitySpecification |
Modifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the table. The options are:
The default is For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
encryptionSpecification |
Modifies the encryption settings of the table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):
The default is For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
pointInTimeRecovery |
Modifies the
If it's not specified, the default is For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
ttl |
Modifies Time to Live custom settings for the table. The options are:
The default is For more information, see Expiring data by using Amazon Keyspaces Time to Live (TTL) in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
defaultTimeToLive |
The default Time to Live setting in seconds for the table. For more information, see Setting the default TTL value for a table in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
clientSideTimestamps |
Enables client-side timestamps for the table. By default, the setting is disabled. You can enable client-side timestamps with the following option:
Once client-side timestamps are enabled for a table, this setting cannot be disabled. |
autoScalingSpecification |
The optional auto scaling settings to update for a table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity of a provisioned table automatically on your behalf. Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic. If auto scaling is already enabled for the table, you can use
For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide. |
replicaSpecifications |
The Region specific settings of a multi-Regional table. |
AWS Lake Formation
Description
Lake Formation
Defines the public endpoint for the Lake Formation service.
Usage
lakeformation(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- lakeformation( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_lf_tags_to_resource | Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource |
assume_decorated_role_with_saml | Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request |
batch_grant_permissions | Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal |
batch_revoke_permissions | Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal |
cancel_transaction | Attempts to cancel the specified transaction |
commit_transaction | Attempts to commit the specified transaction |
create_data_cells_filter | Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows |
create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration | Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources |
create_lake_formation_opt_in | Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals |
create_lf_tag | Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values |
create_lf_tag_expression | Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body |
delete_data_cells_filter | Deletes a data cell filter |
delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration | Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation |
delete_lake_formation_opt_in | Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals |
delete_lf_tag | Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name |
delete_lf_tag_expression | Deletes the LF-Tag expression |
delete_objects_on_cancel | For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled |
deregister_resource | Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog |
describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration | Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection |
describe_resource | Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation |
describe_transaction | Returns the details of a single transaction |
extend_transaction | Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted |
get_data_cells_filter | Returns a data cells filter |
get_data_lake_principal | Returns the identity of the invoking principal |
get_data_lake_settings | Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake |
get_effective_permissions_for_path | Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3 |
get_lf_tag | Returns an LF-tag definition |
get_lf_tag_expression | Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression |
get_query_state | Returns the state of a query previously submitted |
get_query_statistics | Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query |
get_resource_lf_tags | Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource |
get_table_objects | Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table |
get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials | This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition |
get_temporary_glue_table_credentials | Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3 |
get_work_unit_results | Returns the work units resulting from the query |
get_work_units | Retrieves the work units generated by the StartQueryPlanning operation |
grant_permissions | Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3 |
list_data_cells_filter | Lists all the data cell filters on a table |
list_lake_formation_opt_ins | Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions |
list_lf_tag_expressions | Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions |
list_lf_tags | Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view |
list_permissions | Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller |
list_resources | Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog |
list_table_storage_optimizers | Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table |
list_transactions | Returns metadata about transactions and their status |
put_data_lake_settings | Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation |
register_resource | Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog |
remove_lf_tags_from_resource | Removes an LF-tag from the resource |
revoke_permissions | Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3 |
search_databases_by_lf_tags | This operation allows a search on DATABASE resources by TagCondition |
search_tables_by_lf_tags | This operation allows a search on TABLE resources by LFTags |
start_query_planning | Submits a request to process a query statement |
start_transaction | Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID |
update_data_cells_filter | Updates a data cell filter |
update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration | Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters |
update_lf_tag | Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key |
update_lf_tag_expression | Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided |
update_resource | Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation |
update_table_objects | Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table |
update_table_storage_optimizer | Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- lakeformation()
svc$add_lf_tags_to_resource(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource
Description
Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_add_lf_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_add_lf_tags_to_resource(CatalogId = NULL, Resource, LFTags)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Resource |
[required] The database, table, or column resource to which to attach an LF-tag. |
LFTags |
[required] The LF-tags to attach to the resource. |
Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request
Description
Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request. This decoration allows Lake Formation to enforce access policies against the SAML users and groups. This API operation requires SAML federation setup in the caller’s account as it can only be called with valid SAML assertions. Lake Formation does not scope down the permission of the assumed role. All permissions attached to the role via the SAML federation setup will be included in the role session.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_assume_decorated_role_with_saml/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_assume_decorated_role_with_saml(
SAMLAssertion,
RoleArn,
PrincipalArn,
DurationSeconds = NULL
)
Arguments
SAMLAssertion |
[required] A SAML assertion consisting of an assertion statement for the user who needs temporary credentials. This must match the SAML assertion that was issued to IAM. This must be Base64 encoded. |
RoleArn |
[required] The role that represents an IAM principal whose scope down policy allows
it to call credential vending APIs such as
|
PrincipalArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider in IAM that describes the IdP. |
DurationSeconds |
The time period, between 900 and 43,200 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials. |
Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal
Description
Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_batch_grant_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_batch_grant_permissions(CatalogId = NULL, Entries)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Entries |
[required] A list of up to 20 entries for resource permissions to be granted by batch operation to the principal. |
Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal
Description
Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_batch_revoke_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_batch_revoke_permissions(CatalogId = NULL, Entries)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Entries |
[required] A list of up to 20 entries for resource permissions to be revoked by batch operation to the principal. |
Attempts to cancel the specified transaction
Description
Attempts to cancel the specified transaction. Returns an exception if the transaction was previously committed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_cancel_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_cancel_transaction(TransactionId)
Arguments
TransactionId |
[required] The transaction to cancel. |
Attempts to commit the specified transaction
Description
Attempts to commit the specified transaction. Returns an exception if the transaction was previously aborted. This API action is idempotent if called multiple times for the same transaction.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_commit_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_commit_transaction(TransactionId)
Arguments
TransactionId |
[required] The transaction to commit. |
Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows
Description
Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_create_data_cells_filter(TableData)
Arguments
TableData |
[required] A |
Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources
Description
Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
CatalogId = NULL,
InstanceArn = NULL,
ExternalFiltering = NULL,
ShareRecipients = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
InstanceArn |
The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance for which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
ExternalFiltering |
A list of the account IDs of Amazon Web Services accounts of third-party applications that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation. |
ShareRecipients |
A list of Amazon Web Services account IDs and/or Amazon Web Services organization/organizational unit ARNs that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation. If the If the |
Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals
Description
Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lake_formation_opt_in/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_create_lake_formation_opt_in(Principal, Resource)
Arguments
Principal |
[required] |
Resource |
[required] |
Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values
Description
Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lf_tag/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_create_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey, TagValues)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
TagKey |
[required] The key-name for the LF-tag. |
TagValues |
[required] A list of possible values an attribute can take. |
Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body
Description
Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body. This call fails if a LF-Tag expression with the same name already exists in the caller’s account or if the underlying LF-Tags don't exist. To call this API operation, caller needs the following Lake Formation permissions:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_create_lf_tag_expression(
Name,
Description = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
Expression
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] A name for the expression. |
Description |
A description with information about the LF-Tag expression. |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Expression |
[required] A list of LF-Tag conditions (key-value pairs). |
Deletes a data cell filter
Description
Deletes a data cell filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_data_cells_filter(
TableCatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
TableName = NULL,
Name = NULL
)
Arguments
TableCatalogId |
The ID of the catalog to which the table belongs. |
DatabaseName |
A database in the Glue Data Catalog. |
TableName |
A table in the database. |
Name |
The name given by the user to the data filter cell. |
Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation
Description
Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
CatalogId = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definition, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals
Description
Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_opt_in/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_opt_in(Principal, Resource)
Arguments
Principal |
[required] |
Resource |
[required] |
Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name
Description
Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name. If the input parameter tag key was not found, then the operation will throw an exception. When you delete an LF-tag, the LFTagPolicy
attached to the LF-tag becomes invalid. If the deleted LF-tag was still assigned to any resource, the tag policy attach to the deleted LF-tag will no longer be applied to the resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lf_tag/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
TagKey |
[required] The key-name for the LF-tag to delete. |
Deletes the LF-Tag expression
Description
Deletes the LF-Tag expression. The caller must be a data lake admin or have DROP
permissions on the LF-Tag expression. Deleting a LF-Tag expression will also delete all LFTagPolicy
permissions referencing the LF-Tag expression.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_lf_tag_expression(Name, CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression. |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID in which the LF-Tag expression is saved. |
For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled
Description
For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled. Without this call, no Amazon S3 objects are automatically deleted when a transaction cancels.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_objects_on_cancel/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_delete_objects_on_cancel(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
TransactionId,
Objects
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The Glue data catalog that contains the governed table. Defaults to the current account ID. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database that contains the governed table. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the governed table. |
TransactionId |
[required] ID of the transaction that the writes occur in. |
Objects |
[required] A list of VirtualObject structures, which indicates the Amazon S3 objects to be deleted if the transaction cancels. |
Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog
Description
Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_deregister_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_deregister_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to deregister. |
Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection
Description
Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
CatalogId = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation
Description
Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_describe_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The resource ARN. |
Returns the details of a single transaction
Description
Returns the details of a single transaction.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_describe_transaction(TransactionId)
Arguments
TransactionId |
[required] The transaction for which to return status. |
Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted
Description
Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_extend_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_extend_transaction(TransactionId = NULL)
Arguments
TransactionId |
The transaction to extend. |
Returns a data cells filter
Description
Returns a data cells filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_data_cells_filter(
TableCatalogId,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
Name
)
Arguments
TableCatalogId |
[required] The ID of the catalog to which the table belongs. |
DatabaseName |
[required] A database in the Glue Data Catalog. |
TableName |
[required] A table in the database. |
Name |
[required] The name given by the user to the data filter cell. |
Returns the identity of the invoking principal
Description
Returns the identity of the invoking principal.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_lake_principal/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_data_lake_principal()
Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake
Description
Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_lake_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_data_lake_settings(CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3
Description
Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3. get_effective_permissions_for_path
will not return databases and tables if the catalog is encrypted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_effective_permissions_for_path/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_effective_permissions_for_path(
CatalogId = NULL,
ResourceArn,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want to get permissions. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
Returns an LF-tag definition
Description
Returns an LF-tag definition.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_lf_tag/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
TagKey |
[required] The key-name for the LF-tag. |
Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression
Description
Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression. The caller must be a data lake admin or must have DESCRIBE
permission on the LF-Tag expression resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_lf_tag_expression(Name, CatalogId = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. |
Returns the state of a query previously submitted
Description
Returns the state of a query previously submitted. Clients are expected to poll get_query_state
to monitor the current state of the planning before retrieving the work units. A query state is only visible to the principal that made the initial call to start_query_planning
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_query_state/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_query_state(QueryId)
Arguments
QueryId |
[required] The ID of the plan query operation. |
Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query
Description
Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_query_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_query_statistics(QueryId)
Arguments
QueryId |
[required] The ID of the plan query operation. |
Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource
Description
Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_resource_lf_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_resource_lf_tags(
CatalogId = NULL,
Resource,
ShowAssignedLFTags = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Resource |
[required] The database, table, or column resource for which you want to return LF-tags. |
ShowAssignedLFTags |
Indicates whether to show the assigned LF-tags. |
Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table
Description
Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table. A transaction ID or timestamp can be specified for time-travel queries.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_table_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_table_objects(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
TransactionId = NULL,
QueryAsOfTime = NULL,
PartitionPredicate = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog containing the governed table. Defaults to the caller’s account. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database containing the governed table. |
TableName |
[required] The governed table for which to retrieve objects. |
TransactionId |
The transaction ID at which to read the governed table contents. If this
transaction has aborted, an error is returned. If not set, defaults to
the most recent committed transaction. Cannot be specified along with
|
QueryAsOfTime |
The time as of when to read the governed table contents. If not set, the
most recent transaction commit time is used. Cannot be specified along
with |
PartitionPredicate |
A predicate to filter the objects returned based on the partition keys defined in the governed table.
|
MaxResults |
Specifies how many values to return in a page. |
NextToken |
A continuation token if this is not the first call to retrieve these objects. |
This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition
Description
This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials
except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition. Lake Formation restricts the permission of the vended credentials with the same scope down policy which restricts access to a single Amazon S3 prefix.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials(
TableArn,
Partition,
Permissions = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
AuditContext = NULL,
SupportedPermissionTypes = NULL
)
Arguments
TableArn |
[required] The ARN of the partitions' table. |
Partition |
[required] A list of partition values identifying a single partition. |
Permissions |
Filters the request based on the user having been granted a list of specified permissions on the requested resource(s). |
DurationSeconds |
The time period, between 900 and 21,600 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials. |
AuditContext |
A structure representing context to access a resource (column names, query ID, etc). |
SupportedPermissionTypes |
A list of supported permission types for the partition. Valid values are
|
Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3
Description
Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3. In order to vend such credentials, Lake Formation assumes the role associated with a registered location, for example an Amazon S3 bucket, with a scope down policy which restricts the access to a single prefix.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_table_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_table_credentials(
TableArn,
Permissions = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
AuditContext = NULL,
SupportedPermissionTypes = NULL,
S3Path = NULL,
QuerySessionContext = NULL
)
Arguments
TableArn |
[required] The ARN identifying a table in the Data Catalog for the temporary credentials request. |
Permissions |
Filters the request based on the user having been granted a list of specified permissions on the requested resource(s). |
DurationSeconds |
The time period, between 900 and 21,600 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials. |
AuditContext |
A structure representing context to access a resource (column names, query ID, etc). |
SupportedPermissionTypes |
A list of supported permission types for the table. Valid values are
|
S3Path |
The Amazon S3 path for the table. |
QuerySessionContext |
A structure used as a protocol between query engines and Lake Formation or Glue. Contains both a Lake Formation generated authorization identifier and information from the request's authorization context. |
Returns the work units resulting from the query
Description
Returns the work units resulting from the query. Work units can be executed in any order and in parallel.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_work_unit_results/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_work_unit_results(QueryId, WorkUnitId, WorkUnitToken)
Arguments
QueryId |
[required] The ID of the plan query operation for which to get results. |
WorkUnitId |
[required] The work unit ID for which to get results. Value generated by
enumerating |
WorkUnitToken |
[required] A work token used to query the execution service. Token output from
|
Retrieves the work units generated by the StartQueryPlanning operation
Description
Retrieves the work units generated by the start_query_planning
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_work_units/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_get_work_units(NextToken = NULL, PageSize = NULL, QueryId)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
PageSize |
The size of each page to get in the Amazon Web Services service call. This does not affect the number of items returned in the command's output. Setting a smaller page size results in more calls to the Amazon Web Services service, retrieving fewer items in each call. This can help prevent the Amazon Web Services service calls from timing out. |
QueryId |
[required] The ID of the plan query operation. |
Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3
Description
Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_grant_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_grant_permissions(
CatalogId = NULL,
Principal,
Resource,
Permissions,
PermissionsWithGrantOption = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Principal |
[required] The principal to be granted the permissions on the resource. Supported principals are IAM users or IAM roles, and they are defined by their principal type and their ARN. Note that if you define a resource with a particular ARN, then later delete, and recreate a resource with that same ARN, the resource maintains the permissions already granted. |
Resource |
[required] The resource to which permissions are to be granted. Resources in Lake Formation are the Data Catalog, databases, and tables. |
Permissions |
[required] The permissions granted to the principal on the resource. Lake Formation defines privileges to grant and revoke access to metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3. Lake Formation requires that each principal be authorized to perform a specific task on Lake Formation resources. |
PermissionsWithGrantOption |
Indicates a list of the granted permissions that the principal may pass
to other users. These permissions may only be a subset of the
permissions granted in the |
Lists all the data cell filters on a table
Description
Lists all the data cell filters on a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_data_cells_filter(
Table = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
Table |
A table in the Glue Data Catalog. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
MaxResults |
The maximum size of the response. |
Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions
Description
Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lake_formation_opt_ins/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_lake_formation_opt_ins(
Principal = NULL,
Resource = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Principal |
|
Resource |
A structure for the resource. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions
Description
Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions. Data Lake and read only admins implicitly can see all tag expressions in their account, else caller needs DESCRIBE permissions on tag expression.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lf_tag_expressions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_lf_tag_expressions(
CatalogId = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view
Description
Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lf_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_lf_tags(
CatalogId = NULL,
ResourceShareType = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
ResourceShareType |
If resource share type is |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller
Description
Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller. For example, if you are granted an ALTER permission, you are able to see only the principal permissions for ALTER.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_permissions(
CatalogId = NULL,
Principal = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
Resource = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
IncludeRelated = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Principal |
Specifies a principal to filter the permissions returned. |
ResourceType |
Specifies a resource type to filter the permissions returned. |
Resource |
A resource where you will get a list of the principal permissions. This operation does not support getting privileges on a table with columns. Instead, call this operation on the table, and the operation returns the table and the table w columns. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
IncludeRelated |
Indicates that related permissions should be included in the results. |
Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog
Description
Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_resources/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_resources(
FilterConditionList = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
FilterConditionList |
Any applicable row-level and/or column-level filtering conditions for the resources. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of resource results. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve these resources. |
Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table
Description
Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_table_storage_optimizers/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_table_storage_optimizers(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
StorageOptimizerType = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] Name of the database where the table is present. |
TableName |
[required] Name of the table. |
StorageOptimizerType |
The specific type of storage optimizers to list. The supported value is
|
MaxResults |
The number of storage optimizers to return on each call. |
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is a continuation call. |
Returns metadata about transactions and their status
Description
Returns metadata about transactions and their status. To prevent the response from growing indefinitely, only uncommitted transactions and those available for time-travel queries are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_transactions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_list_transactions(
CatalogId = NULL,
StatusFilter = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog for which to list transactions. Defaults to the account ID of the caller. |
StatusFilter |
A filter indicating the status of transactions to return. Options are
ALL | COMPLETED | COMMITTED | ABORTED | ACTIVE. The default is |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of transactions to return in a single call. |
NextToken |
A continuation token if this is not the first call to retrieve transactions. |
Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation
Description
Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation. For more information on admin privileges, see Granting Lake Formation Permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_put_data_lake_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_put_data_lake_settings(CatalogId = NULL, DataLakeSettings)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
DataLakeSettings |
[required] A structure representing a list of Lake Formation principals designated as data lake administrators. |
Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog
Description
Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_register_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_register_resource(
ResourceArn,
UseServiceLinkedRole = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
WithFederation = NULL,
HybridAccessEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to register. |
UseServiceLinkedRole |
Designates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) service-linked role by registering this role with the Data Catalog. A service-linked role is a unique type of IAM role that is linked directly to Lake Formation. For more information, see Using Service-Linked Roles for Lake Formation. |
RoleArn |
The identifier for the role that registers the resource. |
WithFederation |
Whether or not the resource is a federated resource. |
HybridAccessEnabled |
Specifies whether the data access of tables pointing to the location can be managed by both Lake Formation permissions as well as Amazon S3 bucket policies. |
Removes an LF-tag from the resource
Description
Removes an LF-tag from the resource. Only database, table, or tableWithColumns resource are allowed. To tag columns, use the column inclusion list in tableWithColumns
to specify column input.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_remove_lf_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_remove_lf_tags_from_resource(CatalogId = NULL, Resource, LFTags)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Resource |
[required] The database, table, or column resource where you want to remove an LF-tag. |
LFTags |
[required] The LF-tags to be removed from the resource. |
Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3
Description
Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_revoke_permissions/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_revoke_permissions(
CatalogId = NULL,
Principal,
Resource,
Permissions,
PermissionsWithGrantOption = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Principal |
[required] The principal to be revoked permissions on the resource. |
Resource |
[required] The resource to which permissions are to be revoked. |
Permissions |
[required] The permissions revoked to the principal on the resource. For information about permissions, see Security and Access Control to Metadata and Data. |
PermissionsWithGrantOption |
Indicates a list of permissions for which to revoke the grant option allowing the principal to pass permissions to other principals. |
This operation allows a search on DATABASE resources by TagCondition
Description
This operation allows a search on DATABASE
resources by TagCondition
. This operation is used by admins who want to grant user permissions on certain TagConditions
. Before making a grant, the admin can use SearchDatabasesByTags
to find all resources where the given TagConditions
are valid to verify whether the returned resources can be shared.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_search_databases_by_lf_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_search_databases_by_lf_tags(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
Expression
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Expression |
[required] A list of conditions ( |
This operation allows a search on TABLE resources by LFTags
Description
This operation allows a search on TABLE
resources by LFTag
s. This will be used by admins who want to grant user permissions on certain LF-tags. Before making a grant, the admin can use search_tables_by_lf_tags
to find all resources where the given LFTag
s are valid to verify whether the returned resources can be shared.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_search_tables_by_lf_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_search_tables_by_lf_tags(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
Expression
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
Expression |
[required] A list of conditions ( |
Submits a request to process a query statement
Description
Submits a request to process a query statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_start_query_planning/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_start_query_planning(QueryPlanningContext, QueryString)
Arguments
QueryPlanningContext |
[required] A structure containing information about the query plan. |
QueryString |
[required] A PartiQL query statement used as an input to the planner service. |
Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID
Description
Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID. Transaction IDs are opaque objects that you can use to identify a transaction.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_start_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_start_transaction(TransactionType = NULL)
Arguments
TransactionType |
Indicates whether this transaction should be read only or read and write. Writes made using a read-only transaction ID will be rejected. Read-only transactions do not need to be committed. |
Updates a data cell filter
Description
Updates a data cell filter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_data_cells_filter(TableData)
Arguments
TableData |
[required] A |
Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters
Description
Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
CatalogId = NULL,
ShareRecipients = NULL,
ApplicationStatus = NULL,
ExternalFiltering = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
ShareRecipients |
A list of Amazon Web Services account IDs or Amazon Web Services organization/organizational unit ARNs that are allowed to access to access data managed by Lake Formation. If the If the If the |
ApplicationStatus |
Allows to enable or disable the IAM Identity Center connection. |
ExternalFiltering |
A list of the account IDs of Amazon Web Services accounts of third-party applications that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation. |
Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key
Description
Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key. If the LF-tag does not exist, the operation throws an EntityNotFoundException. The values in the delete key values will be deleted from list of possible values. If any value in the delete key values is attached to a resource, then API errors out with a 400 Exception - "Update not allowed". Untag the attribute before deleting the LF-tag key's value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lf_tag/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_lf_tag(
CatalogId = NULL,
TagKey,
TagValuesToDelete = NULL,
TagValuesToAdd = NULL
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment. |
TagKey |
[required] The key-name for the LF-tag for which to add or delete values. |
TagValuesToDelete |
A list of LF-tag values to delete from the LF-tag. |
TagValuesToAdd |
A list of LF-tag values to add from the LF-tag. |
Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided
Description
Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided. Updating a LF-Tag expression immediately changes the permission boundaries of all existing LFTagPolicy
permission grants that reference the given LF-Tag expression.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_lf_tag_expression(
Name,
Description = NULL,
CatalogId = NULL,
Expression
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression. |
Description |
The description with information about the saved LF-Tag expression. |
CatalogId |
The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. |
Expression |
[required] The LF-Tag expression body composed of one more LF-Tag key-value pairs. |
Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation
Description
Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_resource(
RoleArn,
ResourceArn,
WithFederation = NULL,
HybridAccessEnabled = NULL
)
Arguments
RoleArn |
[required] The new role to use for the given resource registered in Lake Formation. |
ResourceArn |
[required] The resource ARN. |
WithFederation |
Whether or not the resource is a federated resource. |
HybridAccessEnabled |
Specifies whether the data access of tables pointing to the location can be managed by both Lake Formation permissions as well as Amazon S3 bucket policies. |
Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table
Description
Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_table_objects/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_table_objects(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
TransactionId = NULL,
WriteOperations
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The catalog containing the governed table to update. Defaults to the caller’s account ID. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The database containing the governed table to update. |
TableName |
[required] The governed table to update. |
TransactionId |
The transaction at which to do the write. |
WriteOperations |
[required] A list of |
Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table
Description
Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_table_storage_optimizer/ for full documentation.
Usage
lakeformation_update_table_storage_optimizer(
CatalogId = NULL,
DatabaseName,
TableName,
StorageOptimizerConfig
)
Arguments
CatalogId |
The Catalog ID of the table. |
DatabaseName |
[required] Name of the database where the table is present. |
TableName |
[required] Name of the table for which to enable the storage optimizer. |
StorageOptimizerConfig |
[required] Name of the configuration for the storage optimizer. |
Amazon MemoryDB
Description
MemoryDB is a fully managed, Redis OSS-compatible, in-memory database that delivers ultra-fast performance and Multi-AZ durability for modern applications built using microservices architectures. MemoryDB stores the entire database in-memory, enabling low latency and high throughput data access. It is compatible with Redis OSS, a popular open source data store, enabling you to leverage Redis OSS’ flexible and friendly data structures, APIs, and commands.
Usage
memorydb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- memorydb( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_update_cluster | Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied |
copy_snapshot | Makes a copy of an existing snapshot |
create_acl | Creates an Access Control List |
create_cluster | Creates a cluster |
create_multi_region_cluster | Creates a new multi-Region cluster |
create_parameter_group | Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group |
create_snapshot | Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time |
create_subnet_group | Creates a subnet group |
create_user | Creates a MemoryDB user |
delete_acl | Deletes an Access Control List |
delete_cluster | Deletes a cluster |
delete_multi_region_cluster | Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster |
delete_parameter_group | Deletes the specified parameter group |
delete_snapshot | Deletes an existing snapshot |
delete_subnet_group | Deletes a subnet group |
delete_user | Deletes a user |
describe_ac_ls | Returns a list of ACLs |
describe_clusters | Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied |
describe_engine_versions | Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions |
describe_events | Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups |
describe_multi_region_clusters | Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters |
describe_parameter_groups | Returns a list of parameter group descriptions |
describe_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group |
describe_reserved_nodes | Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node |
describe_reserved_nodes_offerings | Lists available reserved node offerings |
describe_service_updates | Returns details of the service updates |
describe_snapshots | Returns information about cluster snapshots |
describe_subnet_groups | Returns a list of subnet group descriptions |
describe_users | Returns a list of users |
failover_shard | Used to failover a shard |
list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates | Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster |
list_allowed_node_type_updates | Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type |
list_tags | Lists all tags currently on a named resource |
purchase_reserved_nodes_offering | Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering |
reset_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value |
tag_resource | A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive |
untag_resource | Use this operation to remove tags on a resource |
update_acl | Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List |
update_cluster | Modifies the settings for a cluster |
update_multi_region_cluster | Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster |
update_parameter_group | Updates the parameters of a parameter group |
update_subnet_group | Updates a subnet group |
update_user | Changes user password(s) and/or access string |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- memorydb()
svc$batch_update_cluster(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied
Description
Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied. For more information on service updates and applying them, see Applying the service updates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_batch_update_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_batch_update_cluster(ClusterNames, ServiceUpdate = NULL)
Arguments
ClusterNames |
[required] The cluster names to apply the updates. |
ServiceUpdate |
The unique ID of the service update |
Makes a copy of an existing snapshot
Description
Makes a copy of an existing snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_copy_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_copy_snapshot(
SourceSnapshotName,
TargetSnapshotName,
TargetBucket = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceSnapshotName |
[required] The name of an existing snapshot from which to make a copy. |
TargetSnapshotName |
[required] A name for the snapshot copy. MemoryDB does not permit overwriting a snapshot, therefore this name must be unique within its context - MemoryDB or an Amazon S3 bucket if exporting. |
TargetBucket |
The Amazon S3 bucket to which the snapshot is exported. This parameter is used only when exporting a snapshot for external access. When using this parameter to export a snapshot, be sure MemoryDB has the needed permissions to this S3 bucket. For more information, see Step 2: Grant MemoryDB Access to Your Amazon S3 Bucket. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates an Access Control List
Description
Creates an Access Control List. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_acl(ACLName, UserNames = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
ACLName |
[required] The name of the Access Control List. |
UserNames |
The list of users that belong to the Access Control List. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a cluster
Description
Creates a cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same protocol-compliant engine software.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_cluster(
ClusterName,
NodeType,
MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
Description = NULL,
NumShards = NULL,
NumReplicasPerShard = NULL,
SubnetGroupName = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
MaintenanceWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
TLSEnabled = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
SnapshotArns = NULL,
SnapshotName = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
ACLName,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
DataTiering = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster. This value must be unique as it also serves as the cluster identifier. |
NodeType |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the cluster. |
MultiRegionClusterName |
The name of the multi-Region cluster to be created. |
ParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group associated with the cluster. |
Description |
An optional description of the cluster. |
NumShards |
The number of shards the cluster will contain. The default value is 1. |
NumReplicasPerShard |
The number of replicas to apply to each shard. The default value is 1. The maximum is 5. |
SubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to be used for the cluster. |
SecurityGroupIds |
A list of security group names to associate with this cluster. |
MaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: |
Port |
The port number on which each of the nodes accepts connections. |
SnsTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent. |
TLSEnabled |
A flag to enable in-transit encryption on the cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the cluster. |
SnapshotArns |
A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARN) that uniquely identify the RDB snapshot files stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot files are used to populate the new cluster. The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas. |
SnapshotName |
The name of a snapshot from which to restore data into the new cluster. The snapshot status changes to restoring while the new cluster is being created. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which MemoryDB retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. Tags are comma-separated key,value pairs (e.g. Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue. You can include multiple tags as shown following: Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue Key=mySecondKey, Value=mySecondKeyValue. |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which MemoryDB begins taking a daily snapshot of your shard. Example: 05:00-09:00 If you do not specify this parameter, MemoryDB automatically chooses an appropriate time range. |
ACLName |
[required] The name of the Access Control List to associate with the cluster. |
Engine |
The name of the engine to be used for the cluster. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the Redis OSS engine to be used for the cluster. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
When set to true, the cluster will automatically receive minor engine version upgrades after launch. |
DataTiering |
Enables data tiering. Data tiering is only supported for clusters using the r6gd node type. This parameter must be set when using r6gd nodes. For more information, see Data tiering. |
Creates a new multi-Region cluster
Description
Creates a new multi-Region cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_multi_region_cluster(
MultiRegionClusterNameSuffix,
Description = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
NodeType,
MultiRegionParameterGroupName = NULL,
NumShards = NULL,
TLSEnabled = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
MultiRegionClusterNameSuffix |
[required] A suffix to be added to the multi-Region cluster name. |
Description |
A description for the multi-Region cluster. |
Engine |
The name of the engine to be used for the multi-Region cluster. |
EngineVersion |
The version of the engine to be used for the multi-Region cluster. |
NodeType |
[required] The node type to be used for the multi-Region cluster. |
MultiRegionParameterGroupName |
The name of the multi-Region parameter group to be associated with the cluster. |
NumShards |
The number of shards for the multi-Region cluster. |
TLSEnabled |
Whether to enable TLS encryption for the multi-Region cluster. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be applied to the multi-Region cluster. |
Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group
Description
Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group. A parameter group is a collection of parameters and their values that are applied to all of the nodes in any cluster. For more information, see Configuring engine parameters using parameter groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_parameter_group(
ParameterGroupName,
Family,
Description = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group. |
Family |
[required] The name of the parameter group family that the parameter group can be used with. |
Description |
An optional description of the parameter group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time
Description
Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_snapshot(
ClusterName,
SnapshotName,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The snapshot is created from this cluster. |
SnapshotName |
[required] A name for the snapshot being created. |
KmsKeyId |
The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a subnet group
Description
Creates a subnet group. A subnet group is a collection of subnets (typically private) that you can designate for your clusters running in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) environment. When you create a cluster in an Amazon VPC, you must specify a subnet group. MemoryDB uses that subnet group to choose a subnet and IP addresses within that subnet to associate with your nodes. For more information, see Subnets and subnet groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_subnet_group(
SubnetGroupName,
Description = NULL,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group. |
Description |
A description for the subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the subnet group. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Creates a MemoryDB user
Description
Creates a MemoryDB user. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_create_user(UserName, AuthenticationMode, AccessString, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user. This value must be unique as it also serves as the user identifier. |
AuthenticationMode |
[required] Denotes the user's authentication properties, such as whether it requires a password to authenticate. |
AccessString |
[required] Access permissions string used for this user. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Deletes an Access Control List
Description
Deletes an Access Control List. The ACL must first be disassociated from the cluster before it can be deleted. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_acl(ACLName)
Arguments
ACLName |
[required] The name of the Access Control List to delete. |
Deletes a cluster
Description
Deletes a cluster. It also deletes all associated nodes and node endpoints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_cluster(
ClusterName,
MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
FinalSnapshotName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster to be deleted |
MultiRegionClusterName |
The name of the multi-Region cluster to be deleted. |
FinalSnapshotName |
The user-supplied name of a final cluster snapshot. This is the unique name that identifies the snapshot. MemoryDB creates the snapshot, and then deletes the cluster immediately afterward. |
Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster
Description
Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_multi_region_cluster(MultiRegionClusterName)
Arguments
MultiRegionClusterName |
[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified parameter group
Description
Deletes the specified parameter group. You cannot delete a parameter group if it is associated with any clusters. You cannot delete the default parameter groups in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to delete. |
Deletes an existing snapshot
Description
Deletes an existing snapshot. When you receive a successful response from this operation, MemoryDB immediately begins deleting the snapshot; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_snapshot(SnapshotName)
Arguments
SnapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot to delete. |
Deletes a subnet group
Description
Deletes a subnet group. You cannot delete a default subnet group or one that is associated with any clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group to delete. |
Deletes a user
Description
Deletes a user. The user will be removed from all ACLs and in turn removed from all clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_delete_user(UserName)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user to delete |
Returns a list of ACLs
Description
Returns a list of ACLs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_ac_ls/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_ac_ls(ACLName = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
ACLName |
The name of the ACL. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied
Description
Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_clusters(
ClusterName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ShowShardDetails = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
The name of the cluster. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
ShowShardDetails |
An optional flag that can be included in the request to retrieve information about the individual shard(s). |
Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions
Description
Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_engine_versions(
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
ParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
DefaultOnly = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The name of the engine for which to list available versions. |
EngineVersion |
The Redis OSS engine version |
ParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific parameter group family to return details for. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
DefaultOnly |
If true, specifies that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is to be returned. |
Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups
Description
Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular cluster, security group, or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter. By default, only the events occurring within the last hour are returned; however, you can retrieve up to 14 days' worth of events if necessary.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_events(
SourceName = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceName |
The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, all sources are included in the response. |
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z |
Duration |
The number of minutes worth of events to retrieve. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters
Description
Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_multi_region_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_multi_region_clusters(
MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
ShowClusterDetails = NULL
)
Arguments
MultiRegionClusterName |
The name of a specific multi-Region cluster to describe. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return. |
NextToken |
A token to specify where to start paginating. |
ShowClusterDetails |
Details about the multi-Region cluster. |
Returns a list of parameter group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of parameter group descriptions. If a parameter group name is specified, the list contains only the descriptions for that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_parameter_groups(
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific parameter group to return details for. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_parameters(
ParameterGroupName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] he name of a specific parameter group to return details for. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node
Description
Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes(
ReservationId = NULL,
ReservedNodesOfferingId = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservationId |
The reserved node identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID. |
ReservedNodesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier. |
NodeType |
The node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified node type. For more information, see Supported node types. |
Duration |
The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for this duration. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid values: "All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront" |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. |
Lists available reserved node offerings
Description
Lists available reserved node offerings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes_offerings(
ReservedNodesOfferingId = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier. |
NodeType |
The node type for the reserved nodes. For more information, see Supported node types. |
Duration |
Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for a given duration. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid values: "All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront" |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. |
Returns details of the service updates
Description
Returns details of the service updates.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_service_updates/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_service_updates(
ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
ClusterNames = NULL,
Status = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ServiceUpdateName |
The unique ID of the service update to describe. |
ClusterNames |
The list of cluster names to identify service updates to apply. |
Status |
The status(es) of the service updates to filter on. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns information about cluster snapshots
Description
Returns information about cluster snapshots. By default, DescribeSnapshots lists all of your snapshots; it can optionally describe a single snapshot, or just the snapshots associated with a particular cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_snapshots(
ClusterName = NULL,
SnapshotName = NULL,
Source = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
ShowDetail = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
A user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific cluster are described. |
SnapshotName |
A user-supplied name of the snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this named snapshot is described. |
Source |
If set to system, the output shows snapshots that were automatically created by MemoryDB. If set to user the output shows snapshots that were manually created. If omitted, the output shows both automatically and manually created snapshots. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
ShowDetail |
A Boolean value which if true, the shard configuration is included in the snapshot description. |
Returns a list of subnet group descriptions
Description
Returns a list of subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_subnet_groups(
SubnetGroupName = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group to return details for. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Returns a list of users
Description
Returns a list of users.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_users/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_describe_users(
UserName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
UserName |
The name of the user. |
Filters |
Filter to determine the list of users to return. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved. |
NextToken |
An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged. |
Used to failover a shard
Description
Used to failover a shard. This API is designed for testing the behavior of your application in case of MemoryDB failover. It is not designed to be used as a production-level tool for initiating a failover to overcome a problem you may have with the cluster. Moreover, in certain conditions such as large scale operational events, Amazon may block this API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_failover_shard/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_failover_shard(ClusterName, ShardName)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The cluster being failed over. |
ShardName |
[required] The name of the shard. |
Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster
Description
Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates(MultiRegionClusterName)
Arguments
MultiRegionClusterName |
[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster. |
Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type
Description
Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type. When you use the UpdateCluster operation to scale your cluster, the value of the NodeType parameter must be one of the node types returned by this operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_allowed_node_type_updates/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_list_allowed_node_type_updates(ClusterName)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster you want to scale. MemoryDB uses the cluster name to identify the current node type being used by this cluster, and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to. |
Lists all tags currently on a named resource
Description
Lists all tags currently on a named resource. A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track your MemoryDB resources. For more information, see Tagging your MemoryDB resources.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_list_tags(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want the list of tags. |
Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering
Description
Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering. Reserved nodes are not eligible for cancellation and are non-refundable.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_purchase_reserved_nodes_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_purchase_reserved_nodes_offering(
ReservedNodesOfferingId,
ReservationId = NULL,
NodeCount = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodesOfferingId |
[required] The ID of the reserved node offering to purchase. |
ReservationId |
A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. |
NodeCount |
The number of node instances to reserve. |
Tags |
A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value. You can reset specific parameters by submitting a list of parameter names. To reset the entire parameter group, specify the AllParameters and ParameterGroupName parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_reset_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_reset_parameter_group(
ParameterGroupName,
AllParameters = NULL,
ParameterNames = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to reset. |
AllParameters |
If true, all parameters in the parameter group are reset to their default values. If false, only the parameters listed by ParameterNames are reset to their default values. |
ParameterNames |
An array of parameter names to reset to their default values. If AllParameters is true, do not use ParameterNames. If AllParameters is false, you must specify the name of at least one parameter to reset. |
A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive
Description
A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your MemoryDB resources. When you add or remove tags on clusters, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the cluster. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to be added. |
Tags |
[required] A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. |
Use this operation to remove tags on a resource
Description
Use this operation to remove tags on a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to be removed. |
TagKeys |
[required] The list of keys of the tags that are to be removed. |
Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List
Description
Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_acl/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_acl(ACLName, UserNamesToAdd = NULL, UserNamesToRemove = NULL)
Arguments
ACLName |
[required] The name of the Access Control List. |
UserNamesToAdd |
The list of users to add to the Access Control List. |
UserNamesToRemove |
The list of users to remove from the Access Control List. |
Modifies the settings for a cluster
Description
Modifies the settings for a cluster. You can use this operation to change one or more cluster configuration settings by specifying the settings and the new values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_cluster(
ClusterName,
Description = NULL,
SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
MaintenanceWindow = NULL,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
SnsTopicStatus = NULL,
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
SnapshotWindow = NULL,
SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
ShardConfiguration = NULL,
ACLName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterName |
[required] The name of the cluster to update. |
Description |
The description of the cluster to update. |
SecurityGroupIds |
The SecurityGroupIds to update. |
MaintenanceWindow |
Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for
Example: |
SnsTopicArn |
The SNS topic ARN to update. |
SnsTopicStatus |
The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic. Notifications are sent only if the status is active. |
ParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group to update. |
SnapshotWindow |
The daily time range (in UTC) during which MemoryDB begins taking a daily snapshot of your cluster. |
SnapshotRetentionLimit |
The number of days for which MemoryDB retains automatic cluster snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted. |
NodeType |
A valid node type that you want to scale this cluster up or down to. |
Engine |
The name of the engine to be used for the cluster. |
EngineVersion |
The upgraded version of the engine to be run on the nodes. You can upgrade to a newer engine version, but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster and create it anew with the earlier engine version. |
ReplicaConfiguration |
The number of replicas that will reside in each shard. |
ShardConfiguration |
The number of shards in the cluster. |
ACLName |
The Access Control List that is associated with the cluster. |
Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster
Description
Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_multi_region_cluster(
MultiRegionClusterName,
NodeType = NULL,
Description = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
ShardConfiguration = NULL,
MultiRegionParameterGroupName = NULL,
UpdateStrategy = NULL
)
Arguments
MultiRegionClusterName |
[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster to be updated. |
NodeType |
The new node type to be used for the multi-Region cluster. |
Description |
A new description for the multi-Region cluster. |
EngineVersion |
The new engine version to be used for the multi-Region cluster. |
ShardConfiguration |
|
MultiRegionParameterGroupName |
The new multi-Region parameter group to be associated with the cluster. |
UpdateStrategy |
Whether to force the update even if it may cause data loss. |
Updates the parameters of a parameter group
Description
Updates the parameters of a parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, ParameterNameValues)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to update. |
ParameterNameValues |
[required] An array of parameter names and values for the parameter update. You must supply at least one parameter name and value; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters may be updated per request. |
Updates a subnet group
Description
Updates a subnet group. For more information, see Updating a subnet group
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_subnet_group(
SubnetGroupName,
Description = NULL,
SubnetIds = NULL
)
Arguments
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group |
Description |
A description of the subnet group |
SubnetIds |
The EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group. |
Changes user password(s) and/or access string
Description
Changes user password(s) and/or access string.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_user/ for full documentation.
Usage
memorydb_update_user(UserName, AuthenticationMode = NULL, AccessString = NULL)
Arguments
UserName |
[required] The name of the user |
AuthenticationMode |
Denotes the user's authentication properties, such as whether it requires a password to authenticate. |
AccessString |
Access permissions string used for this user. |
Amazon Neptune
Description
Amazon Neptune is a fast, reliable, fully-managed graph database service that makes it easy to build and run applications that work with highly connected datasets. The core of Amazon Neptune is a purpose-built, high-performance graph database engine optimized for storing billions of relationships and querying the graph with milliseconds latency. Amazon Neptune supports popular graph models Property Graph and W3C's RDF, and their respective query languages Apache TinkerPop Gremlin and SPARQL, allowing you to easily build queries that efficiently navigate highly connected datasets. Neptune powers graph use cases such as recommendation engines, fraud detection, knowledge graphs, drug discovery, and network security.
This interface reference for Amazon Neptune contains documentation for a programming or command line interface you can use to manage Amazon Neptune. Note that Amazon Neptune is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces might require techniques such as polling or callback functions to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a command is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the maintenance window. The reference structure is as follows, and we list following some related topics from the user guide.
Usage
neptune(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- neptune( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_role_to_db_cluster | Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster |
add_source_identifier_to_subscription | Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription |
add_tags_to_resource | Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource |
apply_pending_maintenance_action | Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance) |
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group | Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group |
copy_db_cluster_snapshot | Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster |
copy_db_parameter_group | Copies the specified DB parameter group |
create_db_cluster | Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
create_db_cluster_endpoint | Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
create_db_cluster_parameter_group | Creates a new DB cluster parameter group |
create_db_cluster_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster |
create_db_instance | Creates a new DB instance |
create_db_parameter_group | Creates a new DB parameter group |
create_db_subnet_group | Creates a new DB subnet group |
create_event_subscription | Creates an event notification subscription |
create_global_cluster | Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions |
delete_db_cluster | The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster |
delete_db_cluster_endpoint | Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group | Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group |
delete_db_cluster_snapshot | Deletes a DB cluster snapshot |
delete_db_instance | The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance |
delete_db_parameter_group | Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup |
delete_db_subnet_group | Deletes a DB subnet group |
delete_event_subscription | Deletes an event notification subscription |
delete_global_cluster | Deletes a global database |
describe_db_cluster_endpoints | Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups | Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions |
describe_db_cluster_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group |
describe_db_clusters | Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination |
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes | Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot |
describe_db_cluster_snapshots | Returns information about DB cluster snapshots |
describe_db_engine_versions | Returns a list of the available DB engines |
describe_db_instances | Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination |
describe_db_parameter_groups | Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions |
describe_db_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group |
describe_db_subnet_groups | Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions |
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine |
describe_engine_default_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine |
describe_event_categories | Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type |
describe_events | Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days |
describe_event_subscriptions | Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account |
describe_global_clusters | Returns information about Neptune global database clusters |
describe_orderable_db_instance_options | Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine |
describe_pending_maintenance_actions | Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action |
describe_valid_db_instance_modifications | You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance |
failover_db_cluster | Forces a failover for a DB cluster |
failover_global_cluster | Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource |
modify_db_cluster | Modify a setting for a DB cluster |
modify_db_cluster_endpoint | Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group |
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute | Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot |
modify_db_instance | Modifies settings for a DB instance |
modify_db_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group |
modify_db_subnet_group | Modifies an existing DB subnet group |
modify_event_subscription | Modifies an existing event notification subscription |
modify_global_cluster | Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster |
promote_read_replica_db_cluster | Not supported |
reboot_db_instance | You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons |
remove_from_global_cluster | Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database |
remove_role_from_db_cluster | Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster |
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription | Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource |
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value |
reset_db_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value |
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot | Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot |
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time | Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time |
start_db_cluster | Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API |
stop_db_cluster | Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- neptune()
svc$add_role_to_db_cluster(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster
Description
Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_role_to_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_add_role_to_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RoleArn,
FeatureName = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the
Neptune DB cluster, for example
|
FeatureName |
The name of the feature for the Neptune DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For the list of supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion. |
Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription
Description
Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SourceIdentifier
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the event source to be added. Constraints:
|
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource
Description
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource. These tags can also be used with cost allocation reporting to track cost associated with Amazon Neptune resources, or used in a Condition statement in an IAM policy for Amazon Neptune.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Neptune resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Neptune resource. |
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)
Description
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
ResourceIdentifier,
ApplyAction,
OptInType
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ApplyAction |
[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource. Valid values: |
OptInType |
[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in
request. An opt-in request of type Valid values:
|
Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group
Description
Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Constraints:
|
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the copied DB cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the copied DB cluster parameter group. |
Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster
Description
Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Amazon KMS key ID for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), KMS key identifier, or the KMS key alias for the KMS encryption key. If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon account,
you can specify a value for If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another
Amazon account, then you must specify a value for KMS encryption keys are specific to the Amazon Region that they are created in, and you can't use encryption keys from one Amazon Region in another Amazon Region. You cannot encrypt an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot when you copy it. If you try to copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned. |
PreSignedUrl |
Not currently supported. |
CopyTags |
True to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot, and otherwise false. The default is false. |
Tags |
The tags to assign to the new DB cluster snapshot copy. |
Copies the specified DB parameter group
Description
Copies the specified DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_copy_db_parameter_group(
SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBParameterGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). Constraints:
|
TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied DB parameter group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBParameterGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the copied DB parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the copied DB parameter group. |
Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_cluster(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
ReplicationSourceIdentifier = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
A list of EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the DB cluster can be created in. |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
CharacterSetName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the DB cluster that is created. |
DatabaseName |
The name for your database of up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon Neptune will not create a database in the DB cluster you are creating. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default is used. Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default. Example: |
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster. Valid Values: |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster. Example: |
Port |
The port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections. Default: |
MasterUsername |
Not supported by Neptune. |
MasterUserPassword |
Not supported by Neptune. |
OptionGroupName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region. To see the time blocks available, see Neptune Maintenance Window in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Neptune Maintenance Window in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
ReplicationSourceIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a Read Replica. |
Tags |
The tags to assign to the new DB cluster. |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the DB cluster is encrypted. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. If an encryption key is not specified in
Amazon KMS creates the default encryption key for your Amazon account. Your Amazon account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region. If you create a Read Replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another
Amazon Region, you must set |
PreSignedUrl |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
If set to Default: |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
A list of the log types that this DB cluster should export to CloudWatch
Logs. Valid log types are: |
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is enabled. |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. |
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The ID of the Neptune global database to which this new DB cluster should be added. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. Valid Values:
Default:
When you create a Neptune cluster with the storage type set to |
Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_cluster_endpoint(
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
EndpointType,
StaticMembers = NULL,
ExcludedMembers = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
EndpointType |
[required] The type of the endpoint. One of: |
StaticMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group. |
ExcludedMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Neptune resource. |
Creates a new DB cluster parameter group
Description
Creates a new DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family. |
Description |
[required] The description for the DB cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the new DB cluster parameter group. |
Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster
Description
Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
DBClusterIdentifier,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot. |
Creates a new DB instance
Description
Creates a new DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_instance(
DBName = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifier,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DBInstanceClass,
Engine,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
Timezone = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL
)
Arguments
DBName |
Not supported. |
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
AllocatedStorage |
Not supported by Neptune. |
DBInstanceClass |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example,
|
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance. Valid Values: |
MasterUsername |
Not supported by Neptune. |
MasterUserPassword |
Not supported by Neptune. |
DBSecurityGroups |
A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance. Default: The default DB security group for the database engine. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is
managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC. |
AvailabilityZone |
The EC2 Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Region. Example: Constraint: The AvailabilityZone parameter can't be specified if the
MultiAZ parameter is set to |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance. If there is no DB subnet group, then it is a non-VPC DB instance. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default DBParameterGroup for the specified engine is used. Constraints:
|
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by
the DB cluster. For more information, see
Default: 1 Constraints:
|
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created. Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is
managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
|
Port |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. Not applicable. The port is managed by the DB cluster. For more
information, see Default: Type: Integer |
MultiAZ |
Specifies if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can't set the AvailabilityZone parameter if the MultiAZ parameter is set to true. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. Currently, setting this parameter has no effect. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Indicates that minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. Default: |
LicenseModel |
License model information for this DB instance. Valid values: |
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for the DB instance. |
OptionGroupName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
CharacterSetName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
PubliclyAccessible |
This flag should no longer be used. |
Tags |
The tags to assign to the new instance. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster that the instance will belong to. For information on creating a DB cluster, see
Type: String |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance. Not applicable. Storage is managed by the DB Cluster. |
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the DB instance is encrypted. Not applicable. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB
cluster. For more information, see
Default: false |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a DB instance with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB instance, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KM encryption key. Not applicable. The KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For
more information, see If the |
Domain |
Specify the Active Directory Domain to create the instance in. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
True to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance, and otherwise false. The default is false. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0. If Valid Values: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits Neptune to send enhanced
monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If |
DomainIAMRoleName |
Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service. |
PromotionTier |
A value that specifies the order in which an Read Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. Default: 1 Valid Values: 0 - 15 |
Timezone |
The time zone of the DB instance. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Not supported by Neptune (ignored). |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. |
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. See Deleting a DB Instance. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled in their parent DB cluster. |
Creates a new DB parameter group
Description
Creates a new DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_parameter_group(
DBParameterGroupName,
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family. |
Description |
[required] The description for the DB parameter group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the new DB parameter group. |
Creates a new DB subnet group
Description
Creates a new DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens. Must not be default. Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
[required] The description for the DB subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the new DB subnet group. |
Creates an event notification subscription
Description
Creates an event notification subscription. This action requires a topic ARN (Amazon Resource Name) created by either the Neptune console, the SNS console, or the SNS API. To obtain an ARN with SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
SourceIds = NULL,
Enabled = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the subscription. Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters. |
SnsTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. if this value is not specified, all events are returned. Valid values: |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given SourceType by using the DescribeEventCategories action. |
SourceIds |
The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens. Constraints:
|
Enabled |
A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription, set to false to create the subscription but not active it. |
Tags |
The tags to be applied to the new event subscription. |
Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions
Description
Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions. The global database contains a single primary cluster with read-write capability, and read-only secondary clusters that receive data from the primary cluster through high-speed replication performed by the Neptune storage subsystem.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_create_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the new global database cluster. |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
(Optional) The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an existing Neptune DB cluster to use as the primary cluster of the new global database. |
Engine |
The name of the database engine to be used in the global database. Valid values: |
EngineVersion |
The Neptune engine version to be used by the global database. Valid values: |
DeletionProtection |
The deletion protection setting for the new global database. The global database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
StorageEncrypted |
The storage encryption setting for the new global database cluster. |
The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster
Description
The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster. When you delete a DB cluster, all automated backups for that DB cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified DB cluster are not deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Determines whether a final DB cluster snapshot is created before the DB
cluster is deleted. If You must specify a Default: |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot
created when Specifying this parameter and also setting the Constraints:
|
Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_cluster_endpoint(DBClusterEndpointIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group
Description
Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group. The DB cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
|
Deletes a DB cluster snapshot
Description
Deletes a DB cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete. Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the
|
The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance
Description
The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance. When you delete a DB instance, all automated backups for that instance are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB snapshots of the DB instance to be deleted by delete_db_instance
are not deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Determines whether a final DB snapshot is created before the DB instance
is deleted. If Note that when a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of 'failed', 'incompatible-restore', or 'incompatible-network', it can only be deleted when the SkipFinalSnapshot parameter is set to "true". Specify The FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter must be specified if
SkipFinalSnapshot is Default: |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The DBSnapshotIdentifier of the new DBSnapshot created when
SkipFinalSnapshot is set to Specifying this parameter and also setting the SkipFinalShapshot parameter to true results in an error. Constraints:
|
Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup
Description
Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup. The DBParameterGroup to be deleted can't be associated with any DB instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
Deletes a DB subnet group
Description
Deletes a DB subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete. You can't delete the default subnet group. Constraints: Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default. Example: |
Deletes an event notification subscription
Description
Deletes an event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to delete. |
Deletes a global database
Description
Deletes a global database. The primary and all secondary clusters must already be detached or deleted first.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted. |
Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_cluster_endpoints(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
The identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Filters |
A set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the
output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup
descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName
parameter is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for. Constraints:
|
Source |
A value that indicates to return only parameters for a specific source.
Parameter sources can be |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
Description
Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for. |
Returns information about DB cluster snapshots
Description
Returns information about DB cluster snapshots. This API action supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL,
IncludePublic = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots
for. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the
Constraints:
|
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
A specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter
can't be used in conjunction with the Constraints:
|
SnapshotType |
The type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a The |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
IncludeShared |
True to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon
accounts that this Amazon account has been given permission to copy or
restore, and otherwise false. The default is You can give an Amazon account permission to restore a manual DB cluster
snapshot from another Amazon account by the
|
IncludePublic |
True to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be
copied or restored by any Amazon account, and otherwise false. The
default is You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the
|
Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination
Description
Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_clusters(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported filters:
For example, to invoke this API from the Amazon CLI and filter so that only Neptune DB clusters are returned, you could use the following command: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of the available DB engines
Description
Returns a list of the available DB engines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_engine_versions(
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DefaultOnly = NULL,
ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
ListSupportedTimezones = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The database engine to return. |
EngineVersion |
The database engine version to return. Example: |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
Not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than
the Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
DefaultOnly |
Indicates that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is returned. |
ListSupportedCharacterSets |
If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the
|
ListSupportedTimezones |
If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the
|
Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination
Description
Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_instances(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe. Supported filters:
For example, to invoke this API from the Amazon CLI and filter so that only Neptune DB instances are returned, you could use the following command: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBParameterGroup
descriptions. If a DBParameterGroupName
is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_parameter_groups(
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_parameters(
DBParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Source |
The parameter types to return. Default: All parameter types returned Valid Values: |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_db_subnet_groups(
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the DB subnet group to return details for. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the
response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value
specified by |
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_engine_default_parameters(
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group family. |
Filters |
Not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
Description
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. Valid values: db-instance | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
Description
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName, SNSTopicARN, CustomerID, SourceType, SourceID, CreationTime, and Status.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_event_subscriptions(
SubscriptionName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
The name of the event notification subscription you want to describe. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days
Description
Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular DB instance, DB security group, database snapshot, or DB parameter group can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the past hour of events are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_events(
SourceIdentifier = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceIdentifier |
The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. Constraints:
|
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
Duration |
The number of minutes to retrieve events for. Default: 60 |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only
records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns information about Neptune global database clusters
Description
Returns information about Neptune global database clusters. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_global_clusters(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only information about the specified DB cluster is returned. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints: If supplied, must match an existing DB cluster identifier. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
(Optional) A pagination token returned by a previous call to
|
Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine
Description
Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Vpc = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The name of the engine to retrieve DB instance options for. |
EngineVersion |
The engine version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified engine version. |
DBInstanceClass |
The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class. |
LicenseModel |
The license model filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified license model. |
Vpc |
The VPC filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available VPC or non-VPC offerings. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
Description
Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for. Supported filters:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance
Description
You can call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications
to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance. You can use this information when you call modify_db_instance
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(DBInstanceIdentifier)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance. |
Forces a failover for a DB cluster
Description
Forces a failover for a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_failover_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
A DB cluster identifier to force a failover for. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier |
The name of the instance to promote to the primary instance. You must specify the instance identifier for an Read Replica in the DB
cluster. For example, |
Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database
Description
Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_failover_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] Identifier of the Neptune global database that should be failed over. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Neptune global database was created. In other words, it's the name of the global database that you want to fail over. Constraints: Must match the identifier of an existing Neptune global database. |
TargetDbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the secondary Neptune DB cluster that you want to promote to primary for the global database. |
Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource
Description
Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Neptune resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Modify a setting for a DB cluster
Description
Modify a setting for a DB cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
DBInstanceParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
NewDBClusterIdentifier |
The new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
ApplyImmediately |
A value that specifies whether the modifications in this request and any
pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible,
regardless of the The Default: |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the DB cluster will belong to. |
Port |
The port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Value must be Default: The same port as the original DB cluster. |
MasterUserPassword |
Not supported by Neptune. |
OptionGroupName |
Not supported by Neptune. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false. Default: |
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration |
The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster. See Using the CLI to publish Neptune audit logs to CloudWatch Logs. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.
Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied
during the next maintenance window unless the For a list of valid engine versions, see Engine Releases for Amazon Neptune,
or call
|
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
A value that indicates whether upgrades between different major versions are allowed. Constraints: You must set the allow-major-version-upgrade flag when
providing an |
DBInstanceParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster. When you apply a parameter group using Default: The existing name setting Constraints:
|
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the DB cluster that is created. |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. Valid Values:
Default:
|
Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_cluster_endpoint(
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
EndpointType = NULL,
StaticMembers = NULL,
ExcludedMembers = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
EndpointType |
The type of the endpoint. One of: |
StaticMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group. |
ExcludedMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty. |
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
, ParameterValue
, and ApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
Parameters
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify. |
Parameters |
[required] A list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify. |
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot
Description
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
AttributeName,
ValuesToAdd = NULL,
ValuesToRemove = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for. |
AttributeName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify. To manage authorization for other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a
manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to |
ValuesToAdd |
A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute
specified by To authorize other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a manual DB
cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon account
IDs, or |
ValuesToRemove |
A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute
specified by To remove authorization for other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a
manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon
account identifiers, or |
Modifies settings for a DB instance
Description
Modifies settings for a DB instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. To learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance, call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications
before you call modify_db_instance
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
DBPortNumber = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
AllocatedStorage |
Not supported by Neptune. |
DBInstanceClass |
The new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example,
If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change.
The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless
Default: Uses existing setting |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC. Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change
is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you specify Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: |
DBSecurityGroups |
A list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to authorize on this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is
managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
Constraints:
|
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending
modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless
of the If this parameter is set to Default: |
MasterUserPassword |
Not supported by Neptune. |
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. The db instance will NOT be rebooted automatically and the parameter changes will NOT be applied during the next maintenance window. Default: Uses existing setting Constraints: The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as this DB instance. |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by
the DB cluster. For more information, see
Default: Uses existing setting |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled. Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is
managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter will cause a reboot of the DB instance. If moving this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied. Default: Uses existing setting Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes |
MultiAZ |
Specifies if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing this
parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is applied during
the next maintenance window unless the |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Currently,
setting this parameter has no effect. To upgrade your database engine to
the most recent release, use the
|
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
Indicates that major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Indicates that minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the
DB instance during the maintenance window. Changing this parameter
doesn't result in an outage except in the following case and the change
is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. An outage will result if
this parameter is set to |
LicenseModel |
Not supported by Neptune. |
Iops |
The new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is
applied during the next maintenance window unless the Default: Uses existing setting |
OptionGroupName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
NewDBInstanceIdentifier |
The new DB instance identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB
instance. When you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot
will occur immediately if you set Constraints:
Example: |
StorageType |
Not supported. |
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
Indicates the certificate that needs to be associated with the instance. |
Domain |
Not supported. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
True to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance, and otherwise false. The default is false. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0. If Valid Values: |
DBPortNumber |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. The value of the Your database will restart when you change the Default: |
PubliclyAccessible |
This flag should no longer be used. |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits Neptune to send enhanced
monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If |
DomainIAMRoleName |
Not supported |
PromotionTier |
A value that specifies the order in which a Read Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. Default: 1 Valid Values: 0 - 15 |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false. You can enable IAM database authentication for the following database engines Not applicable. Mapping Amazon IAM accounts to database accounts is
managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see
Default: |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration |
The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance or DB cluster. |
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. See Deleting a DB Instance. |
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
, ParameterValue
, and ApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName, Parameters)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
Parameters |
[required] An array of parameter names, values, and the apply method for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and apply method must be supplied; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request. Valid Values (for the application method): You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when you reboot the DB instance without failover. |
Modifies an existing DB subnet group
Description
Modifies an existing DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
SubnetIds
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default. Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
The description for the DB subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group. |
Modifies an existing event notification subscription
Description
Modifies an existing event notification subscription. Note that you can't modify the source identifiers using this call; to change source identifiers for a subscription, use the add_source_identifier_to_subscription
and remove_source_identifier_from_subscription
calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Enabled = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the event notification subscription. |
SnsTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. if this value is not specified, all events are returned. Valid values: db-instance | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given SourceType by using the DescribeEventCategories action. |
Enabled |
A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription. |
Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster
Description
Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and their new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_modify_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the global cluster being modified. This parameter is not case-sensitive. Constraints: Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster. |
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier |
A new cluster identifier to assign to the global database. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DeletionProtection |
Indicates whether the global database has deletion protection enabled. The global database cannot be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.
Changing this parameter will result in an outage. The change is applied
during the next maintenance window unless To list all of the available Neptune engine versions, use the following command: |
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed. Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades if you specify a
value for the If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version, so you will need to apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade. |
Not supported
Description
Not supported.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_promote_read_replica_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_promote_read_replica_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] Not supported. |
You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons
Description
You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB parameter group associated with the DB instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
ForceFailover |
When Constraint: You can't specify |
Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database
Description
Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database. A secondary cluster becomes a normal standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only, and no longer receives data from a the primary cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_remove_from_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
DbClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Neptune global database from which to detach the specified Neptune DB cluster. |
DbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster to be detached from the Neptune global database cluster. |
Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster
Description
Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_role_from_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_remove_role_from_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RoleArn,
FeatureName = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the
DB cluster, for example
|
FeatureName |
The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be
disassociated from. For the list of supported feature names, see
|
Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription
Description
Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SourceIdentifier
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group. |
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Neptune resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed. |
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters submit a list of the following: ParameterName
and ApplyMethod
. To reset the entire DB cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName
and ResetAllParameters
parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset. |
ResetAllParameters |
A value that is set to |
Parameters |
A list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to
the default values. You can't use this parameter if the
|
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName
and ApplyMethod
. To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup
name and ResetAllParameters
parameters. When resetting the entire group, dynamic parameters are updated immediately and static parameters are set to pending-reboot
to take effect on the next DB instance restart or reboot_db_instance
request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reset_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_reset_db_parameter_group(
DBParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
ResetAllParameters |
Specifies whether ( Default: |
Parameters |
To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the Valid Values (for Apply method): |
Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot
Description
Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
SnapshotIdentifier,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
Provides the list of EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the restored DB cluster can be created in. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from. You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot. Constraints:
|
Engine |
[required] The database engine to use for the new DB cluster. Default: The same as source Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source |
EngineVersion |
The version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster. |
Port |
The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Value must be Default: The same port as the original DB cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: |
DatabaseName |
Not supported. |
OptionGroupName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. If you do not specify a value for the
|
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false. Default: |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the new DB cluster. Constraints:
|
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the restored DB cluster that is created. |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster. Valid values: Default: |
Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time
Description
Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime
for up to BackupRetentionPeriod
days. The target DB cluster is created from the source DB cluster with the same configuration as the original DB cluster, except that the new DB cluster is created with the default DB security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RestoreType = NULL,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier,
RestoreToTime = NULL,
UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
StorageType = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the new DB cluster to be created. Constraints:
|
RestoreType |
The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore. Constraints:
|
RestoreToTime |
The date and time to restore the DB cluster to. Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format Constraints:
Example: |
UseLatestRestorableTime |
A value that is set to Default: Constraints: Cannot be specified if |
Port |
The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections. Constraints: Value must be Default: The same port as the original DB cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: |
OptionGroupName |
(Not supported by Neptune) |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to. |
Tags |
The tags to be applied to the restored DB cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster. The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key. You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with
a KMS key that is different than the KMS key used to encrypt the source
DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified
by the If you do not specify a value for the
If |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false. Default: |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the new DB cluster. Constraints:
|
DeletionProtection |
A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide. |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster. Valid values: Default: |
Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API
Description
Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Neptune DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
Description
Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster. When you stop a DB cluster, Neptune retains the DB cluster's metadata, including its endpoints and DB parameter groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptune_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Neptune DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Amazon NeptuneData
Description
Neptune Data API
The Amazon Neptune data API provides SDK support for more than 40 of Neptune's data operations, including data loading, query execution, data inquiry, and machine learning. It supports the Gremlin and openCypher query languages, and is available in all SDK languages. It automatically signs API requests and greatly simplifies integrating Neptune into your applications.
Usage
neptunedata(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- neptunedata( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_gremlin_query | Cancels a Gremlin query |
cancel_loader_job | Cancels a specified load job |
cancel_ml_data_processing_job | Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job |
cancel_ml_model_training_job | Cancels a Neptune ML model training job |
cancel_ml_model_transform_job | Cancels a specified model transform job |
cancel_open_cypher_query | Cancels a specified openCypher query |
create_ml_endpoint | Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed |
delete_ml_endpoint | Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint |
delete_propertygraph_statistics | Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data |
delete_sparql_statistics | Deletes SPARQL statistics |
execute_fast_reset | The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data |
execute_gremlin_explain_query | Executes a Gremlin Explain query |
execute_gremlin_profile_query | Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output |
execute_gremlin_query | This commands executes a Gremlin query |
execute_open_cypher_explain_query | Executes an openCypher explain request |
execute_open_cypher_query | Executes an openCypher query |
get_engine_status | Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host |
get_gremlin_query_status | Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query |
get_loader_job_status | Gets status information about a specified load job |
get_ml_data_processing_job | Retrieves information about a specified data processing job |
get_ml_endpoint | Retrieves details about an inference endpoint |
get_ml_model_training_job | Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job |
get_ml_model_transform_job | Gets information about a specified model transform job |
get_open_cypher_query_status | Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query |
get_propertygraph_statistics | Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher) |
get_propertygraph_stream | Gets a stream for a property graph |
get_propertygraph_summary | Gets a graph summary for a property graph |
get_rdf_graph_summary | Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph |
get_sparql_statistics | Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL) |
get_sparql_stream | Gets a stream for an RDF graph |
list_gremlin_queries | Lists active Gremlin queries |
list_loader_jobs | Retrieves a list of the loadIds for all active loader jobs |
list_ml_data_processing_jobs | Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs |
list_ml_endpoints | Lists existing inference endpoints |
list_ml_model_training_jobs | Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs |
list_ml_model_transform_jobs | Returns a list of model transform job IDs |
list_open_cypher_queries | Lists active openCypher queries |
manage_propertygraph_statistics | Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics |
manage_sparql_statistics | Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics |
start_loader_job | Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance |
start_ml_data_processing_job | Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training |
start_ml_model_training_job | Creates a new Neptune ML model training job |
start_ml_model_transform_job | Creates a new model transform job |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- neptunedata()
svc$cancel_gremlin_query(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Cancels a Gremlin query
Description
Cancels a Gremlin query. See Gremlin query cancellation for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_gremlin_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_gremlin_query(queryId)
Arguments
queryId |
[required] The unique identifier that identifies the query to be canceled. |
Cancels a specified load job
Description
Cancels a specified load job. This is an HTTP DELETE
request. See Neptune Loader Get-Status API for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_loader_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_loader_job(loadId)
Arguments
loadId |
[required] The ID of the load job to be deleted. |
Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job
Description
Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job. See The dataprocessing
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_ml_data_processing_job(
id,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
clean = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the data-processing job. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
clean |
If set to |
Cancels a Neptune ML model training job
Description
Cancels a Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_training_job(
id,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
clean = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the model-training job to be canceled. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
clean |
If set to |
Cancels a specified model transform job
Description
Cancels a specified model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_transform_job(
id,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
clean = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique ID of the model transform job to be canceled. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
clean |
If this flag is set to |
Cancels a specified openCypher query
Description
Cancels a specified openCypher query. See Neptune openCypher status endpoint for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_open_cypher_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_cancel_open_cypher_query(queryId, silent = NULL)
Arguments
queryId |
[required] The unique ID of the openCypher query to cancel. |
silent |
If set to |
Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed
Description
Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_create_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_create_ml_endpoint(
id = NULL,
mlModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
mlModelTransformJobId = NULL,
update = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
modelName = NULL,
instanceType = NULL,
instanceCount = NULL,
volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
A unique identifier for the new inference endpoint. The default is an autogenerated timestamped name. |
mlModelTrainingJobId |
The job Id of the completed model-training job that has created the
model that the inference endpoint will point to. You must supply either
the |
mlModelTransformJobId |
The job Id of the completed model-transform job. You must supply either
the |
update |
If set to |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role providing Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will be thrown. |
modelName |
Model type for training. By default the Neptune ML model is
automatically based on the |
instanceType |
The type of Neptune ML instance to use for online servicing. The default
is |
instanceCount |
The minimum number of Amazon EC2 instances to deploy to an endpoint for prediction. The default is 1 |
volumeEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None. |
Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint
Description
Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_delete_ml_endpoint(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL, clean = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the inference endpoint. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role providing Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will be thrown. |
clean |
If this flag is set to |
Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data
Description
Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_delete_propertygraph_statistics()
Deletes SPARQL statistics
Description
Deletes SPARQL statistics
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_delete_sparql_statistics()
The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data
Description
The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_fast_reset/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_fast_reset(action, token = NULL)
Arguments
action |
[required] The fast reset action. One of the following values:
|
token |
The fast-reset token to initiate the reset. |
Executes a Gremlin Explain query
Description
Executes a Gremlin Explain query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_explain_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_gremlin_explain_query(gremlinQuery)
Arguments
gremlinQuery |
[required] The Gremlin explain query string. |
Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output
Description
Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output. See Gremlin profile API in Neptune for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_profile_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_gremlin_profile_query(
gremlinQuery,
results = NULL,
chop = NULL,
serializer = NULL,
indexOps = NULL
)
Arguments
gremlinQuery |
[required] The Gremlin query string to profile. |
results |
If this flag is set to |
chop |
If non-zero, causes the results string to be truncated at that number of characters. If set to zero, the string contains all the results. |
serializer |
If non-null, the gathered results are returned in a serialized response message in the format specified by this parameter. See Gremlin profile API in Neptune for more information. |
indexOps |
If this flag is set to |
This commands executes a Gremlin query
Description
This commands executes a Gremlin query. Amazon Neptune is compatible with Apache TinkerPop3 and Gremlin, so you can use the Gremlin traversal language to query the graph, as described under The Graph in the Apache TinkerPop3 documentation. More details can also be found in Accessing a Neptune graph with Gremlin.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_gremlin_query(gremlinQuery, serializer = NULL)
Arguments
gremlinQuery |
[required] Using this API, you can run Gremlin queries in string format much as you can using the HTTP endpoint. The interface is compatible with whatever Gremlin version your DB cluster is using (see the Tinkerpop client section to determine which Gremlin releases your engine version supports). |
serializer |
If non-null, the query results are returned in a serialized response message in the format specified by this parameter. See the GraphSON section in the TinkerPop documentation for a list of the formats that are currently supported. |
Executes an openCypher explain request
Description
Executes an openCypher explain
request. See The openCypher explain feature for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_explain_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_explain_query(
openCypherQuery,
parameters = NULL,
explainMode
)
Arguments
openCypherQuery |
[required] The openCypher query string. |
parameters |
The openCypher query parameters. |
explainMode |
[required] The openCypher |
Executes an openCypher query
Description
Executes an openCypher query. See Accessing the Neptune Graph with openCypher for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_query(openCypherQuery, parameters = NULL)
Arguments
openCypherQuery |
[required] The openCypher query string to be executed. |
parameters |
The openCypher query parameters for query execution. See Examples of openCypher parameterized queries for more information. |
Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host
Description
Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_engine_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_engine_status()
Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query
Description
Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_gremlin_query_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_gremlin_query_status(queryId)
Arguments
queryId |
[required] The unique identifier that identifies the Gremlin query. |
Gets status information about a specified load job
Description
Gets status information about a specified load job. Neptune keeps track of the most recent 1,024 bulk load jobs, and stores the last 10,000 error details per job.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_loader_job_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_loader_job_status(
loadId,
details = NULL,
errors = NULL,
page = NULL,
errorsPerPage = NULL
)
Arguments
loadId |
[required] The load ID of the load job to get the status of. |
details |
Flag indicating whether or not to include details beyond the overall
status ( |
errors |
Flag indicating whether or not to include a list of errors encountered
( The list of errors is paged. The |
page |
The error page number (a positive integer; the default is |
errorsPerPage |
The number of errors returned in each page (a positive integer; the
default is |
Retrieves information about a specified data processing job
Description
Retrieves information about a specified data processing job. See The dataprocessing
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_ml_data_processing_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the data-processing job to be retrieved. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Retrieves details about an inference endpoint
Description
Retrieves details about an inference endpoint. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_ml_endpoint(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the inference endpoint. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job
Description
Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_ml_model_training_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the model-training job to retrieve. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Gets information about a specified model transform job
Description
Gets information about a specified model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_ml_model_transform_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
id |
[required] The unique identifier of the model-transform job to be reetrieved. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query
Description
Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_open_cypher_query_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_open_cypher_query_status(queryId)
Arguments
queryId |
[required] The unique ID of the openCypher query for which to retrieve the query status. |
Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher)
Description
Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_propertygraph_statistics()
Gets a stream for a property graph
Description
Gets a stream for a property graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_propertygraph_stream(
limit = NULL,
iteratorType = NULL,
commitNum = NULL,
opNum = NULL,
encoding = NULL
)
Arguments
limit |
Specifies the maximum number of records to return. There is also a size
limit of 10 MB on the response that can't be modified and that takes
precedence over the number of records specified in the The range for |
iteratorType |
Can be one of:
|
commitNum |
The commit number of the starting record to read from the change-log
stream. This parameter is required when |
opNum |
The operation sequence number within the specified commit to start
reading from in the change-log stream data. The default is |
encoding |
If set to TRUE, Neptune compresses the response using gzip encoding. |
Gets a graph summary for a property graph
Description
Gets a graph summary for a property graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_summary/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_propertygraph_summary(mode = NULL)
Arguments
mode |
Mode can take one of two values: |
Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph
Description
Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_rdf_graph_summary/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_rdf_graph_summary(mode = NULL)
Arguments
mode |
Mode can take one of two values: |
Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL)
Description
Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_sparql_statistics()
Gets a stream for an RDF graph
Description
Gets a stream for an RDF graph.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_sparql_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_get_sparql_stream(
limit = NULL,
iteratorType = NULL,
commitNum = NULL,
opNum = NULL,
encoding = NULL
)
Arguments
limit |
Specifies the maximum number of records to return. There is also a size
limit of 10 MB on the response that can't be modified and that takes
precedence over the number of records specified in the The range for |
iteratorType |
Can be one of:
|
commitNum |
The commit number of the starting record to read from the change-log
stream. This parameter is required when |
opNum |
The operation sequence number within the specified commit to start
reading from in the change-log stream data. The default is |
encoding |
If set to TRUE, Neptune compresses the response using gzip encoding. |
Lists active Gremlin queries
Description
Lists active Gremlin queries. See Gremlin query status API for details about the output.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_gremlin_queries/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_gremlin_queries(includeWaiting = NULL)
Arguments
includeWaiting |
If set to |
Retrieves a list of the loadIds for all active loader jobs
Description
Retrieves a list of the loadIds
for all active loader jobs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_loader_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_loader_jobs(limit = NULL, includeQueuedLoads = NULL)
Arguments
limit |
The number of load IDs to list. Must be a positive integer greater than
zero and not more than |
includeQueuedLoads |
An optional parameter that can be used to exclude the load IDs of queued
load requests when requesting a list of load IDs by setting the
parameter to |
Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs
Description
Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs. See Listing active data-processing jobs using the Neptune ML dataprocessing command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_data_processing_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_ml_data_processing_jobs(
maxItems = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
maxItems |
The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10). |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Lists existing inference endpoints
Description
Lists existing inference endpoints. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_ml_endpoints(maxItems = NULL, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)
Arguments
maxItems |
The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs
Description
Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs. See Model training using the modeltraining
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_model_training_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_ml_model_training_jobs(
maxItems = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
maxItems |
The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10). |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Returns a list of model transform job IDs
Description
Returns a list of model transform job IDs. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_model_transform_jobs/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_ml_model_transform_jobs(
maxItems = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
maxItems |
The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10). |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
Lists active openCypher queries
Description
Lists active openCypher queries. See Neptune openCypher status endpoint for more information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_open_cypher_queries/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_list_open_cypher_queries(includeWaiting = NULL)
Arguments
includeWaiting |
When set to |
Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics
Description
Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_manage_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_manage_propertygraph_statistics(mode = NULL)
Arguments
mode |
The statistics generation mode. One of: |
Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics
Description
Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_manage_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_manage_sparql_statistics(mode = NULL)
Arguments
mode |
The statistics generation mode. One of: |
Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance
Description
Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance. See Using the Amazon Neptune Bulk Loader to Ingest Data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_loader_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_start_loader_job(
source,
format,
s3BucketRegion,
iamRoleArn,
mode = NULL,
failOnError = NULL,
parallelism = NULL,
parserConfiguration = NULL,
updateSingleCardinalityProperties = NULL,
queueRequest = NULL,
dependencies = NULL,
userProvidedEdgeIds = NULL
)
Arguments
source |
[required] The The URI can be in any of the following formats.
The The specified folder or folders can contain multiple vertex files and multiple edge files. |
format |
[required] The format of the data. For more information about data formats for the
Neptune Allowed values
|
s3BucketRegion |
[required] The Amazon region of the S3 bucket. This must match the Amazon Region of the DB cluster. |
iamRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for an IAM role to be assumed by the Neptune DB instance for access to the S3 bucket. The IAM role ARN provided here should be attached to the DB cluster (see Adding the IAM Role to an Amazon Neptune Cluster. |
mode |
The load job mode. Allowed values: Default value:
|
failOnError |
Allowed values: Default value: When this parameter is set to When this parameter is set to |
parallelism |
The optional Allowed values:
Default value: The |
parserConfiguration |
|
updateSingleCardinalityProperties |
Allowed values: Default value: By default, or when When |
queueRequest |
This is an optional flag parameter that indicates whether the load request can be queued up or not. You don't have to wait for one load job to complete before issuing the
next one, because Neptune can queue up as many as 64 jobs at a time,
provided that their If the Allowed values: Default value: |
dependencies |
This is an optional parameter that can make a queued load request contingent on the successful completion of one or more previous jobs in the queue. Neptune can queue up as many as 64 load requests at a time, if their
For example, if load
Because of the You can set up multiple levels of dependency in this way, so that the failure of one job will cause all requests that are directly or indirectly dependent on it to be cancelled. |
userProvidedEdgeIds |
This parameter is required only when loading openCypher data that
contains relationship IDs. It must be included and set to When When It's useful to provide relationship IDs explicitly so that the loader can resume loading after error in the CSV data have been fixed, without having to reload any relationships that have already been loaded. If relationship IDs have not been explicitly assigned, the loader cannot resume a failed load if any relationship file has had to be corrected, and must instead reload all the relationships. |
Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training
Description
Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training. See The dataprocessing
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_start_ml_data_processing_job(
id = NULL,
previousDataProcessingJobId = NULL,
inputDataS3Location,
processedDataS3Location,
sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
processingInstanceType = NULL,
processingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
processingTimeOutInSeconds = NULL,
modelType = NULL,
configFileName = NULL,
subnets = NULL,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
A unique identifier for the new job. The default is an autogenerated UUID. |
previousDataProcessingJobId |
The job ID of a completed data processing job run on an earlier version of the data. |
inputDataS3Location |
[required] The URI of the Amazon S3 location where you want SageMaker to download the data needed to run the data processing job. |
processedDataS3Location |
[required] The URI of the Amazon S3 location where you want SageMaker to save the results of a data processing job. |
sagemakerIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role that SageMaker can assume to perform tasks on your behalf. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
processingInstanceType |
The type of ML instance used during data processing. Its memory should be large enough to hold the processed dataset. The default is the smallest ml.r5 type whose memory is ten times larger than the size of the exported graph data on disk. |
processingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB |
The disk volume size of the processing instance. Both input data and processed data are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. The default is 0. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML chooses the volume size automatically based on the data size. |
processingTimeOutInSeconds |
Timeout in seconds for the data processing job. The default is 86,400 (1 day). |
modelType |
One of the two model types that Neptune ML currently supports:
heterogeneous graph models ( |
configFileName |
A data specification file that describes how to load the exported graph
data for training. The file is automatically generated by the Neptune
export toolkit. The default is |
subnets |
The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None. |
securityGroupIds |
The VPC security group IDs. The default is None. |
volumeEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None. |
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none. |
Creates a new Neptune ML model training job
Description
Creates a new Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining
command.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_start_ml_model_training_job(
id = NULL,
previousModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
dataProcessingJobId,
trainModelS3Location,
sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
baseProcessingInstanceType = NULL,
trainingInstanceType = NULL,
trainingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
trainingTimeOutInSeconds = NULL,
maxHPONumberOfTrainingJobs = NULL,
maxHPOParallelTrainingJobs = NULL,
subnets = NULL,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
enableManagedSpotTraining = NULL,
customModelTrainingParameters = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
A unique identifier for the new job. The default is An autogenerated UUID. |
previousModelTrainingJobId |
The job ID of a completed model-training job that you want to update incrementally based on updated data. |
dataProcessingJobId |
[required] The job ID of the completed data-processing job that has created the data that the training will work with. |
trainModelS3Location |
[required] The location in Amazon S3 where the model artifacts are to be stored. |
sagemakerIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution.This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
baseProcessingInstanceType |
The type of ML instance used in preparing and managing training of ML models. This is a CPU instance chosen based on memory requirements for processing the training data and model. |
trainingInstanceType |
The type of ML instance used for model training. All Neptune ML models
support CPU, GPU, and multiGPU training. The default is |
trainingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB |
The disk volume size of the training instance. Both input data and the output model are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. The default is 0. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML selects a disk volume size based on the recommendation generated in the data processing step. |
trainingTimeOutInSeconds |
Timeout in seconds for the training job. The default is 86,400 (1 day). |
maxHPONumberOfTrainingJobs |
Maximum total number of training jobs to start for the hyperparameter
tuning job. The default is 2. Neptune ML automatically tunes the
hyperparameters of the machine learning model. To obtain a model that
performs well, use at least 10 jobs (in other words, set
|
maxHPOParallelTrainingJobs |
Maximum number of parallel training jobs to start for the hyperparameter tuning job. The default is 2. The number of parallel jobs you can run is limited by the available resources on your training instance. |
subnets |
The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None. |
securityGroupIds |
The VPC security group IDs. The default is None. |
volumeEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None. |
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none. |
enableManagedSpotTraining |
Optimizes the cost of training machine-learning models by using Amazon
Elastic Compute Cloud spot instances. The default is |
customModelTrainingParameters |
The configuration for custom model training. This is a JSON object. |
Creates a new model transform job
Description
Creates a new model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.
Usage
neptunedata_start_ml_model_transform_job(
id = NULL,
dataProcessingJobId = NULL,
mlModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
trainingJobName = NULL,
modelTransformOutputS3Location,
sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
customModelTransformParameters = NULL,
baseProcessingInstanceType = NULL,
baseProcessingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
subnets = NULL,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)
Arguments
id |
A unique identifier for the new job. The default is an autogenerated UUID. |
dataProcessingJobId |
The job ID of a completed data-processing job. You must include either
|
mlModelTrainingJobId |
The job ID of a completed model-training job. You must include either
|
trainingJobName |
The name of a completed SageMaker training job. You must include either
|
modelTransformOutputS3Location |
[required] The location in Amazon S3 where the model artifacts are to be stored. |
sagemakerIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
neptuneIamRoleArn |
The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur. |
customModelTransformParameters |
Configuration information for a model transform using a custom model.
The |
baseProcessingInstanceType |
The type of ML instance used in preparing and managing training of ML models. This is an ML compute instance chosen based on memory requirements for processing the training data and model. |
baseProcessingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB |
The disk volume size of the training instance in gigabytes. The default is 0. Both input data and the output model are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML selects a disk volume size based on the recommendation generated in the data processing step. |
subnets |
The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None. |
securityGroupIds |
The VPC security group IDs. The default is None. |
volumeEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None. |
s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey |
The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none. |
Amazon QLDB
Description
The resource management API for Amazon QLDB
Usage
qldb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- qldb( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_journal_kinesis_stream | Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream |
create_ledger | Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region |
delete_ledger | Deletes a ledger and all of its contents |
describe_journal_kinesis_stream | Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream |
describe_journal_s3_export | Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request |
describe_ledger | Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created |
export_journal_to_s3 | Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket |
get_block | Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal |
get_digest | Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal |
get_revision | Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address |
list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger | Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger |
list_journal_s3_exports | Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region |
list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger | Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger |
list_ledgers | Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region |
list_tags_for_resource | Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource |
stream_journal_to_kinesis | Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger |
tag_resource | Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource |
untag_resource | Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource |
update_ledger | Updates properties on a ledger |
update_ledger_permissions_mode | Updates the permissions mode of a ledger |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- qldb()
svc$cancel_journal_kinesis_stream(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream
Description
Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream. Before a stream can be canceled, its current status must be ACTIVE
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_cancel_journal_kinesis_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_cancel_journal_kinesis_stream(LedgerName, StreamId)
Arguments
LedgerName |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
StreamId |
[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the QLDB journal stream to be canceled. |
Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region
Description
Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_create_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_create_ledger(
Name,
Tags = NULL,
PermissionsMode,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
KmsKey = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger that you want to create. The name must be unique among all of the ledgers in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region. Naming constraints for ledger names are defined in Quotas in Amazon QLDB in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide. |
Tags |
The key-value pairs to add as tags to the ledger that you want to create. Tag keys are case sensitive. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null. |
PermissionsMode |
[required] The permissions mode to assign to the ledger that you want to create. This parameter can have one of the following values:
We strongly recommend using the |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the ledger is protected from being deleted by any
user. If not defined during ledger creation, this feature is enabled
( If deletion protection is enabled, you must first disable it before you
can delete the ledger. You can disable it by calling the
|
KmsKey |
The key in Key Management Service (KMS) to use for encryption of data at rest in the ledger. For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide. Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:
To specify a customer managed KMS key, you can use its key ID, Amazon
Resource Name (ARN), alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name,
prefix it with For example:
For more information, see Key identifiers (KeyId) in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Deletes a ledger and all of its contents
Description
Deletes a ledger and all of its contents. This action is irreversible.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_delete_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_delete_ledger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger that you want to delete. |
Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream
Description
Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream. The output includes the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), stream name, current status, creation time, and the parameters of the original stream creation request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_journal_kinesis_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_describe_journal_kinesis_stream(LedgerName, StreamId)
Arguments
LedgerName |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
StreamId |
[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the QLDB journal stream to describe. |
Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request
Description
Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_journal_s3_export/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_describe_journal_s3_export(Name, ExportId)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
ExportId |
[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the journal export job to describe. |
Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created
Description
Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_describe_ledger(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger that you want to describe. |
Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket
Description
Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket. A journal export job can write the data objects in either the text or binary representation of Amazon Ion format, or in JSON Lines text format.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_export_journal_to_s3/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_export_journal_to_s3(
Name,
InclusiveStartTime,
ExclusiveEndTime,
S3ExportConfiguration,
RoleArn,
OutputFormat = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
InclusiveStartTime |
[required] The inclusive start date and time for the range of journal contents to export. The The If you provide an |
ExclusiveEndTime |
[required] The exclusive end date and time for the range of journal contents to export. The The |
S3ExportConfiguration |
[required] The configuration settings of the Amazon S3 bucket destination for your export request. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that grants QLDB permissions for a journal export job to do the following:
To pass a role to QLDB when requesting a journal export, you must have
permissions to perform the |
OutputFormat |
The output format of your exported journal data. A journal export job can write the data objects in either the text or binary representation of Amazon Ion format, or in JSON Lines text format. Default: In JSON Lines format, each journal block in an exported data object is a valid JSON object that is delimited by a newline. You can use this format to directly integrate JSON exports with analytics tools such as Amazon Athena and Glue because these services can parse newline-delimited JSON automatically. |
Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal
Description
Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal. Also returns a proof of the specified block for verification if DigestTipAddress
is provided.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_block/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_get_block(Name, BlockAddress, DigestTipAddress = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
BlockAddress |
[required] The location of the block that you want to request. An address is an
Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: For example: |
DigestTipAddress |
The latest block location covered by the digest for which to request a
proof. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields:
For example: |
Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal
Description
Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal. The response includes a 256-bit hash value and a block address.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_digest/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_get_digest(Name)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address
Description
Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address. Also returns a proof of the specified revision for verification if DigestTipAddress
is provided.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_revision/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_get_revision(Name, BlockAddress, DocumentId, DigestTipAddress = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
BlockAddress |
[required] The block location of the document revision to be verified. An address
is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: For example: |
DocumentId |
[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the document to be verified. |
DigestTipAddress |
The latest block location covered by the digest for which to request a
proof. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields:
For example: |
Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger
Description
Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger(
LedgerName,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
LedgerName |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single
|
NextToken |
A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page
of results. If you received a value for |
Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_s3_exports/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_list_journal_s3_exports(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single
|
NextToken |
A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page
of results. If you received a value for |
Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger
Description
Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger(
Name,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single
|
NextToken |
A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page
of results. If you received a value for |
Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
Description
Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_ledgers/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_list_ledgers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of results to return in a single
|
NextToken |
A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page
of results. If you received a value for |
Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource
Description
Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which to list the tags. For example:
|
Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger
Description
Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger. The stream captures every document revision that is committed to the ledger's journal and delivers the data to a specified Amazon Kinesis Data Streams resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_stream_journal_to_kinesis/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_stream_journal_to_kinesis(
LedgerName,
RoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
InclusiveStartTime,
ExclusiveEndTime = NULL,
KinesisConfiguration,
StreamName
)
Arguments
LedgerName |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that grants QLDB permissions for a journal stream to write data records to a Kinesis Data Streams resource. To pass a role to QLDB when requesting a journal stream, you must have
permissions to perform the |
Tags |
The key-value pairs to add as tags to the stream that you want to create. Tag keys are case sensitive. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null. |
InclusiveStartTime |
[required] The inclusive start date and time from which to start streaming journal
data. This parameter must be in The If you provide an |
ExclusiveEndTime |
The exclusive date and time that specifies when the stream ends. If you don't define this parameter, the stream runs indefinitely until you cancel it. The |
KinesisConfiguration |
[required] The configuration settings of the Kinesis Data Streams destination for your stream request. |
StreamName |
[required] The name that you want to assign to the QLDB journal stream. User-defined names can help identify and indicate the purpose of a stream. Your stream name must be unique among other active streams for a given ledger. Stream names have the same naming constraints as ledger names, as defined in Quotas in Amazon QLDB in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide. |
Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource
Description
Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to which you want to add the tags. For example:
|
Tags |
[required] The key-value pairs to add as tags to the specified QLDB resource. Tag keys are case sensitive. If you specify a key that already exists for the resource, your request fails and returns an error. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null. |
Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource
Description
Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource. You can specify up to 50 tag keys to remove.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) from which to remove the tags. For example:
|
TagKeys |
[required] The list of tag keys to remove. |
Updates properties on a ledger
Description
Updates properties on a ledger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_update_ledger/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_update_ledger(Name, DeletionProtection = NULL, KmsKey = NULL)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the ledger is protected from being deleted by any
user. If not defined during ledger creation, this feature is enabled
( If deletion protection is enabled, you must first disable it before you
can delete the ledger. You can disable it by calling the
|
KmsKey |
The key in Key Management Service (KMS) to use for encryption of data at rest in the ledger. For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide. Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:
To specify a customer managed KMS key, you can use its key ID, Amazon
Resource Name (ARN), alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name,
prefix it with For example:
For more information, see Key identifiers (KeyId) in the Key Management Service Developer Guide. |
Updates the permissions mode of a ledger
Description
Updates the permissions mode of a ledger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_update_ledger_permissions_mode/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldb_update_ledger_permissions_mode(Name, PermissionsMode)
Arguments
Name |
[required] The name of the ledger. |
PermissionsMode |
[required] The permissions mode to assign to the ledger. This parameter can have one of the following values:
We strongly recommend using the |
Amazon QLDB Session
Description
The transactional data APIs for Amazon QLDB
Instead of interacting directly with this API, we recommend using the QLDB driver or the QLDB shell to execute data transactions on a ledger.
If you are working with an AWS SDK, use the QLDB driver. The driver provides a high-level abstraction layer above this QLDB Session data plane and manages
send_command
API calls for you. For information and a list of supported programming languages, see Getting started with the driver in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.If you are working with the AWS Command Line Interface (AWS CLI), use the QLDB shell. The shell is a command line interface that uses the QLDB driver to interact with a ledger. For information, see Accessing Amazon QLDB using the QLDB shell.
Usage
qldbsession(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- qldbsession( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
send_command | Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- qldbsession()
svc$send_command(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger
Description
Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldbsession_send_command/ for full documentation.
Usage
qldbsession_send_command(
SessionToken = NULL,
StartSession = NULL,
StartTransaction = NULL,
EndSession = NULL,
CommitTransaction = NULL,
AbortTransaction = NULL,
ExecuteStatement = NULL,
FetchPage = NULL
)
Arguments
SessionToken |
Specifies the session token for the current command. A session token is constant throughout the life of the session. To obtain a session token, run the |
StartSession |
Command to start a new session. A session token is obtained as part of the response. |
StartTransaction |
Command to start a new transaction. |
EndSession |
Command to end the current session. |
CommitTransaction |
Command to commit the specified transaction. |
AbortTransaction |
Command to abort the current transaction. |
ExecuteStatement |
Command to execute a statement in the specified transaction. |
FetchPage |
Command to fetch a page. |
Amazon Relational Database Service
Description
Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) is a web service that makes it easier to set up, operate, and scale a relational database in the cloud. It provides cost-efficient, resizeable capacity for an industry-standard relational database and manages common database administration tasks, freeing up developers to focus on what makes their applications and businesses unique.
Amazon RDS gives you access to the capabilities of a MySQL, MariaDB, PostgreSQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, Db2, or Amazon Aurora database server. These capabilities mean that the code, applications, and tools you already use today with your existing databases work with Amazon RDS without modification. Amazon RDS automatically backs up your database and maintains the database software that powers your DB instance. Amazon RDS is flexible: you can scale your DB instance's compute resources and storage capacity to meet your application's demand. As with all Amazon Web Services, there are no up-front investments, and you pay only for the resources you use.
This interface reference for Amazon RDS contains documentation for a programming or command line interface you can use to manage Amazon RDS. Amazon RDS is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces might require techniques such as polling or callback functions to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a command is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the maintenance window. The reference structure is as follows, and we list following some related topics from the user guide.
Amazon RDS API Reference
For the alphabetical list of API actions, see API Actions.
For the alphabetical list of data types, see Data Types.
For a list of common query parameters, see Common Parameters.
For descriptions of the error codes, see Common Errors.
Amazon RDS User Guide
For a summary of the Amazon RDS interfaces, see Available RDS Interfaces.
For more information about how to use the Query API, see Using the Query API.
Usage
rds(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- rds( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
add_role_to_db_cluster | Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster |
add_role_to_db_instance | Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance |
add_source_identifier_to_subscription | Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription |
add_tags_to_resource | Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource |
apply_pending_maintenance_action | Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance) |
authorize_db_security_group_ingress | Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization |
backtrack_db_cluster | Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster |
build_auth_token | Return an authentication token for a database connection |
build_auth_token_v2 | Generates an auth token used to connect to a db with IAM credentials |
cancel_export_task | Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3 |
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group | Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group |
copy_db_cluster_snapshot | Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster |
copy_db_parameter_group | Copies the specified DB parameter group |
copy_db_snapshot | Copies the specified DB snapshot |
copy_option_group | Copies the specified option group |
create_blue_green_deployment | Creates a blue/green deployment |
create_custom_db_engine_version | Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV) |
create_db_cluster | Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster |
create_db_cluster_endpoint | Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster |
create_db_cluster_parameter_group | Creates a new DB cluster parameter group |
create_db_cluster_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster |
create_db_instance | Creates a new DB instance |
create_db_instance_read_replica | Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster |
create_db_parameter_group | Creates a new DB parameter group |
create_db_proxy | Creates a new DB proxy |
create_db_proxy_endpoint | Creates a DBProxyEndpoint |
create_db_security_group | Creates a new DB security group |
create_db_shard_group | Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database |
create_db_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of a DB instance |
create_db_subnet_group | Creates a new DB subnet group |
create_event_subscription | Creates an RDS event notification subscription |
create_global_cluster | Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions |
create_integration | Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift |
create_option_group | Creates a new option group |
create_tenant_database | Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration |
delete_blue_green_deployment | Deletes a blue/green deployment |
delete_custom_db_engine_version | Deletes a custom engine version |
delete_db_cluster | The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster |
delete_db_cluster_automated_backup | Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups |
delete_db_cluster_endpoint | Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster |
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group | Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group |
delete_db_cluster_snapshot | Deletes a DB cluster snapshot |
delete_db_instance | Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance |
delete_db_instance_automated_backup | Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups |
delete_db_parameter_group | Deletes a specified DB parameter group |
delete_db_proxy | Deletes an existing DB proxy |
delete_db_proxy_endpoint | Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint |
delete_db_security_group | Deletes a DB security group |
delete_db_shard_group | Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group |
delete_db_snapshot | Deletes a DB snapshot |
delete_db_subnet_group | Deletes a DB subnet group |
delete_event_subscription | Deletes an RDS event notification subscription |
delete_global_cluster | Deletes a global database cluster |
delete_integration | Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift |
delete_option_group | Deletes an existing option group |
delete_tenant_database | Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance |
deregister_db_proxy_targets | Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup |
describe_account_attributes | Lists all of the attributes for a customer account |
describe_blue_green_deployments | Describes one or more blue/green deployments |
describe_certificates | Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account |
describe_db_cluster_automated_backups | Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters |
describe_db_cluster_backtracks | Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster |
describe_db_cluster_endpoints | Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster |
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups | Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions |
describe_db_cluster_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group |
describe_db_clusters | Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes | Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot |
describe_db_cluster_snapshots | Returns information about DB cluster snapshots |
describe_db_engine_versions | Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines |
describe_db_instance_automated_backups | Displays backups for both current and deleted instances |
describe_db_instances | Describes provisioned RDS instances |
describe_db_log_files | Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance |
describe_db_parameter_groups | Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions |
describe_db_parameters | Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group |
describe_db_proxies | Returns information about DB proxies |
describe_db_proxy_endpoints | Returns information about DB proxy endpoints |
describe_db_proxy_target_groups | Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup data structures |
describe_db_proxy_targets | Returns information about DBProxyTarget objects |
describe_db_recommendations | Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups |
describe_db_security_groups | Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup descriptions |
describe_db_shard_groups | Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups |
describe_db_snapshot_attributes | Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot |
describe_db_snapshots | Returns information about DB snapshots |
describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases | Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot |
describe_db_subnet_groups | Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions |
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine |
describe_engine_default_parameters | Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine |
describe_event_categories | Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type |
describe_events | Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days |
describe_event_subscriptions | Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account |
describe_export_tasks | Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3 |
describe_global_clusters | Returns information about Aurora global database clusters |
describe_integrations | Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift |
describe_option_group_options | Describes all available options for the specified engine |
describe_option_groups | Describes the available option groups |
describe_orderable_db_instance_options | Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine |
describe_pending_maintenance_actions | Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action |
describe_reserved_db_instances | Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance |
describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings | Lists available reserved DB instance offerings |
describe_source_regions | Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from |
describe_tenant_databases | Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration |
describe_valid_db_instance_modifications | You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance |
disable_http_endpoint | Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster |
download_db_log_file_portion | Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size |
enable_http_endpoint | Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster |
failover_db_cluster | Forces a failover for a DB cluster |
failover_global_cluster | Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource |
modify_activity_stream | Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked |
modify_certificates | Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override |
modify_current_db_cluster_capacity | Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value |
modify_custom_db_engine_version | Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV) |
modify_db_cluster | Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster |
modify_db_cluster_endpoint | Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster |
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group |
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute | Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot |
modify_db_instance | Modifies settings for a DB instance |
modify_db_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group |
modify_db_proxy | Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy |
modify_db_proxy_endpoint | Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint |
modify_db_proxy_target_group | Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup |
modify_db_recommendation | Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation |
modify_db_shard_group | Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group |
modify_db_snapshot | Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version |
modify_db_snapshot_attribute | Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot |
modify_db_subnet_group | Modifies an existing DB subnet group |
modify_event_subscription | Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription |
modify_global_cluster | Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster |
modify_integration | Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift |
modify_option_group | Modifies an existing option group |
modify_tenant_database | Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance |
promote_read_replica | Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance |
promote_read_replica_db_cluster | Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster |
purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering | Purchases a reserved DB instance offering |
reboot_db_cluster | You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons |
reboot_db_instance | You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons |
reboot_db_shard_group | You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons |
register_db_proxy_targets | Associate one or more DBProxyTarget data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup |
remove_from_global_cluster | Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster |
remove_role_from_db_cluster | Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster |
remove_role_from_db_instance | Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance |
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription | Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription |
remove_tags_from_resource | Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource |
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value |
reset_db_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value |
restore_db_cluster_from_s3 | Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket |
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot | Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot |
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time | Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time |
restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot | Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot |
restore_db_instance_from_s3 | Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files |
restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time | Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time |
revoke_db_security_group_ingress | Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups |
start_activity_stream | Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database |
start_db_cluster | Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the StopDBCluster operation |
start_db_instance | Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the StopDBInstance operation |
start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication | Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region |
start_export_task | Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3 |
stop_activity_stream | Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream CLI command, or the StartActivityStream operation |
stop_db_cluster | Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster |
stop_db_instance | Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily |
stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication | Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance |
switchover_blue_green_deployment | Switches over a blue/green deployment |
switchover_global_cluster | Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster |
switchover_read_replica | Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- rds()
# This example add a source identifier to an event notification
# subscription.
svc$add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
SourceIdentifier = "mymysqlinstance",
SubscriptionName = "mymysqleventsubscription"
)
## End(Not run)
Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster
Description
Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_role_to_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_add_role_to_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName = NULL)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the
Aurora DB cluster, for example
|
FeatureName |
The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion. |
Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance
Description
Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_role_to_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_add_role_to_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB instance to associate the IAM role with. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the DB
instance, for example |
FeatureName |
[required] The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion. |
Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription
Description
Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(SubscriptionName, SourceIdentifier)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the event source to be added. Constraints:
|
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource
Description
Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource. These tags can also be used with cost allocation reporting to track cost associated with Amazon RDS resources, or used in a Condition statement in an IAM policy for Amazon RDS.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource. |
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)
Description
Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
ResourceIdentifier,
ApplyAction,
OptInType
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
[required] The RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
ApplyAction |
[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource. Valid Values:
For more information about these actions, see Maintenance actions for Amazon Aurora or Maintenance actions for Amazon RDS. |
OptInType |
[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in
request. An opt-in request of type Valid Values:
|
Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization
Description
Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization. First, EC2 or VPC security groups can be added to the DBSecurityGroup if the application using the database is running on EC2 or VPC instances. Second, IP ranges are available if the application accessing your database is running on the internet. Required parameters for this API are one of CIDR range, EC2SecurityGroupId for VPC, or (EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId for non-VPC).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_authorize_db_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_authorize_db_security_group_ingress(
DBSecurityGroupName,
CIDRIP = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupId = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB security group to add authorization to. |
CIDRIP |
The IP range to authorize. |
EC2SecurityGroupName |
Name of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups,
|
EC2SecurityGroupId |
Id of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups,
|
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security
group specified in the |
Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster
Description
Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_backtrack_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_backtrack_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
BacktrackTo,
Force = NULL,
UseEarliestTimeOnPointInTimeUnavailable = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be backtracked. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
BacktrackTo |
[required] The timestamp of the time to backtrack the DB cluster to, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, see the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. If the specified time isn't a consistent time for the DB cluster, Aurora automatically chooses the nearest possible consistent time for the DB cluster. Constraints:
Example: |
Force |
Specifies whether to force the DB cluster to backtrack when binary logging is enabled. Otherwise, an error occurs when binary logging is enabled. |
UseEarliestTimeOnPointInTimeUnavailable |
Specifies whether to backtrack the DB cluster to the earliest possible backtrack time when BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time. When this parameter is disabled and BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time, an error occurs. |
Return an authentication token for a database connection
Description
Return an authentication token used as the password for a database connection.
Usage
rds_build_auth_token(endpoint, user, creds = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
endpoint |
[required] Hostname and port needed to connect
to the database: |
user |
[required] User account within the database to sign in with. |
creds |
Credentials to be signed with. |
region |
AWS region the database is located in. |
Details
See IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL for more information on using IAM database authentication with RDS.
Request syntax
svc$build_auth_token( endpoint = "string", region = "string", user = "string", creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ) )
See Also
Examples
## Not run:
# This example gets an authentication token for an RDS database, then
# connects to the database using the token.
host <- "database-1.cluster-abcdef123456.us-east-1.rds.amazonaws.com"
port <- 3306
user <- "jane_doe"
token <- svc$build_auth_token(
endpoint = sprintf("%s:%s", host, port),
region = "us-east-1",
user = user
)
conn <- DBI::dbConnect(
drv = RMariaDB::MariaDB(),
user = user,
password = token,
host = host,
port = port,
client.flag = RMariaDB::CLIENT_SSL
)
## End(Not run)
Generates an auth token used to connect to a db with IAM credentials.
Description
See IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL for more information on using IAM database authentication with RDS.
Usage
rds_build_auth_token_v2(DBHostname, Port, DBUsername, Region = NULL)
Arguments
DBHostname |
[required] The hostname of the database to connect to. |
Port |
[required] The port number the database is listening on. |
DBUsername |
[required] The username to log in as. |
Region |
The region the database is in. If |
Value
A presigned url which can be used as an auth token.
See Also
Examples
## Not run:
# This example gets an authentication token for an RDS database, then
# connects to the database using the token.
host <- "database-1.cluster-abcdef123456.us-east-1.rds.amazonaws.com"
port <- 3306
user <- "jane_doe"
token <- svc$build_auth_token_v2(
DBHostname = host,
Port = port,
user = user
)
conn <- DBI::dbConnect(
drv = RMariaDB::MariaDB(),
user = user,
password = token,
host = host,
port = port,
client.flag = RMariaDB::CLIENT_SSL
)
## End(Not run)
Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3
Description
Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3. Any data that has already been written to the S3 bucket isn't removed.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_cancel_export_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_cancel_export_task(ExportTaskIdentifier)
Arguments
ExportTaskIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to cancel. |
Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group
Description
Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the copied DB cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster
Description
Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. You can't copy an encrypted, shared DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the Amazon Web Services KMS key. If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web
Services account, you can specify a value for If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another
Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for
To copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services
Region, you must set If you copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for
the |
PreSignedUrl |
When you are copying a DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services
GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature
Version 4 signed request for the
This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions. The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process. If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify |
CopyTags |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot. By default, tags are not copied. |
Tags |
Copies the specified DB parameter group
Description
Copies the specified DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_copy_db_parameter_group(
SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
TargetDBParameterGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied DB parameter group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetDBParameterGroupDescription |
[required] A description for the copied DB parameter group. |
Tags |
Copies the specified DB snapshot
Description
Copies the specified DB snapshot. The source DB snapshot must be in the available
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_copy_db_snapshot(
SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier,
TargetDBSnapshotIdentifier,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
CopyTags = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
TargetCustomAvailabilityZone = NULL,
CopyOptionGroup = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the source DB snapshot. If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the
copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier. For example, you might
specify If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than
the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot ARN. For example, you might
specify
If you are copying from a shared manual DB snapshot, this parameter must be the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the shared DB snapshot. If you are copying an encrypted snapshot this parameter must be in the ARN format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. Constraints:
Example: Example:
|
TargetDBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copy of the snapshot. Constraints:
Example: |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for this parameter to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don't specify a value for this parameter, then the copy of the DB snapshot is encrypted with the same Amazon Web Services KMS key as the source DB snapshot. If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for this parameter. If you specify this parameter when you copy an unencrypted snapshot, the copy is encrypted. If you copy an encrypted snapshot to a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify an Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region. |
Tags |
|
CopyTags |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB snapshot to the target DB snapshot. By default, tags aren't copied. |
PreSignedUrl |
When you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud
(US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4
signed request for the This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions. You must specify this parameter when you copy an encrypted DB snapshot
from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API.
Don't specify The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process. If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify |
OptionGroupName |
The name of an option group to associate with the copy of the snapshot. Specify this option if you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another, and your DB instance uses a nondefault option group. If your source DB instance uses Transparent Data Encryption for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server, you must specify this option when copying across Amazon Web Services Regions. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
TargetCustomAvailabilityZone |
The external custom Availability Zone (CAZ) identifier for the target CAZ. Example: |
CopyOptionGroup |
Specifies whether to copy the DB option group associated with the source DB snapshot to the target Amazon Web Services account and associate with the target DB snapshot. The associated option group can be copied only with cross-account snapshot copy calls. |
Copies the specified option group
Description
Copies the specified option group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_option_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_copy_option_group(
SourceOptionGroupIdentifier,
TargetOptionGroupIdentifier,
TargetOptionGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceOptionGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the source option group. Constraints:
|
TargetOptionGroupIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the copied option group. Constraints:
Example: |
TargetOptionGroupDescription |
[required] The description for the copied option group. |
Tags |
Creates a blue/green deployment
Description
Creates a blue/green deployment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_blue_green_deployment(
BlueGreenDeploymentName,
Source,
TargetEngineVersion = NULL,
TargetDBParameterGroupName = NULL,
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
TargetDBInstanceClass = NULL,
UpgradeTargetStorageConfig = NULL,
TargetIops = NULL,
TargetStorageType = NULL,
TargetAllocatedStorage = NULL,
TargetStorageThroughput = NULL
)
Arguments
BlueGreenDeploymentName |
[required] The name of the blue/green deployment. Constraints:
|
Source |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source production database. Specify the database that you want to clone. The blue/green deployment creates this database in the green environment. You can make updates to the database in the green environment, such as an engine version upgrade. When you are ready, you can switch the database in the green environment to be the production database. |
TargetEngineVersion |
The engine version of the database in the green environment. Specify the engine version to upgrade to in the green environment. |
TargetDBParameterGroupName |
The DB parameter group associated with the DB instance in the green environment. To test parameter changes, specify a DB parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB instance. |
TargetDBClusterParameterGroupName |
The DB cluster parameter group associated with the Aurora DB cluster in the green environment. To test parameter changes, specify a DB cluster parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB cluster. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the blue/green deployment. |
TargetDBInstanceClass |
Specify the DB instance class for the databases in the green environment. This parameter only applies to RDS DB instances, because DB instances within an Aurora DB cluster can have multiple different instance classes. If you're creating a blue/green deployment from an Aurora DB cluster, don't specify this parameter. After the green environment is created, you can individually modify the instance classes of the DB instances within the green DB cluster. |
UpgradeTargetStorageConfig |
Whether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the green database. This option migrates the green DB instance from the older 32-bit file system to the preferred configuration. For more information, see Upgrading the storage file system for a DB instance. |
TargetIops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate for the green DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments. |
TargetStorageType |
The storage type to associate with the green DB instance. Valid Values: This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments. |
TargetAllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the green DB instance. You can choose to increase or decrease the allocated storage on the green DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments. |
TargetStorageThroughput |
The storage throughput value for the green DB instance. This setting applies only to the This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments. |
Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV)
Description
Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_custom_db_engine_version(
Engine,
EngineVersion,
DatabaseInstallationFilesS3BucketName = NULL,
DatabaseInstallationFilesS3Prefix = NULL,
ImageId = NULL,
KMSKeyId = NULL,
Description = NULL,
Manifest = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
SourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier = NULL,
UseAwsProvidedLatestImage = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
|
EngineVersion |
[required] The name of your CEV. The name format is 19.customized_string. For
example, a valid CEV name is |
DatabaseInstallationFilesS3BucketName |
The name of an Amazon S3 bucket that contains database installation
files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is
|
DatabaseInstallationFilesS3Prefix |
The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files
for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is |
ImageId |
The ID of the Amazon Machine Image (AMI). For RDS Custom for SQL Server,
an AMI ID is required to create a CEV. For RDS Custom for Oracle, the
default is the most recent AMI available, but you can specify an AMI ID
that was used in a different Oracle CEV. Find the AMIs used by your CEVs
by calling the
|
KMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. A symmetric encryption KMS key is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS. If you have an existing symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, you can use it with RDS Custom. No further action is necessary. If you don't already have a symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, follow the instructions in Creating a symmetric encryption KMS key in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide. You can choose the same symmetric encryption key when you create a CEV and a DB instance, or choose different keys. |
Description |
An optional description of your CEV. |
Manifest |
The CEV manifest, which is a JSON document that describes the installation .zip files stored in Amazon S3. Specify the name/value pairs in a file or a quoted string. RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they are listed. The following JSON fields are valid: MediaImportTemplateVersion Version of the CEV manifest. The date is in the format databaseInstallationFileNames Ordered list of installation files for the CEV. opatchFileNames Ordered list of OPatch installers used for the Oracle DB engine. psuRuPatchFileNames The PSU and RU patches for this CEV. OtherPatchFileNames The patches that are not in the list of PSU and RU patches. Amazon RDS applies these patches after applying the PSU and RU patches. For more information, see Creating the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
Tags |
|
SourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier |
The ARN of a CEV to use as a source for creating a new CEV. You can
specify a different Amazon Machine Imagine (AMI) by using either
|
UseAwsProvidedLatestImage |
Specifies whether to use the latest service-provided Amazon Machine
Image (AMI) for the CEV. If you specify |
Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster
Description
Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_cluster(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
ReplicationSourceIdentifier = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
BacktrackWindow = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
EngineMode = NULL,
ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
EnableHttpEndpoint = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
EnableGlobalWriteForwarding = NULL,
DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EnableLimitlessDatabase = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
ClusterScalabilityType = NULL,
DBSystemId = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableLocalWriteForwarding = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where you specifically want to create DB instances in the DB cluster. For information on AZs, see Availability Zones in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only Constraints:
|
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Default: Constraints:
|
CharacterSetName |
The name of the character set ( Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DatabaseName |
The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. A
database named Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for this DB cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If you don't specify a value, then the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified DB engine and version is used. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster. This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
Example: |
Engine |
[required] The database engine to use for this DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
|
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL version 2 (5.7-compatible) and version 3 (MySQL 8.0-compatible), use the following command:
You can supply either To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
For information about a specific engine, see the following topics:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Port |
The port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values: Default:
|
MasterUsername |
The name of the master user for the DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master database user. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
OptionGroupName |
The option group to associate the DB cluster with. DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled using the Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
ReplicationSourceIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a read replica. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the DB cluster is encrypted. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. When a KMS key isn't specified in
There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. If you create a read replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another
Amazon Web Services Region, make sure to set Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PreSignedUrl |
When you are replicating a DB cluster from one Amazon Web Services
GovCloud (US) Region to another, an URL that contains a Signature
Version 4 signed request for the
The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process. If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
BacktrackWindow |
The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set
this value to Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only Default: Constraints:
|
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters The following values are valid for each DB engine:
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
EngineMode |
The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either The For information about limitations and requirements for Serverless DB clusters, see the following sections in the Amazon Aurora User Guide: Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
ScalingConfiguration |
For DB clusters in Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration |
Reserved for future use. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The global cluster ID of an Aurora cluster that becomes the primary cluster in the new global database cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
EnableHttpEndpoint |
Specifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled. When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor. For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB cluster in. For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
EnableGlobalWriteForwarding |
Specifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database. You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB
cluster, for example For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters. This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster. When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default:
When you create an Aurora DB cluster with the storage type set to
|
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. For information about valid IOPS values, see Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only Constraints:
|
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible. When the DB cluster is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB cluster, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it. When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
If
If
|
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB cluster |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send
Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
If Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DatabaseInsightsMode |
The mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster. If you set this value to Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
EnableLimitlessDatabase |
Specifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only This setting is no longer used. Instead use the |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB cluster. The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only Valid Values: |
ClusterScalabilityType |
Specifies the scalability mode of the Aurora DB cluster. When set to
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only You can't modify this setting after you create the DB cluster. |
DBSystemId |
Reserved for future use. |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If you don't specify There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnableLocalWriteForwarding |
Specifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren't allowed on reader DB instances. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster's server certificate. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB cluster. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: |
Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
Description
Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_cluster_endpoint(
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
EndpointType,
StaticMembers = NULL,
ExcludedMembers = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
EndpointType |
[required] The type of the endpoint, one of: |
StaticMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group. |
ExcludedMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. This parameter is relevant only if the list of static members is empty. |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource. |
Creates a new DB cluster parameter group
Description
Creates a new DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family. Aurora MySQL Example: Aurora PostgreSQL Example: RDS for MySQL Example: RDS for PostgreSQL Example: To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the Aurora PostgreSQL DB engine, use the following command:
The output contains duplicates. The following are the valid DB engine values:
|
Description |
[required] The description for the DB cluster parameter group. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB cluster parameter group. |
Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster
Description
Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
DBClusterIdentifier,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot. |
Creates a new DB instance
Description
Creates a new DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_instance(
DBName = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifier,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DBInstanceClass,
Engine,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
NcharCharacterSetName = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainFqdn = NULL,
DomainOu = NULL,
DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
DomainDnsIps = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
Timezone = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
BackupTarget = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
DBSystemId = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
MultiTenant = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
DBName |
The meaning of this parameter differs according to the database engine you use. Amazon Aurora MySQL The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora MySQL DB cluster is created. If this parameter isn't specified for an Aurora MySQL DB cluster, no database is created in the DB cluster. Constraints:
Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the
Aurora PostgreSQL DB cluster is created. A database named Constraints:
Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created RDS Custom DB instance. If you
don't specify a value, the default value is Default: Constraints:
Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server Not applicable. Must be null. RDS for Db2 The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance. In some cases, we recommend that you don't add a database name. For more information, see Additional considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
RDS for MariaDB The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance. Constraints:
RDS for MySQL The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance. Constraints:
RDS for Oracle The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created DB instance. If you don't
specify a value, the default value is Default: Constraints:
RDS for PostgreSQL The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. A
database named Constraints:
RDS for SQL Server Not applicable. Must be null. |
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for this DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Aurora cluster volumes automatically grow as the amount of data in your database increases, though you are only charged for the space that you use in an Aurora cluster volume. Amazon RDS Custom Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for Db2 Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for MariaDB Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for MySQL Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for Oracle Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for PostgreSQL Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
RDS for SQL Server Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:
|
DBInstanceClass |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example
|
Engine |
[required] The database engine to use for this DB instance. Not every database engine is available in every Amazon Web Services Region. Valid Values:
|
MasterUsername |
The name for the master user. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The name for the master user is managed by the DB cluster. This setting is required for RDS DB instances. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master user. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster. Constraints:
Length Constraints:
|
DBSecurityGroups |
A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance. This setting applies to the legacy EC2-Classic platform, which is no
longer used to create new DB instances. Use the |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC. |
AvailabilityZone |
The Availability Zone (AZ) where the database will be created. For information on Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones. For Amazon Aurora, each Aurora DB cluster hosts copies of its storage in three separate Availability Zones. Specify one of these Availability Zones. Aurora automatically chooses an appropriate Availability Zone if you don't specify one. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance. Constraints:
Example: |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur. For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. Constraints:
|
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you don't specify a value, then Amazon RDS uses the default DB parameter group for the specified DB engine and version. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Constraints:
|
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting
this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this
parameter to This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. Default: Constraints:
|
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, using the This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. Constraints:
|
Port |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. This setting doesn't apply to Aurora DB instances. The port number is managed by the cluster. Valid Values: Default:
Constraints:
|
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can't
set the This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The version number of the database engine the DB instance uses is managed by the DB cluster. For a list of valid engine versions, use the
The following are the database engines and links to information about the major and minor versions that are available with Amazon RDS. Not every database engine is available for every Amazon Web Services Region. Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle A custom engine version (CEV) that you have previously created. This
setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle. The CEV name has the
following format: 19.customized_string. A valid CEV name is
Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server See RDS Custom for SQL Server general requirements in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for Db2 For information, see Db2 on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for MariaDB For information, see MariaDB on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for Microsoft SQL Server For information, see Microsoft SQL Server versions on Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for MySQL For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for Oracle For information, see Oracle Database Engine release notes in the Amazon RDS User Guide. RDS for PostgreSQL For information, see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically. If you create an RDS Custom DB instance, you must set
|
LicenseModel |
The license model information for this DB instance. License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide. The default for RDS for Db2 is This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
|
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster. Constraints:
|
OptionGroupName |
The option group to associate the DB instance with. Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group. Also, that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. |
CharacterSetName |
For supported engines, the character set ( This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
NcharCharacterSetName |
The name of the NCHAR character set for the Oracle DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
If
If
|
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB instance. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the DB cluster that this DB instance will belong to. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB instance. If you specify This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster. Valid Values: Default: |
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifes whether the DB instance is encrypted. By default, it isn't encrypted. For RDS Custom DB instances, either enable this setting or leave it unset. Otherwise, Amazon RDS reports an error. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB cluster. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The Amazon Web
Services KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For more
information, see If For Amazon RDS Custom, a KMS key is required for DB instances. For most
RDS engines, if you leave this parameter empty while enabling
|
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
DomainFqdn |
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain. Constraints:
Example: |
DomainOu |
The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainAuthSecretArn |
The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain. Example:
|
DomainDnsIps |
The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers. Constraints:
Example: |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring
metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
PromotionTier |
The order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Default: Valid Values: |
Timezone |
The time zone of the DB instance. The time zone parameter is currently supported only by RDS for Db2 and RDS for SQL Server. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
DatabaseInsightsMode |
The mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance. Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value. |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of log types to enable for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
The following values are valid for each DB engine:
|
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable
or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information,
see |
MaxAllocatedStorage |
The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance. For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
EnableCustomerOwnedIp |
Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance. A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network. For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide. |
CustomIamInstanceProfile |
The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. This setting is required for RDS Custom. Constraints:
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
BackupTarget |
The location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots. Valid Values:
Default: For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid Values: |
StorageThroughput |
The storage throughput value, in mebibyte per second (MiBps), for the DB instance. This setting applies only to the This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If you don't specify There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
DBSystemId |
The Oracle system identifier (SID), which is the name of the Oracle
database instance that manages your database files. In this context, the
term "Oracle database instance" refers exclusively to the system global
area (SGA) and Oracle background processes. If you don't specify a SID,
the value defaults to |
DedicatedLogVolume |
Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled. |
MultiTenant |
Specifies whether to use the multi-tenant configuration or the single-tenant configuration (default). This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) engines. Note the following restrictions:
|
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB instance. By default, this value is set to This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster. You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid Values:
Default: |
Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster
Description
Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster. You can create a read replica for a DB instance running Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, or SQL Server. You can create a read replica for a Multi-AZ DB cluster running MySQL or PostgreSQL. For more information, see Working with read replicas and Migrating from a Multi-AZ DB cluster to a DB instance using a read replica in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_instance_read_replica/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_instance_read_replica(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
DomainFqdn = NULL,
DomainOu = NULL,
DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
DomainDnsIps = NULL,
ReplicaMode = NULL,
MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
UpgradeStorageConfig = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier of the read replica. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier |
The identifier of the DB instance that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB instance can have up to 15 read replicas, with the exception of Oracle and SQL Server, which can have up to five. Constraints:
|
DBInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of the read replica, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance. |
AvailabilityZone |
The Availability Zone (AZ) where the read replica will be created. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region. Example: |
Port |
The port number that the DB instance uses for connections. Valid Values: Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance. |
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether the read replica is in a Multi-AZ deployment. You can create a read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance. RDS creates a standby of your replica in another Availability Zone for failover support for the replica. Creating your read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance is independent of whether the source is a Multi-AZ DB instance or a Multi-AZ DB cluster. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the read replica during the maintenance window. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance. |
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance. |
OptionGroupName |
The option group to associate the DB instance with. If not specified, RDS uses the option group associated with the source DB instance or cluster. For SQL Server, you must use the option group associated with the source. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this read replica DB instance. For Single-AZ or Multi-AZ DB instance read replica instances, if you
don't specify a value for For Multi-AZ DB cluster same Region read replica instances, if you don't
specify a value for Specifying a parameter group for this operation is only supported for MySQL DB instances for cross-Region read replicas, for Multi-AZ DB cluster read replica instances, and for Oracle DB instances. It isn't supported for MySQL DB instances for same Region read replicas or for RDS Custom. Constraints:
|
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. For more information, see
|
Tags |
|
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group for the DB instance. The new DB instance is created in the VPC associated with the DB subnet group. If no DB subnet group is specified, then the new DB instance isn't created in a VPC. Constraints:
Example: |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the read replica. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC. |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the read replica. If you specify Valid Values: Default: |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the read replica to snapshots of the read replica. By default, tags aren't copied. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the read replica. To disable collection of
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring
metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted read replica. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you create an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster, don't specify a value for this parameter. A read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region is always encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB instance or cluster. If you create an encrypted read replica in a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify a KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region. You can't create an encrypted read replica from an unencrypted DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom, which uses the same KMS key as the primary replica. |
PreSignedUrl |
When you are creating a read replica from one Amazon Web Services
GovCloud (US) Region to another or from one China Amazon Web Services
Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed
request for the
This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions. This setting applies only when replicating from a source DB instance. Source DB clusters aren't supported in Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions. You must specify this parameter when you create an encrypted read
replica from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS
API. Don't specify The presigned URL must be a valid request for the
To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process. If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DatabaseInsightsMode |
The mode of Database Insights to enable for the read replica. This setting isn't supported. |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the read replica. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you do not specify a value for This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the new DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures |
Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainFqdn |
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain. Constraints:
Example: |
DomainOu |
The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainAuthSecretArn |
The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain. Example:
|
DomainDnsIps |
The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers. Constraints:
Example: |
ReplicaMode |
The open mode of the replica database: mounted or read-only. This parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances. Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Database Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn't use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn't accept user connections, a mounted replica can't serve a read-only workload. You can create a combination of mounted and read-only DB replicas for the same primary DB instance. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For RDS Custom, you must specify this parameter and set it to |
MaxAllocatedStorage |
The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance. For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
CustomIamInstanceProfile |
The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting is required for RDS Custom DB instances. |
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
StorageThroughput |
Specifies the storage throughput value for the read replica. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora DB instances. |
EnableCustomerOwnedIp |
Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts read replica. A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the read replica from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network. For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide. |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the read
replica. Follow the allocation rules specified in
This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server. Be sure to allocate enough storage for your read replica so that the create operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth. |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the Multi-AZ DB cluster that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB cluster can have up to 15 read replicas. Constraints:
|
DedicatedLogVolume |
Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled. |
UpgradeStorageConfig |
Whether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the read replica. This option migrates the read replica from the old storage file system layout to the preferred layout. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the read replica's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
Creates a new DB parameter group
Description
Creates a new DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_parameter_group(
DBParameterGroupName,
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family. To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:
For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the MySQL DB engine, use the following command:
The output contains duplicates. The following are the valid DB engine values:
|
Description |
[required] The description for the DB parameter group. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB parameter group. |
Creates a new DB proxy
Description
Creates a new DB proxy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_proxy/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_proxy(
DBProxyName,
EngineFamily,
Auth,
RoleArn,
VpcSubnetIds,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
RequireTLS = NULL,
IdleClientTimeout = NULL,
DebugLogging = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier for the proxy. This name must be unique for all proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens. |
EngineFamily |
[required] The kinds of databases that the proxy can connect to. This value
determines which database network protocol the proxy recognizes when it
interprets network traffic to and from the database. For Aurora MySQL,
RDS for MariaDB, and RDS for MySQL databases, specify |
Auth |
[required] The authorization mechanism that the proxy uses. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. |
VpcSubnetIds |
[required] One or more VPC subnet IDs to associate with the new proxy. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
One or more VPC security group IDs to associate with the new proxy. |
RequireTLS |
Specifies whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy. |
IdleClientTimeout |
The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database. |
DebugLogging |
Specifies whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs. |
Tags |
An optional set of key-value pairs to associate arbitrary data of your choosing with the proxy. |
Creates a DBProxyEndpoint
Description
Creates a DBProxyEndpoint
. Only applies to proxies that are associated with Aurora DB clusters. You can use DB proxy endpoints to specify read/write or read-only access to the DB cluster. You can also use DB proxy endpoints to access a DB proxy through a different VPC than the proxy's default VPC.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_proxy_endpoint(
DBProxyName,
DBProxyEndpointName,
VpcSubnetIds,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
TargetRole = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The name of the DB proxy associated with the DB proxy endpoint that you create. |
DBProxyEndpointName |
[required] The name of the DB proxy endpoint to create. |
VpcSubnetIds |
[required] The VPC subnet IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of subnet IDs than for the original DB proxy. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original DB proxy. The default is the default security group for the VPC. |
TargetRole |
The role of the DB proxy endpoint. The role determines whether the
endpoint can be used for read/write or only read operations. The default
is |
Tags |
Creates a new DB security group
Description
Creates a new DB security group. DB security groups control access to a DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_security_group(
DBSecurityGroupName,
DBSecurityGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name for the DB security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSecurityGroupDescription |
[required] The description for the DB security group. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB security group. |
Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database
Description
Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_shard_group(
DBShardGroupIdentifier,
DBClusterIdentifier,
ComputeRedundancy = NULL,
MaxACU,
MinACU = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBShardGroupIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB shard group. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group. |
ComputeRedundancy |
Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
|
MaxACU |
[required] The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs). |
MinACU |
The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs). |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible. When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group's VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn't permit it. When the DB shard group isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
If
If
|
Tags |
Creates a snapshot of a DB instance
Description
Creates a snapshot of a DB instance. The source DB instance must be in the available
or storage-optimization
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_snapshot(DBSnapshotIdentifier, DBInstanceIdentifier, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot. Constraints:
Example: |
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB instance that you want to create the snapshot of. Constraints:
|
Tags |
Creates a new DB subnet group
Description
Creates a new DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
[required] The description for the DB subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the DB subnet group. |
Creates an RDS event notification subscription
Description
Creates an RDS event notification subscription. This operation requires a topic Amazon Resource Name (ARN) created by either the RDS console, the SNS console, or the SNS API. To obtain an ARN with SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
SourceIds = NULL,
Enabled = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the subscription. Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters. |
SnsTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. SNS automatically creates the ARN when you create a topic and subscribe to it. RDS doesn't support FIFO (first in, first out) topics. For more information, see Message ordering and deduplication (FIFO topics) in the Amazon Simple Notification Service Developer Guide. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you
want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you set this
parameter to Valid
Values: |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a particular source type ( |
SourceIds |
The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens. It can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens. Constraints:
|
Enabled |
Specifies whether to activate the subscription. If the event notification subscription isn't activated, the subscription is created but not active. |
Tags |
Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions
Description
Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions. The global database contains a single primary cluster with read-write capability, and a read-only secondary cluster that receives data from the primary cluster through high-speed replication performed by the Aurora storage subsystem.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier for this global database cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global database. If you provide a value for this parameter, don't specify values for the following settings because Amazon Aurora uses the values from the specified source DB cluster:
|
Engine |
The database engine to use for this global database cluster. Valid Values: Constraints:
|
EngineVersion |
The engine version to use for this global database cluster. Constraints:
|
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this global database cluster. By default, this value is set to This setting only applies to Aurora PostgreSQL-based global databases. You can use this setting to enroll your global cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your global cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid Values:
Default: |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the new global database cluster. The global database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
DatabaseName |
The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you don't specify a name, Amazon Aurora doesn't create a database in the global database cluster. Constraints:
|
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether to enable storage encryption for the new global database cluster. Constraints:
|
Tags |
Tags to assign to the global cluster. |
Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_integration(
SourceArn,
TargetArn,
IntegrationName,
KMSKeyId = NULL,
AdditionalEncryptionContext = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DataFilter = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database to use as the source for replication. |
TargetArn |
[required] The ARN of the Redshift data warehouse to use as the target for replication. |
IntegrationName |
[required] The name of the integration. |
KMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the integration. If you don't specify an encryption key, RDS uses a default Amazon Web Services owned key. |
AdditionalEncryptionContext |
An optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional contextual information about the data. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide. You can only include this parameter if you specify the |
Tags |
|
DataFilter |
Data filtering options for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift. |
Description |
A description of the integration. |
Creates a new option group
Description
Creates a new option group. You can create up to 20 option groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_option_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_option_group(
OptionGroupName,
EngineName,
MajorEngineVersion,
OptionGroupDescription,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
OptionGroupName |
[required] Specifies the name of the option group to be created. Constraints:
Example: |
EngineName |
[required] The name of the engine to associate this option group with. Valid Values:
|
MajorEngineVersion |
[required] Specifies the major version of the engine that this option group should be associated with. |
OptionGroupDescription |
[required] The description of the option group. |
Tags |
Tags to assign to the option group. |
Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration
Description
Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration. Only RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) instances are supported.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_tenant_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_create_tenant_database(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
TenantDBName,
MasterUsername,
MasterUserPassword,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
NcharCharacterSetName = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The user-supplied DB instance identifier. RDS creates your tenant database in this DB instance. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
TenantDBName |
[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to create in
your DB instance. This parameter has the same constraints as |
MasterUsername |
[required] The name for the master user account in your tenant database. RDS creates this user account in the tenant database and grants privileges to the master user. This parameter is case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
[required] The password for the master user in your tenant database. Constraints:
|
CharacterSetName |
The character set for your tenant database. If you don't specify a
value, the character set name defaults to |
NcharCharacterSetName |
The |
Tags |
Deletes a blue/green deployment
Description
Deletes a blue/green deployment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_blue_green_deployment(
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier,
DeleteTarget = NULL
)
Arguments
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the blue/green deployment to delete. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
DeleteTarget |
Specifies whether to delete the resources in the green environment. You
can't specify this option if the blue/green deployment
status
is |
Deletes a custom engine version
Description
Deletes a custom engine version. To run this command, make sure you meet the following prerequisites:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_custom_db_engine_version(Engine, EngineVersion)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
|
EngineVersion |
[required] The custom engine version (CEV) for your DB instance. This option is
required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of
|
The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster
Description
The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster. When you delete a DB cluster, all automated backups for that DB cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified DB cluster are not deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
DeleteAutomatedBackups = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot
before RDS deletes the DB cluster. If you set this value to If |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot
created when If you specify this parameter and also skip the creation of a final DB
cluster snapshot with the Constraints:
|
DeleteAutomatedBackups |
Specifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted, unless the Amazon Web Services Backup policy specifies a point-in-time restore rule. |
Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups
Description
Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId
value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_automated_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_cluster_automated_backup(DbClusterResourceId)
Arguments
DbClusterResourceId |
[required] The identifier for the source DB cluster, which can't be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region. |
Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
Description
Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_cluster_endpoint(DBClusterEndpointIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group
Description
Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group. The DB cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group. Constraints:
|
Deletes a DB cluster snapshot
Description
Deletes a DB cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete. Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the
|
Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance. When you delete a DB instance, all automated backups for that instance are deleted and can't be recovered. However, manual DB snapshots of the DB instance aren't deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
DeleteAutomatedBackups = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before deleting the instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn't create a DB snapshot. If you don't enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before the DB instance is deleted. By default, skip isn't enabled, and the DB snapshot is created. If you don't enable this parameter, you must specify the
When a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of If you delete a read replica or an RDS Custom instance, you must enable this setting. This setting is required for RDS Custom. |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The If you enable this parameter and also enable SkipFinalShapshot, the command results in an error. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Constraints:
|
DeleteAutomatedBackups |
Specifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted. |
Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups
Description
Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId
value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_instance_automated_backup/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_instance_automated_backup(
DbiResourceId = NULL,
DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL
)
Arguments
DbiResourceId |
The identifier for the source DB instance, which can't be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region. |
DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups to delete, for
example,
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
Deletes a specified DB parameter group
Description
Deletes a specified DB parameter group. The DB parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
Deletes an existing DB proxy
Description
Deletes an existing DB proxy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_proxy/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_proxy(DBProxyName)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The name of the DB proxy to delete. |
Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint
Description
Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint
. Doing so removes the ability to access the DB proxy using the endpoint that you defined. The endpoint that you delete might have provided capabilities such as read/write or read-only operations, or using a different VPC than the DB proxy's default VPC.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_proxy_endpoint(DBProxyEndpointName)
Arguments
DBProxyEndpointName |
[required] The name of the DB proxy endpoint to delete. |
Deletes a DB security group
Description
Deletes a DB security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_security_group(DBSecurityGroupName)
Arguments
DBSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB security group to delete. You can't delete the default DB security group. Constraints:
|
Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group
Description
Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_shard_group(DBShardGroupIdentifier)
Arguments
DBShardGroupIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB shard group to delete. |
Deletes a DB snapshot
Description
Deletes a DB snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_snapshot(DBSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The DB snapshot identifier. Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB snapshot in the
|
Deletes a DB subnet group
Description
Deletes a DB subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete. You can't delete the default subnet group. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default. Example: |
Deletes an RDS event notification subscription
Description
Deletes an RDS event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to delete. |
Deletes a global database cluster
Description
Deletes a global database cluster. The primary and secondary clusters must already be detached or destroyed first.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted. |
Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_integration(IntegrationIdentifier)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the integration. |
Deletes an existing option group
Description
Deletes an existing option group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_option_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_option_group(OptionGroupName)
Arguments
OptionGroupName |
[required] The name of the option group to be deleted. You can't delete default option groups. |
Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance
Description
Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance. This command only applies to RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) instances.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_tenant_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_delete_tenant_database(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
TenantDBName,
SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The user-supplied identifier for the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you want to delete. |
TenantDBName |
[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to remove from your DB instance. Amazon RDS deletes the tenant database with this name. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. |
SkipFinalSnapshot |
Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before
removing the tenant database from your DB instance. If you enable this
parameter, RDS doesn't create a DB snapshot. If you don't enable this
parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before it deletes the tenant
database. By default, RDS doesn't skip the final snapshot. If you don't
enable this parameter, you must specify the |
FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier |
The If you enable this parameter and also enable |
Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup
Description
Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget
data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_deregister_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_deregister_db_proxy_targets(
DBProxyName,
TargetGroupName = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifiers = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier of the |
TargetGroupName |
The identifier of the |
DBInstanceIdentifiers |
One or more DB instance identifiers. |
DBClusterIdentifiers |
One or more DB cluster identifiers. |
Lists all of the attributes for a customer account
Description
Lists all of the attributes for a customer account. The attributes include Amazon RDS quotas for the account, such as the number of DB instances allowed. The description for a quota includes the quota name, current usage toward that quota, and the quota's maximum value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_account_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_account_attributes()
Describes one or more blue/green deployments
Description
Describes one or more blue/green deployments.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_blue_green_deployments/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_blue_green_deployments(
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier |
The blue/green deployment identifier. If you specify this parameter, the response only includes information about the specific blue/green deployment. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more blue/green deployments to describe. Valid Values:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints:
|
Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account
Description
Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_certificates(
CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateIdentifier |
The user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the identified certificate is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters
Description
Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters. For example, use this operation to find details about automated backups for previously deleted clusters. Current clusters are returned for both the describe_db_cluster_automated_backups
and describe_db_clusters
operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_automated_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_automated_backups(
DbClusterResourceId = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DbClusterResourceId |
The resource ID of the DB cluster that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
(Optional) The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster. It returns information from the specific DB cluster's automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies which resources to return based on status. Supported filters are the following:
Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter
is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
|
Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster
Description
Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_backtracks/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_backtracks(
DBClusterIdentifier,
BacktrackIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be described. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
BacktrackIdentifier |
If specified, this value is the backtrack identifier of the backtrack to be described. Constraints:
Example: |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported filters include the following:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
Description
Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_endpoints(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
The identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Filters |
A set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the
output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup
descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName
parameter is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for. Constraints:
|
Source |
A specific source to return parameters for. Valid Values:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB cluster parameters to describe. The only supported filter is |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
Description
Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for. |
Returns information about DB cluster snapshots
Description
Returns information about DB cluster snapshots. This API action supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL,
IncludePublic = NULL,
DbClusterResourceId = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots
for. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the
Constraints:
|
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
A specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter
can't be used in conjunction with the Constraints:
|
SnapshotType |
The type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a The |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB cluster snapshots to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
IncludeShared |
Specifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included. You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a
manual DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by
the
|
IncludePublic |
Specifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included. You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the
|
DbClusterResourceId |
A specific DB cluster resource ID to describe. |
Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
Description
Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_clusters(
DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB cluster identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported Filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100 |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
IncludeShared |
Specifies whether the output includes information about clusters shared from other Amazon Web Services accounts. |
Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines
Description
Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_engine_versions(
Engine = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DefaultOnly = NULL,
ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
ListSupportedTimezones = NULL,
IncludeAll = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
The database engine to return version details for. Valid Values:
|
EngineVersion |
A specific database engine version to return details for. Example: |
DBParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB engine versions to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than
the Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
DefaultOnly |
Specifies whether to return only the default version of the specified engine or the engine and major version combination. |
ListSupportedCharacterSets |
Specifies whether to list the supported character sets for each engine version. If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the
For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported character sets. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results. |
ListSupportedTimezones |
Specifies whether to list the supported time zones for each engine version. If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the
For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported time zones. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results. |
IncludeAll |
Specifies whether to also list the engine versions that aren't available. The default is to list only available engine versions. |
Displays backups for both current and deleted instances
Description
Displays backups for both current and deleted instances. For example, use this operation to find details about automated backups for previously deleted instances. Current instances with retention periods greater than zero (0) are returned for both the describe_db_instance_automated_backups
and describe_db_instances
operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_instance_automated_backups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_instance_automated_backups(
DbiResourceId = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL
)
Arguments
DbiResourceId |
The resource ID of the DB instance that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
DBInstanceIdentifier |
(Optional) The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB instance. It returns information from the specific DB instance's automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies which resources to return based on status. Supported filters are the following:
Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter
is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
|
DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups, for
example,
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
Describes provisioned RDS instances
Description
Describes provisioned RDS instances. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_instances(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The user-supplied instance identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB instance. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe. Supported Filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance
Description
Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_log_files/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_log_files(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
FilenameContains = NULL,
FileLastWritten = NULL,
FileSize = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list. Constraints:
|
FilenameContains |
Filters the available log files for log file names that contain the specified string. |
FileLastWritten |
Filters the available log files for files written since the specified date, in POSIX timestamp format with milliseconds. |
FileSize |
Filters the available log files for files larger than the specified size. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results. |
Marker |
The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords. |
Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBParameterGroup
descriptions. If a DBParameterGroupName
is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_parameter_groups(
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group
Description
Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_parameters(
DBParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for. Constraints:
|
Source |
The parameter types to return. Default: All parameter types returned Valid Values: |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB parameters to describe. The only supported filter is |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns information about DB proxies
Description
Returns information about DB proxies.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxies/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_proxies(
DBProxyName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
The name of the DB proxy. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account ID. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Returns information about DB proxy endpoints
Description
Returns information about DB proxy endpoints.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_proxy_endpoints(
DBProxyName = NULL,
DBProxyEndpointName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
The name of the DB proxy whose endpoints you want to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with all your DB proxies. |
DBProxyEndpointName |
The name of a DB proxy endpoint to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with the specified proxy. |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup data structures
Description
Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup
data structures.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_target_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_proxy_target_groups(
DBProxyName,
TargetGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier of the |
TargetGroupName |
The identifier of the |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Returns information about DBProxyTarget objects
Description
Returns information about DBProxyTarget
objects. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_proxy_targets(
DBProxyName,
TargetGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier of the |
TargetGroupName |
The identifier of the |
Filters |
This parameter is not currently supported. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups
Description
Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_recommendations/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_recommendations(
LastUpdatedAfter = NULL,
LastUpdatedBefore = NULL,
Locale = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
LastUpdatedAfter |
A filter to include only the recommendations that were updated after this specified time. |
LastUpdatedBefore |
A filter to include only the recommendations that were updated before this specified time. |
Locale |
The language that you choose to return the list of recommendations. Valid values:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more recommendations to describe. Supported Filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of recommendations to include in the response. If
more records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup
descriptions. If a DBSecurityGroupName
is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DB security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_security_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_security_groups(
DBSecurityGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSecurityGroupName |
The name of the DB security group to return details for. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups
Description
Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_shard_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_shard_groups(
DBShardGroupIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBShardGroupIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB shard group identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB shard group is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB shard groups to describe. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100 |
Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot
Description
Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_snapshot_attributes(DBSnapshotIdentifier)
Arguments
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot to describe the attributes for. |
Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot
Description
Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot. This command only applies to RDS for Oracle DB instances in the multi-tenant configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
DbiResourceId = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The ID of the DB instance used to create the DB snapshots. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
The ID of a DB snapshot that contains the tenant databases to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
SnapshotType |
The type of DB snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more tenant databases to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
DbiResourceId |
A specific DB resource identifier to describe. |
Returns information about DB snapshots
Description
Returns information about DB snapshots. This API action supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_snapshots(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
IncludeShared = NULL,
IncludePublic = NULL,
DbiResourceId = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The ID of the DB instance to retrieve the list of DB snapshots for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
A specific DB snapshot identifier to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
SnapshotType |
The type of snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a The |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more DB snapshots to describe. Supported filters:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
IncludeShared |
Specifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included. You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a
manual DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by using the
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
IncludePublic |
Specifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included. You can share a manual DB snapshot as public by using the
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
DbiResourceId |
A specific DB resource ID to describe. |
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
Description
Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_db_subnet_groups(
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the DB subnet group to return details for. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the
response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value
specified by |
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine
Description
Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_engine_default_parameters(
DBParameterGroupFamily,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group family. Valid Values:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more parameters to describe. The only supported filter is |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
Description
Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type. You can also see this list in the "Amazon RDS event categories and event messages" section of the Amazon RDS User Guide or the Amazon Aurora User Guide .
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For RDS Proxy events,
specify Valid Values: |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
Description
Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName
, SNSTopicARN
, CustomerID
, SourceType
, SourceID
, CreationTime
, and Status
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_event_subscriptions(
SubscriptionName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to describe. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days
Description
Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular DB instance, DB cluster, DB parameter group, DB security group, DB snapshot, DB cluster snapshot group, or RDS Proxy can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_events(
SourceIdentifier = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceIdentifier |
The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. Constraints:
|
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. |
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z |
Duration |
The number of minutes to retrieve events for. Default: 60 |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only
records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3
Description
Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3. This API operation supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_export_tasks/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_export_tasks(
ExportTaskIdentifier = NULL,
SourceArn = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
SourceType = NULL
)
Arguments
ExportTaskIdentifier |
The identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to be described. |
SourceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3. |
Filters |
Filters specify one or more snapshot or cluster exports to describe. The filters are specified as name-value pairs that define what to include in the output. Filter names and values are case-sensitive. Supported filters include the following:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified value, a pagination token called a
marker is included in the response. You can use the marker in a later
Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
SourceType |
The type of source for the export. |
Returns information about Aurora global database clusters
Description
Returns information about Aurora global database clusters. This API supports pagination.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_global_clusters(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more global database clusters to describe. This parameter is case-sensitive. Currently, the only supported filter is If used, the request returns information about any global cluster with at least one member (primary or secondary) in the specified Amazon Web Services Regions. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift
Description
Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_integrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_integrations(
IntegrationIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the integration. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more resources to return. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Describes all available options for the specified engine
Description
Describes all available options for the specified engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_option_group_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_option_group_options(
EngineName,
MajorEngineVersion = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
EngineName |
[required] The name of the engine to describe options for. Valid Values:
|
MajorEngineVersion |
If specified, filters the results to include only options for the specified major engine version. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Describes the available option groups
Description
Describes the available option groups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_option_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_option_groups(
OptionGroupName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
EngineName = NULL,
MajorEngineVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group to describe. Can't be supplied together with EngineName or MajorEngineVersion. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOptionGroups
request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only
records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
EngineName |
A filter to only include option groups associated with this database engine. Valid Values:
|
MajorEngineVersion |
Filters the list of option groups to only include groups associated with a specific database engine version. If specified, then EngineName must also be specified. |
Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine
Description
Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
AvailabilityZoneGroup = NULL,
Vpc = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to describe DB instance options for. Valid Values:
|
EngineVersion |
A filter to include only the available options for the specified engine version. |
DBInstanceClass |
A filter to include only the available options for the specified DB instance class. |
LicenseModel |
A filter to include only the available options for the specified license model. RDS Custom supports only the BYOL licensing model. |
AvailabilityZoneGroup |
The Availability Zone group associated with a Local Zone. Specify this parameter to retrieve available options for the Local Zones in the group. Omit this parameter to show the available options in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
Vpc |
Specifies whether to show only VPC or non-VPC offerings. RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings. RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings. If you describe non-VPC offerings for RDS Custom, the output shows VPC offerings. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 1000. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is
specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to
the value specified by |
Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
Description
Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceIdentifier |
The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for. Supported filters:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance
Description
Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_reserved_db_instances/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_reserved_db_instances(
ReservedDBInstanceId = NULL,
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
ProductDescription = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
LeaseId = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedDBInstanceId |
The reserved DB instance identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID. |
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier. |
DBInstanceClass |
The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified DB instances class. |
Duration |
The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration. Valid Values: |
ProductDescription |
The product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid Values: |
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ. |
LeaseId |
The lease identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified lease ID. Amazon Web Services Support might request the lease ID for an issue related to a reserved DB instance. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than
the Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Lists available reserved DB instance offerings
Description
Lists available reserved DB instance offerings.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings(
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
ProductDescription = NULL,
OfferingType = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId |
The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier. Example: |
DBInstanceClass |
The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class. |
Duration |
Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration. Valid Values: |
ProductDescription |
Product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that contain the specified product description. The results show offerings that partially match the filter value. |
OfferingType |
The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid Values: |
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than
the Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this
parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the
marker, up to the value specified by |
Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from
Description
Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_source_regions/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_source_regions(
RegionName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
RegionName |
The source Amazon Web Services Region name. For example, Constraints:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified Default: 100 Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration
Description
Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration. Only RDS for Oracle CDB instances are supported.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_tenant_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_tenant_databases(
DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
TenantDBName = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
The user-supplied DB instance identifier, which must match the identifier of an existing instance owned by the Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. |
TenantDBName |
The user-supplied tenant database name, which must match the name of an existing tenant database on the specified DB instance owned by your Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. |
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more database tenants to describe. Supported filters:
|
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance
Description
You can call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications
to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance. You can use this information when you call modify_db_instance
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(DBInstanceIdentifier)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance. |
Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster
Description
Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster. Disabling this endpoint disables RDS Data API.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_disable_http_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_disable_http_endpoint(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster. |
Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size
Description
Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_download_db_log_file_portion/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_download_db_log_file_portion(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
LogFileName,
Marker = NULL,
NumberOfLines = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list. Constraints:
|
LogFileName |
[required] The name of the log file to be downloaded. |
Marker |
The pagination token provided in the previous request or "0". If the Marker parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker until the end of the file or up to NumberOfLines. |
NumberOfLines |
The number of lines to download. If the number of lines specified results in a file over 1 MB in size, the file is truncated at 1 MB in size. If the NumberOfLines parameter is specified, then the block of lines returned can be from the beginning or the end of the log file, depending on the value of the Marker parameter.
|
Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster
Description
Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_enable_http_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_enable_http_endpoint(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster. |
Forces a failover for a DB cluster
Description
Forces a failover for a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_failover_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier, TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to force a failover for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier |
The name of the DB instance to promote to the primary DB instance. Specify the DB instance identifier for an Aurora Replica or a Multi-AZ
readable standby in the DB cluster, for example This setting isn't supported for RDS for MySQL Multi-AZ DB clusters. |
Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database
Description
Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database. Switchover operations were previously called "managed planned failovers."
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_failover_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
TargetDbClusterIdentifier,
AllowDataLoss = NULL,
Switchover = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the global database cluster (Aurora global database) this operation should apply to. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Aurora global database is created. In other words, it's the name of the Aurora global database. Constraints:
|
TargetDbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster that you want to promote to the primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region. |
AllowDataLoss |
Specifies whether to allow data loss for this global database cluster operation. Allowing data loss triggers a global failover operation. If you don't specify Constraints:
|
Switchover |
Specifies whether to switch over this global database cluster. Constraints:
|
Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource
Description
Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon RDS resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
Filters |
This parameter isn't currently supported. |
Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked
Description
Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked. A locked policy is read-only, whereas an unlocked policy is read/write. If your activity stream is started and locked, you can unlock it, customize your audit policy, and then lock your activity stream. Restarting the activity stream isn't required. For more information, see Modifying a database activity stream in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_activity_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_activity_stream(ResourceArn = NULL, AuditPolicyState = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RDS for Oracle or Microsoft SQL
Server DB instance. For example,
|
AuditPolicyState |
The audit policy state. When a policy is unlocked, it is read/write. When it is locked, it is read-only. You can edit your audit policy only when the activity stream is unlocked or stopped. |
Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override
Description
Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_certificates(
CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
RemoveCustomerOverride = NULL
)
Arguments
CertificateIdentifier |
The new default certificate identifier to override the current one with. To determine the valid values, use the |
RemoveCustomerOverride |
Specifies whether to remove the override for the default certificate. If the override is removed, the default certificate is the system default. |
Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value
Description
Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_current_db_cluster_capacity/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_current_db_cluster_capacity(
DBClusterIdentifier,
Capacity = NULL,
SecondsBeforeTimeout = NULL,
TimeoutAction = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Capacity |
The DB cluster capacity. When you change the capacity of a paused Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster, it automatically resumes. Constraints:
|
SecondsBeforeTimeout |
The amount of time, in seconds, that Aurora Serverless v1 tries to find a scaling point to perform seamless scaling before enforcing the timeout action. The default is 300. Specify a value between 10 and 600 seconds. |
TimeoutAction |
The action to take when the timeout is reached, either
|
Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV)
Description
Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV). You can find CEVs to modify by calling describe_db_engine_versions
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_custom_db_engine_version(
Engine,
EngineVersion,
Description = NULL,
Status = NULL
)
Arguments
Engine |
[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:
|
EngineVersion |
[required] The custom engine version (CEV) that you want to modify. This option is
required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The
combination of |
Description |
An optional description of your CEV. |
Status |
The availability status to be assigned to the CEV. Valid values are as follows: available You can use this CEV to create a new RDS Custom DB instance. inactive You can create a new RDS Custom instance by restoring a DB snapshot with this CEV. You can't patch or create new instances with this CEV. You can change any status to any status. A typical reason to change
status is to prevent the accidental use of a CEV, or to make a
deprecated CEV eligible for use again. For example, you might change the
status of your CEV from |
Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster
Description
Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster. You can change one or more settings by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
BacktrackWindow = NULL,
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
DBInstanceParameterGroupName = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
EnableHttpEndpoint = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
EnableGlobalWriteForwarding = NULL,
DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
EngineMode = NULL,
AllowEngineModeChange = NULL,
EnableLocalWriteForwarding = NULL,
AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn = NULL,
EnableLimitlessDatabase = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
NewDBClusterIdentifier |
The new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
Example: |
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether the modifications in this request are asynchronously
applied as soon as possible, regardless of the
Most modifications can be applied immediately or during the next scheduled maintenance window. Some modifications, such as turning on deletion protection and changing the master password, are applied immediately—regardless of when you choose to apply them. By default, this parameter is disabled. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Specify a
minimum value of Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Default: Constraints:
|
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Port |
The port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only Valid Values: Default: The same port as the original DB cluster. |
MasterUserPassword |
The new password for the master database user. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
OptionGroupName |
The option group to associate the DB cluster with. DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
BacktrackWindow |
The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set
this value to Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only Default: Constraints:
|
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration |
The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters The following values are valid for each DB engine:
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.
Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied
during the next maintenance window unless If the cluster that you're modifying has one or more read replicas, all replicas must be running an engine version that's the same or later than the version you specify. To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether major version upgrades are allowed. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
DBInstanceParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster. When you apply a parameter group using the
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only Default: The existing name setting Constraints:
|
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB cluster to. Specify
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
ScalingConfiguration |
The scaling properties of the DB cluster. You can only modify scaling
properties for DB clusters in Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnableHttpEndpoint |
Specifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled. When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor. For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. This parameter applies only to Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters. To
enable or disable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v2 or
provisioned DB cluster, use the
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnableGlobalWriteForwarding |
Specifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database. You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB
cluster, for example For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB cluster. For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters. When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default:
|
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only Constraints:
|
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send
Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
If Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
DatabaseInsightsMode |
Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster. If you change the value from If you change the value from Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB cluster. The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only Valid Values: |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. If the DB cluster doesn't manage the master user password with Amazon
Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this
case, you can't specify If the DB cluster already manages the master user password with Amazon
Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user
password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then
you must specify For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
RotateMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The secret value contains the updated password. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EngineMode |
The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either The DB engine mode can be modified only from For more information, see CreateDBCluster. Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only |
AllowEngineModeChange |
Specifies whether engine mode changes from Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters only Constraints:
|
EnableLocalWriteForwarding |
Specifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren't allowed on reader DB instances. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup. |
EnableLimitlessDatabase |
Specifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only This setting is no longer used. Instead use the |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster's server certificate. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
Description
Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_cluster_endpoint(
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
EndpointType = NULL,
StaticMembers = NULL,
ExcludedMembers = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterEndpointIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
EndpointType |
The type of the endpoint. One of: |
StaticMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group. |
ExcludedMembers |
List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty. |
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
, ParameterValue
, and ApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName, Parameters)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify. |
Parameters |
[required] A list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify. Valid Values (for the application method): You can use the When the application method is |
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot
Description
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
AttributeName,
ValuesToAdd = NULL,
ValuesToRemove = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for. |
AttributeName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify. To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the
|
ValuesToAdd |
A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute
specified by To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a
manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon
Web Services account IDs, or |
ValuesToRemove |
A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute
specified by To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or
more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or |
Modifies settings for a DB instance
Description
Modifies settings for a DB instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. To learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance, call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications
before you call modify_db_instance
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_instance(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainFqdn = NULL,
DomainOu = NULL,
DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
DomainDnsIps = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
DBPortNumber = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
DisableDomain = NULL,
PromotionTier = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
CertificateRotationRestart = NULL,
ReplicaMode = NULL,
EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn = NULL,
AutomationMode = NULL,
ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
MultiTenant = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of DB instance to modify. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
AllocatedStorage |
The new amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance. For RDS for Db2, MariaDB, RDS for MySQL, RDS for Oracle, and RDS for PostgreSQL, the value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value. For the valid values for allocated storage for each engine, see
Constraints:
|
DBInstanceClass |
The new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example
If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change.
The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you
specify Default: Uses existing setting Constraints:
|
DBSubnetGroupName |
The new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC. If your DB instance isn't in a VPC, you can also use this parameter to move your DB instance into a VPC. For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change
is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you enable
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSecurityGroups |
A list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
Constraints:
|
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending
modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless
of the If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB instance are applied
during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an
outage and are applied on the next call to
|
MasterUserPassword |
The new password for the master user. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is
asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the
request and the completion of the request, the Amazon RDS API operations never return the password, so this operation provides a way to regain access to a primary instance user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked. This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
Default: Uses existing setting Constraints:
Length Constraints:
|
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. In this case, the DB instance isn't rebooted automatically, and the parameter changes aren't applied during the next maintenance window. However, if you modify dynamic parameters in the newly associated DB parameter group, these changes are applied immediately without a reboot. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Default: Uses existing setting Constraints:
|
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain automated backups. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups. Enabling and disabling backups can result in a brief I/O suspension that lasts from a few seconds to a few minutes, depending on the size and class of your DB instance. These changes are applied during the next maintenance window unless the
This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention
period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more
information, see Default: Uses existing setting Constraints:
|
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, as determined by the
This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time
range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For
more information, see Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter causes a reboot of the DB instance. If you change this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied. For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Default: Uses existing setting Constraints:
|
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing
this parameter doesn't result in an outage. The change is applied during
the next maintenance window unless the This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Changing this
parameter results in an outage and the change is applied during the next
maintenance window unless the For major version upgrades, if a nondefault DB parameter group is currently in use, a new DB parameter group in the DB parameter group family for the new engine version must be specified. The new DB parameter group can be the default for that DB parameter group family. If you specify only a major version, Amazon RDS updates the DB instance
to the default minor version if the current minor version is lower. For
information about valid engine versions, see
If the instance that you're modifying is acting as a read replica, the engine version that you specify must be the same or higher than the version that the source DB instance or cluster is running. In RDS Custom for Oracle, this parameter is supported for read replicas
only if they are in the Constraints:
|
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Constraints:
|
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. An outage occurs when all the following conditions are met:
If any of the preceding conditions isn't met, Amazon RDS applies the change as soon as possible and doesn't cause an outage. For an RDS Custom DB instance, don't enable this setting. Otherwise, the operation returns an error. |
LicenseModel |
The license model for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
|
Iops |
The new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the RDS instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is
applied during the next maintenance window unless the If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance. Constraints:
Default: Uses existing setting |
OptionGroupName |
The option group to associate the DB instance with. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, with one exception. If the parameter change results in an option group that enables OEM, it can cause a brief period, lasting less than a second, during which new connections are rejected but existing connections aren't interrupted. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the
Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
NewDBInstanceIdentifier |
The new identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB instance. When
you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs
immediately if you enable This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Constraints:
Example: |
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB instance. If you specify If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to gp2 (General Purpose SSD), gp3, or Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from these storage types to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance. Valid Values: Default: |
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB instance to. Specify
For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainFqdn |
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain. Constraints:
Example: |
DomainOu |
The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainAuthSecretArn |
The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain. Example:
|
DomainDnsIps |
The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers. Constraints:
Example: |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags aren't copied. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags
to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an
Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting. For more
information, see |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values: Default: |
DBPortNumber |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. The value of the If you change the This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values: Default:
Constraints:
|
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.
Changes to the |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring
metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DisableDomain |
Specifies whether to remove the DB instance from the Active Directory domain. |
PromotionTier |
The order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Default: Valid Values: |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora. Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster. For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DatabaseInsightsMode |
Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance. Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value. |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration |
The log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance. A change to the This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. The following values are valid for each DB engine:
For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures |
Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable
or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information,
see |
MaxAllocatedStorage |
The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance. For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
CertificateRotationRestart |
Specifies whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted. Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance. If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, follow the appropriate instructions for your DB engine to rotate your SSL/TLS certificate:
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
ReplicaMode |
A value that sets the open mode of a replica database to either mounted or read-only. Currently, this parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances. Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn't use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn't accept user connections, a mounted replica can't serve a read-only workload. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
EnableCustomerOwnedIp |
Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance. A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network. For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide. |
AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
AutomationMode |
The automation mode of the RDS Custom DB instance. If |
ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes |
The number of minutes to pause the automation. When the time period ends, RDS Custom resumes full automation. Default: Constraints:
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid Values: |
StorageThroughput |
The storage throughput value for the DB instance. This setting applies only to the This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. If the DB instance doesn't manage the master user password with Amazon
Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this
case, you can't specify If the DB instance already manages the master user password with Amazon
Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user
password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then
you must specify For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
RotateMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The secret value contains the updated password. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
Engine |
The target Oracle DB engine when you convert a non-CDB to a CDB. This intermediate step is necessary to upgrade an Oracle Database 19c non-CDB to an Oracle Database 21c CDB. Note the following requirements:
Note the following limitations:
|
DedicatedLogVolume |
Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled. |
MultiTenant |
Specifies whether the to convert your DB instance from the single-tenant configuration to the multi-tenant configuration. This parameter is supported only for RDS for Oracle CDB instances. During the conversion, RDS creates an initial tenant database and
associates the DB name, master user name, character set, and national
character set metadata with this database. The tags associated with the
instance also propagate to the initial tenant database. You can add more
tenant databases to your DB instance by using the
The conversion to the multi-tenant configuration is permanent and
irreversible, so you can't later convert back to the single-tenant
configuration. When you specify this parameter, you must also specify
|
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName
, ParameterValue
, and ApplyMethod
. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName, Parameters)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
Parameters |
[required] An array of parameter names, values, and the application methods for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and application method must be supplied; later arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request. Valid Values (for the application method): You can use the When the application method is When the application method is You can't use For more information on modifying DB parameters, see Working with DB parameter groups in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy
Description
Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_proxy(
DBProxyName,
NewDBProxyName = NULL,
Auth = NULL,
RequireTLS = NULL,
IdleClientTimeout = NULL,
DebugLogging = NULL,
RoleArn = NULL,
SecurityGroups = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier for the |
NewDBProxyName |
The new identifier for the |
Auth |
The new authentication settings for the |
RequireTLS |
Whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy, even if the associated database doesn't use TLS. |
IdleClientTimeout |
The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database. |
DebugLogging |
Whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs. |
RoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. |
SecurityGroups |
The new list of security groups for the |
Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint
Description
Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_proxy_endpoint(
DBProxyEndpointName,
NewDBProxyEndpointName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyEndpointName |
[required] The name of the DB proxy sociated with the DB proxy endpoint that you want to modify. |
NewDBProxyEndpointName |
The new identifier for the |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint. When the DB proxy endpoint uses a different VPC than the original proxy, you also specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original proxy. |
Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup
Description
Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy_target_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_proxy_target_group(
TargetGroupName,
DBProxyName,
ConnectionPoolConfig = NULL,
NewName = NULL
)
Arguments
TargetGroupName |
[required] The name of the target group to modify. |
DBProxyName |
[required] The name of the proxy. |
ConnectionPoolConfig |
The settings that determine the size and behavior of the connection pool for the target group. |
NewName |
The new name for the modified You can't rename the |
Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation
Description
Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_recommendation/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_recommendation(
RecommendationId,
Locale = NULL,
Status = NULL,
RecommendedActionUpdates = NULL
)
Arguments
RecommendationId |
[required] The identifier of the recommendation to update. |
Locale |
The language of the modified recommendation. |
Status |
The recommendation status to update. Valid values:
|
RecommendedActionUpdates |
The list of recommended action status to update. You can update multiple recommended actions at one time. |
Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group
Description
Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group. You can change one or more settings by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_shard_group(
DBShardGroupIdentifier,
MaxACU = NULL,
MinACU = NULL,
ComputeRedundancy = NULL
)
Arguments
DBShardGroupIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB shard group to modify. |
MaxACU |
The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs). |
MinACU |
The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs). |
ComputeRedundancy |
Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:
|
Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version
Description
Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version. The snapshot can be encrypted or unencrypted, but not shared or public.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_snapshot(
DBSnapshotIdentifier,
EngineVersion = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB snapshot to modify. |
EngineVersion |
The engine version to upgrade the DB snapshot to. The following are the database engines and engine versions that are available when you upgrade a DB snapshot. MySQL For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a MySQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Oracle
PostgreSQL For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a PostgreSQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
OptionGroupName |
The option group to identify with the upgraded DB snapshot. You can specify this parameter when you upgrade an Oracle DB snapshot. The same option group considerations apply when upgrading a DB snapshot as when upgrading a DB instance. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot
Description
Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_snapshot_attribute(
DBSnapshotIdentifier,
AttributeName,
ValuesToAdd = NULL,
ValuesToRemove = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot to modify the attributes for. |
AttributeName |
[required] The name of the DB snapshot attribute to modify. To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual DB snapshot, set this value to To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the
|
ValuesToAdd |
A list of DB snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by
To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a
manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web
Services account IDs, or |
ValuesToRemove |
A list of DB snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified
by To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy
or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more
Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or |
Modifies an existing DB subnet group
Description
Modifies an existing DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_db_subnet_group(
DBSubnetGroupName,
DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
SubnetIds
)
Arguments
DBSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group. Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default. Example: |
DBSubnetGroupDescription |
The description for the DB subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] The EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group. |
Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription
Description
Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription. You can't modify the source identifiers using this call. To change source identifiers for a subscription, use the add_source_identifier_to_subscription
and remove_source_identifier_from_subscription
calls.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Enabled = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription. |
SnsTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you
want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set
this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify Valid
Values: |
EventCategories |
A list of event categories for a source type ( |
Enabled |
Specifies whether to activate the subscription. |
Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster
Description
Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. For more information on Amazon Aurora, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier for the global cluster to modify. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
NewGlobalClusterIdentifier |
The new cluster identifier for the global database cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the global database cluster. The global database cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. To list all of the available engine versions for
To list all of the available engine versions for
|
AllowMajorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether to allow major version upgrades. Constraints: Must be enabled if you specify a value for the
If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version. Apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade. |
Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_integration(
IntegrationIdentifier,
IntegrationName = NULL,
DataFilter = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the integration to modify. |
IntegrationName |
A new name for the integration. |
DataFilter |
A new data filter for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift. |
Description |
A new description for the integration. |
Modifies an existing option group
Description
Modifies an existing option group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_option_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_option_group(
OptionGroupName,
OptionsToInclude = NULL,
OptionsToRemove = NULL,
ApplyImmediately = NULL
)
Arguments
OptionGroupName |
[required] The name of the option group to be modified. Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance once it is associated with a DB instance |
OptionsToInclude |
Options in this list are added to the option group or, if already present, the specified configuration is used to update the existing configuration. |
OptionsToRemove |
Options in this list are removed from the option group. |
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether to apply the change immediately or during the next maintenance window for each instance associated with the option group. |
Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance
Description
Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance. You can change the tenant database name or the master user password. This operation is supported only for RDS for Oracle CDB instances using the multi-tenant configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_tenant_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_modify_tenant_database(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
TenantDBName,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
NewTenantDBName = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you are modifying. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
TenantDBName |
[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to modify. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The new password for the master user of the specified tenant database in your DB instance. Amazon RDS operations never return the password, so this action provides a way to regain access to a tenant database user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked. Constraints:
Length constraints:
|
NewTenantDBName |
The new name of the tenant database when renaming a tenant database. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance
Description
Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_promote_read_replica/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_promote_read_replica(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled, using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster
Description
Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_promote_read_replica_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_promote_read_replica_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the DB cluster read replica to promote. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
Purchases a reserved DB instance offering
Description
Purchases a reserved DB instance offering.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering(
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId,
ReservedDBInstanceId = NULL,
DBInstanceCount = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId |
[required] The ID of the Reserved DB instance offering to purchase. Example: 438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706 |
ReservedDBInstanceId |
Customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. Example: myreservationID |
DBInstanceCount |
The number of instances to reserve. Default: |
Tags |
You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons
Description
You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB cluster parameter group associated with the DB cluster, reboot the DB cluster for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_reboot_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons
Description
You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB parameter group associated with the DB instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
ForceFailover |
Specifies whether the reboot is conducted through a Multi-AZ failover. Constraint: You can't enable force failover if the instance isn't configured for Multi-AZ. |
You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons
Description
You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, reboot the DB shard group for the changes to take effect.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_reboot_db_shard_group(DBShardGroupIdentifier)
Arguments
DBShardGroupIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB shard group to reboot. |
Associate one or more DBProxyTarget data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup
Description
Associate one or more DBProxyTarget
data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_register_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_register_db_proxy_targets(
DBProxyName,
TargetGroupName = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifiers = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifiers = NULL
)
Arguments
DBProxyName |
[required] The identifier of the |
TargetGroupName |
The identifier of the |
DBInstanceIdentifiers |
One or more DB instance identifiers. |
DBClusterIdentifiers |
One or more DB cluster identifiers. |
Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster
Description
Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster. The cluster becomes a standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only and receiving data from a primary cluster in a different Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_remove_from_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DbClusterIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier to detach from the Aurora global database cluster. |
DbClusterIdentifier |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Aurora global database cluster. |
Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster
Description
Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_role_from_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_remove_role_from_db_cluster(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RoleArn,
FeatureName = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the
Aurora DB cluster, for example
|
FeatureName |
The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion. |
Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance
Description
Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_role_from_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_remove_role_from_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB instance to disassociate the IAM role from. |
RoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the
DB instance, for example, |
FeatureName |
[required] The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be
disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see
|
Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription
Description
Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SourceIdentifier
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from. |
SourceIdentifier |
[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group. |
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource
Description
Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed. |
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters submit a list of the following: ParameterName
and ApplyMethod
. To reset the entire DB cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName
and ResetAllParameters
parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
DBClusterParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset. |
ResetAllParameters |
Specifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB cluster parameter
group to their default values. You can't use this parameter if there is
a list of parameter names specified for the |
Parameters |
A list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to
the default values. You can't use this parameter if the
|
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value
Description
Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName
and ApplyMethod
. To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup
name and ResetAllParameters
parameters. When resetting the entire group, dynamic parameters are updated immediately and static parameters are set to pending-reboot
to take effect on the next DB instance restart or reboot_db_instance
request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reset_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_reset_db_parameter_group(
DBParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
DBParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB parameter group. Constraints:
|
ResetAllParameters |
Specifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB parameter group to default values. By default, all parameters in the DB parameter group are reset to default values. |
Parameters |
To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the MySQL Valid Values (for Apply method): You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can
use the MariaDB Valid Values (for Apply method): You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can
use the Oracle Valid Values (for Apply method): |
Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket
Description
Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket. Amazon RDS must be authorized to access the Amazon S3 bucket and the data must be created using the Percona XtraBackup utility as described in Migrating Data from MySQL by Using an Amazon S3 Bucket in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_from_s3/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_cluster_from_s3(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
CharacterSetName = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MasterUsername,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
SourceEngine,
SourceEngineVersion,
S3BucketName,
S3Prefix = NULL,
S3IngestionRoleArn,
BacktrackWindow = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created. |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups of the restored DB cluster are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1. Default: 1 Constraints:
|
CharacterSetName |
A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified CharacterSet. |
DatabaseName |
The database name for the restored DB cluster. |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the source data in the Amazon S3 bucket. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the restored DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default parameter group for the engine version is used. Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the restored DB cluster. |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with the restored DB cluster. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: |
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster. Valid Values: |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. To list all of the available engine versions for
Aurora MySQL Examples: |
Port |
The port number on which the instances in the restored DB cluster accept connections. Default: |
MasterUsername |
[required] The name of the master user for the restored DB cluster. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@". Constraints:
|
OptionGroupName |
A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group. Permanent options can't be removed from an option group. An option group can't be removed from a DB cluster once it is associated with a DB cluster. |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The daily time range during which automated backups are created if
automated backups are enabled using the The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). Format: The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun. Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
Tags |
|
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the restored DB cluster is encrypted. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a
value for the |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
SourceEngine |
[required] The identifier for the database engine that was backed up to create the files stored in the Amazon S3 bucket. Valid Values: |
SourceEngineVersion |
[required] The version of the database that the backup files were created from. MySQL versions 5.7 and 8.0 are supported. Example: |
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster. |
S3Prefix |
The prefix for all of the file names that contain the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster. If you do not specify a SourceS3Prefix value, then the Amazon Aurora DB cluster is created by using all of the files in the Amazon S3 bucket. |
S3IngestionRoleArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that authorizes Amazon RDS to access the Amazon S3 bucket on your behalf. |
BacktrackWindow |
The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0. Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters. Default: 0 Constraints:
|
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. Aurora MySQL Possible values are Aurora PostgreSQL Possible value are For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them. |
Domain |
Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service. |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB cluster. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If you don't specify There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster. Valid Values: Default: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB cluster. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: |
Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot
Description
Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
AvailabilityZones = NULL,
DBClusterIdentifier,
SnapshotIdentifier,
Engine,
EngineVersion = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
DatabaseName = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
BacktrackWindow = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
EngineMode = NULL,
ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
AvailabilityZones |
Provides the list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from. You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot. Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Engine |
[required] The database engine to use for the new DB cluster. Default: The same as source Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EngineVersion |
The version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster. If you don't specify an engine version, the default version for the database engine in the Amazon Web Services Region is used. To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:
To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:
Aurora MySQL See Database engine updates for Amazon Aurora MySQL in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Aurora PostgreSQL See Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. MySQL See Amazon RDS for MySQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. PostgreSQL See Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Port |
The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections. Constraints: This value must be Default: The same port as the original DB cluster. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group. Example: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DatabaseName |
The database name for the restored DB cluster. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group to use for the restored DB cluster. DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Tags |
The tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. When you don't specify a value for the
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
BacktrackWindow |
The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0. Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters. Default: 0 Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. RDS for MySQL Possible values are RDS for PostgreSQL Possible values are Aurora MySQL Possible values are Aurora PostgreSQL Possible value are For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EngineMode |
The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either For more information, see CreateDBCluster. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
ScalingConfiguration |
For DB clusters in Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used. Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster. When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Valid Values: Default: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible. When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it. When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
If
If
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB cluster. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration |
Reserved for future use. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send
Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
If |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB cluster. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: |
Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time
Description
Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime
for up to BackupRetentionPeriod
days. The target DB cluster is created from the source DB cluster with the same configuration as the original DB cluster, except that the new DB cluster is created with the default DB security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
DBClusterIdentifier,
RestoreType = NULL,
SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
RestoreToTime = NULL,
UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
Port = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
BacktrackWindow = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
EngineMode = NULL,
DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
SourceDbClusterResourceId = NULL,
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The name of the new DB cluster to be created. Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
RestoreType |
The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:
If you don't specify a Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
SourceDBClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore. Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
RestoreToTime |
The date and time to restore the DB cluster to. Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format Constraints:
Example: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
UseLatestRestorableTime |
Specifies whether to restore the DB cluster to the latest restorable backup time. By default, the DB cluster isn't restored to the latest restorable backup time. Constraints: Can't be specified if Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Port |
The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections. Constraints: A value from Default: The default port for the engine. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group for the new DB cluster. DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Tags |
|
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with
a KMS key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source
DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified
by the If you don't specify a value for the
If Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
BacktrackWindow |
The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0. Default: 0 Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. RDS for MySQL Possible values are RDS for PostgreSQL Possible values are Aurora MySQL Possible values are Aurora PostgreSQL Possible value are For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DBClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the custom DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If the Constraints:
Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
ScalingConfiguration |
For DB clusters in Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
EngineMode |
The engine mode of the new cluster. Specify Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
DBClusterInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster. When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Valid Values: Default: Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible. When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it. When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether
If
If
Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance. Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only |
ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration |
|
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB cluster. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only |
SourceDbClusterResourceId |
The resource ID of the source DB cluster from which to restore. |
RdsCustomClusterConfiguration |
Reserved for future use. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring
metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting
Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify If Valid Values: Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send
Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is
If |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you don't specify a value for |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. Valid Values:
Default: If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB cluster. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:
Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters Valid Values:
Default: |
Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot
Description
Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot. The target database is created from the source database restore point with most of the source's original configuration, including the default security group and DB parameter group. By default, the new DB instance is created as a Single-AZ deployment, except when the instance is a SQL Server instance that has an option group associated with mirroring. In this case, the instance becomes a Multi-AZ deployment, not a Single-AZ deployment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot(
DBInstanceIdentifier,
DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
Port = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
DBName = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainFqdn = NULL,
DomainOu = NULL,
DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
DomainDnsIps = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
BackupTarget = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The name of the DB instance to create from the DB snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier for the DB snapshot to restore from. Constraints:
|
DBInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Default: The same DBInstanceClass as the original DB instance. |
Port |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. Default: The same port as the original DB instance Constraints: Value must be |
AvailabilityZone |
The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone. Constraint: You can't specify the Example: |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new instance. Constraints:
Example: |
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Constraint: You can't specify the |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance's VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. For more information, see
|
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether to automatically apply minor version upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window. If you restore an RDS Custom DB instance, you must disable this parameter. |
LicenseModel |
License model information for the restored DB instance. License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
Default: Same as the source. |
DBName |
The name of the database for the restored DB instance. This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle and RDS for SQL Server DB instances. It doesn't apply to the other engines or to RDS Custom DB instances. |
Engine |
The database engine to use for the new instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Default: The same as source Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source. For example, you can restore a MariaDB 10.1 DB instance from a MySQL 5.6 snapshot. Valid Values:
|
Iops |
Specifies the amount of provisioned IOPS for the DB instance, expressed in I/O operations per second. If this parameter isn't specified, the IOPS value is taken from the backup. If this parameter is set to 0, the new instance is converted to a non-PIOPS instance. The conversion takes additional time, though your DB instance is available for connections before the conversion starts. The provisioned IOPS value must follow the requirements for your database engine. For more information, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints: Must be an integer greater than 1000. |
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group to be used for the restored DB instance. Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
Tags |
|
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance. Valid Values: If you specify Default: |
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC. |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. The domain/ must be created prior to this operation. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
DomainFqdn |
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain. Constraints:
Example: |
DomainOu |
The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainAuthSecretArn |
The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainDnsIps |
The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers. Constraints:
Example: |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. In most cases, tags aren't copied by default. However, when you restore a DB instance from a DB snapshot, RDS checks whether you specify new tags. If yes, the new tags are added to the restored DB instance. If there are no new tags, RDS looks for the tags from the source DB instance for the DB snapshot, and then adds those tags to the restored DB instance. For more information, see Copying tags to DB instance snapshots in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping is disabled. For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs for the restored DB instance to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures |
Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you don't specify a value for This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Constraints:
|
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. |
EnableCustomerOwnedIp |
Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance. A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide. |
CustomIamInstanceProfile |
The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting is required for RDS Custom. |
BackupTarget |
Specifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored for the restored DB instance. Possible values are For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
StorageThroughput |
Specifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora. |
DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier for the Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot to restore from. For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ DB cluster deployments in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in CreateDBInstance. This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server. Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth. |
DedicatedLogVolume |
Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB instance. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster. Valid Values:
Default: |
Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files
Description
Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files. You can create a backup of your on-premises database, store it on Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), and then restore the backup file onto a new Amazon RDS DB instance running MySQL. For more information, see Importing Data into an Amazon RDS MySQL DB Instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_from_s3/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_instance_from_s3(
DBName = NULL,
DBInstanceIdentifier,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DBInstanceClass,
Engine,
MasterUsername = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
Port = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
EngineVersion = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
StorageEncrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
MonitoringInterval = NULL,
MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
SourceEngine,
SourceEngineVersion,
S3BucketName,
S3Prefix = NULL,
S3IngestionRoleArn,
DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
DBName |
The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created.
Follow the naming rules specified in
|
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB
instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in
This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server. Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth. |
DBInstanceClass |
[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Importing from Amazon S3 isn't supported on the db.t2.micro DB instance class. |
Engine |
[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance. Valid Values: |
MasterUsername |
The name for the master user. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password for the master user. Constraints:
Length Constraints:
|
DBSecurityGroups |
A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance. Default: The default DB security group for the database engine. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. |
AvailabilityZone |
The Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in. For information about Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region. Example: Constraint: The |
DBSubnetGroupName |
A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance. Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Example: |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you do not specify a value for |
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting
this parameter to a positive number enables backups. For more
information, see |
PreferredBackupWindow |
The time range each day during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
Port |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. Type: Integer Valid Values: Default: |
MultiAZ |
Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. If the DB
instance is a Multi-AZ deployment, you can't set the |
EngineVersion |
The version number of the database engine to use. Choose the latest
minor version of your database engine. For information about engine
versions, see |
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are not applied automatically. |
LicenseModel |
The license model for this DB instance. Use |
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate initially for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default option group for the specified engine is used. |
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance's VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. For more information, see
|
Tags |
A list of tags to associate with this DB instance. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
StorageType |
Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance. Valid Values: If you specify Default: |
StorageEncrypted |
Specifies whether the new DB instance is encrypted or not. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If the |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied. |
MonitoringInterval |
The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. If Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60 Default: |
MonitoringRoleArn |
The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring
metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example,
If |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
SourceEngine |
[required] The name of the engine of your source database. Valid Values: |
SourceEngineVersion |
[required] The version of the database that the backup files were created from. MySQL versions 5.6 and 5.7 are supported. Example: |
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of your Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database backup file. |
S3Prefix |
The prefix of your Amazon S3 bucket. |
S3IngestionRoleArn |
[required] An Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a trust policy and a permissions policy that allows Amazon RDS to access your Amazon S3 bucket. For information about this role, see Creating an IAM role manually in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
DatabaseInsightsMode |
Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance. Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value. |
EnablePerformanceInsights |
Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. If you do not specify a value for |
PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:
For example, the following values are valid:
If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn't a valid value, RDS issues an error. |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. |
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures |
Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features. |
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. |
MaxAllocatedStorage |
The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance. For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. Valid Values:
The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
StorageThroughput |
Specifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora. |
ManageMasterUserPassword |
Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Constraints:
|
MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN. If you don't specify There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region. |
DedicatedLogVolume |
Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB instance. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster. Valid Values:
Default: |
Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time
Description
Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time. You can restore to any point in time before the time identified by the LatestRestorableTime
property. You can restore to a point up to the number of days specified by the BackupRetentionPeriod
property.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time(
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier,
RestoreTime = NULL,
UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
DBInstanceClass = NULL,
Port = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
LicenseModel = NULL,
DBName = NULL,
Engine = NULL,
Iops = NULL,
OptionGroupName = NULL,
CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
StorageType = NULL,
TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
Domain = NULL,
DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
DomainFqdn = NULL,
DomainOu = NULL,
DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
DomainDnsIps = NULL,
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
DeletionProtection = NULL,
SourceDbiResourceId = NULL,
MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
SourceDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL,
EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
BackupTarget = NULL,
NetworkType = NULL,
StorageThroughput = NULL,
AllocatedStorage = NULL,
DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBInstanceIdentifier |
The identifier of the source DB instance from which to restore. Constraints:
|
TargetDBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The name of the new DB instance to create. Constraints:
|
RestoreTime |
The date and time to restore from. Constraints:
Example: |
UseLatestRestorableTime |
Specifies whether the DB instance is restored from the latest backup time. By default, the DB instance isn't restored from the latest backup time. Constraints:
|
DBInstanceClass |
The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Default: The same DB instance class as the original DB instance. |
Port |
The port number on which the database accepts connections. Default: The same port as the original DB instance. Constraints:
|
AvailabilityZone |
The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone. Constraints:
Example: |
DBSubnetGroupName |
The DB subnet group name to use for the new instance. Constraints:
Example: |
MultiAZ |
Secifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Constraints:
|
PubliclyAccessible |
Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible. When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it. When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address. For more information, see
|
AutoMinorVersionUpgrade |
Specifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
LicenseModel |
The license model information for the restored DB instance. License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances. Valid Values:
Default: Same as the source. |
DBName |
The database name for the restored DB instance. This parameter doesn't apply to the following DB instances:
|
Engine |
The database engine to use for the new instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Valid Values:
Default: The same as source Constraints:
|
Iops |
The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to SQL Server. Constraints:
|
OptionGroupName |
The name of the option group to use for the restored DB instance. Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
CopyTagsToSnapshot |
Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied. |
Tags |
|
StorageType |
The storage type to associate with the DB instance. Valid Values: Default: Constraints:
|
TdeCredentialArn |
The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
TdeCredentialPassword |
The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC. |
Domain |
The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. Create the domain before running this command. Currently, you can create only the MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
DomainIAMRoleName |
The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. |
DomainFqdn |
The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain. Constraints:
Example: |
DomainOu |
The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainAuthSecretArn |
The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain. Constraints:
Example:
|
DomainDnsIps |
The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers. Constraints:
Example: |
EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication |
Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
EnableCloudwatchLogsExports |
The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
ProcessorFeatures |
The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
UseDefaultProcessorFeatures |
Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
DBParameterGroupName |
The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you do not specify a value for This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. Constraints:
|
DeletionProtection |
Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance. |
SourceDbiResourceId |
The resource ID of the source DB instance from which to restore. |
MaxAllocatedStorage |
The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance. For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
SourceDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups from
which to restore, for example,
This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. |
EnableCustomerOwnedIp |
Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance. A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom. For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide. |
CustomIamInstanceProfile |
The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:
For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting is required for RDS Custom. |
BackupTarget |
The location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots for the restored DB instance. Valid Values:
Default: For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide. |
NetworkType |
The network type of the DB instance. The network type is determined by the For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide. Valid Values:
|
StorageThroughput |
The storage throughput value for the DB instance. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora. |
AllocatedStorage |
The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB
instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in
This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server. Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth. |
DedicatedLogVolume |
Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance. |
CACertificateIdentifier |
The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate. This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances. For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
EngineLifecycleSupport |
The life cycle type for this DB instance. By default, this value is set to You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster. Valid Values:
Default: |
Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups
Description
Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups. Required parameters for this API are one of CIDRIP, EC2SecurityGroupId for VPC, or (EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_revoke_db_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_revoke_db_security_group_ingress(
DBSecurityGroupName,
CIDRIP = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupId = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
DBSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the DB security group to revoke ingress from. |
CIDRIP |
The IP range to revoke access from. Must be a valid CIDR range. If
|
EC2SecurityGroupName |
The name of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB
security groups, |
EC2SecurityGroupId |
The id of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB
security groups, |
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security
group specified in the |
Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database
Description
Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database. For more information, see Monitoring Amazon Aurora with Database Activity Streams in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or Monitoring Amazon RDS with Database Activity Streams in the Amazon RDS User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_activity_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_start_activity_stream(
ResourceArn,
Mode,
KmsKeyId,
ApplyImmediately = NULL,
EngineNativeAuditFieldsIncluded = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster, for example,
|
Mode |
[required] Specifies the mode of the database activity stream. Database events such as a change or access generate an activity stream event. The database session can handle these events either synchronously or asynchronously. |
KmsKeyId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encrypting messages in the database activity stream. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. |
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database. |
EngineNativeAuditFieldsIncluded |
Specifies whether the database activity stream includes engine-native audit fields. This option applies to an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server DB instance. By default, no engine-native audit fields are included. |
Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the StopDBCluster operation
Description
Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the stop_db_cluster
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the StopDBInstance operation
Description
Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the stop_db_instance
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_start_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The user-supplied instance identifier. |
Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
SourceDBInstanceArn,
BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
PreSignedUrl = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceDBInstanceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for the
replicated automated backups, for example,
|
BackupRetentionPeriod |
The retention period for the replicated automated backups. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of the
replicated automated backups. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name
(ARN) for the KMS encryption key in the destination Amazon Web Services
Region, for example,
|
PreSignedUrl |
In an Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region, an URL that contains a
Signature Version 4 signed request for the
This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions. To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process. If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can
specify |
Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3
Description
Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3. The provided IAM role must have access to the S3 bucket.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_export_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_start_export_task(
ExportTaskIdentifier,
SourceArn,
S3BucketName,
IamRoleArn,
KmsKeyId,
S3Prefix = NULL,
ExportOnly = NULL
)
Arguments
ExportTaskIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the export task. This ID isn't an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the data is to be exported. |
SourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster to export to Amazon S3. |
S3BucketName |
[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot or cluster data to. |
IamRoleArn |
[required] The name of the IAM role to use for writing to the Amazon S3 bucket when exporting a snapshot or cluster. In the IAM policy attached to your IAM role, include the following required actions to allow the transfer of files from Amazon RDS or Amazon Aurora to an S3 bucket:
In the policy, include the resources to identify the S3 bucket and objects in the bucket. The following list of resources shows the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for accessing S3:
|
KmsKeyId |
[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services KMS key to use to encrypt the data exported to Amazon S3. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. The caller of this operation must be authorized to run the following operations. These can be set in the Amazon Web Services KMS key policy:
|
S3Prefix |
The Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported data. |
ExportOnly |
The data to be exported from the snapshot or cluster. If this parameter isn't provided, all of the data is exported. Valid Values:
|
Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream CLI command, or the StartActivityStream operation
Description
Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream
CLI command, or the start_activity_stream
operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_activity_stream/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_stop_activity_stream(ResourceArn, ApplyImmediately = NULL)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster for the database
activity stream. For example,
|
ApplyImmediately |
Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to stop as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database. |
Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
Description
Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster. When you stop a DB cluster, Aurora retains the DB cluster's metadata, including its endpoints and DB parameter groups. Aurora also retains the transaction logs so you can do a point-in-time restore if necessary.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
DBClusterIdentifier |
[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string. |
Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily
Description
Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily. When you stop a DB instance, Amazon RDS retains the DB instance's metadata, including its endpoint, DB parameter group, and option group membership. Amazon RDS also retains the transaction logs so you can do a point-in-time restore if necessary. The instance restarts automatically after 7 days.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_instance/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_stop_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The user-supplied instance identifier. |
DBSnapshotIdentifier |
The user-supplied instance identifier of the DB Snapshot created immediately before the DB instance is stopped. |
Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance
Description
Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(SourceDBInstanceArn)
Arguments
SourceDBInstanceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for which to
stop replicating automate backups, for example,
|
Switches over a blue/green deployment
Description
Switches over a blue/green deployment.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_switchover_blue_green_deployment(
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier,
SwitchoverTimeout = NULL
)
Arguments
BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier |
[required] The resource ID of the blue/green deployment. Constraints:
|
SwitchoverTimeout |
The amount of time, in seconds, for the switchover to complete. Default: 300 If the switchover takes longer than the specified duration, then any changes are rolled back, and no changes are made to the environments. |
Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster
Description
Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster. Switchover operations were previously called "managed planned failovers."
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_switchover_global_cluster(
GlobalClusterIdentifier,
TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
GlobalClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the global database cluster to switch over. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. Constraints:
|
TargetDbClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster to promote to the new primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region. |
Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database
Description
Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database. Issue this command in the Region that hosts the current standby database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_read_replica/ for full documentation.
Usage
rds_switchover_read_replica(DBInstanceIdentifier)
Arguments
DBInstanceIdentifier |
[required] The DB instance identifier of the current standby database. This value is stored as a lowercase string. Constraints:
|
AWS RDS DataService
Description
RDS Data API
Amazon RDS provides an HTTP endpoint to run SQL statements on an Amazon Aurora DB cluster. To run these statements, you use the RDS Data API (Data API).
Data API is available with the following types of Aurora databases:
Aurora PostgreSQL - Serverless v2, provisioned, and Serverless v1
Aurora MySQL - Serverless v2, provisioned, and Serverless v1
For more information about the Data API, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.
Usage
rdsdataservice(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- rdsdataservice( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_execute_statement | Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data |
begin_transaction | Starts a SQL transaction |
commit_transaction | Ends a SQL transaction started with the BeginTransaction operation and commits the changes |
execute_sql | Runs one or more SQL statements |
execute_statement | Runs a SQL statement against a database |
rollback_transaction | Performs a rollback of a transaction |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- rdsdataservice()
svc$batch_execute_statement(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data
Description
Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_batch_execute_statement(
resourceArn,
secretArn,
sql,
database = NULL,
schema = NULL,
parameterSets = NULL,
transactionId = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
secretArn |
[required] The ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret. For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret. |
sql |
[required] The SQL statement to run. Don't include a semicolon (;) at the end of the SQL statement. |
database |
The name of the database. |
schema |
The name of the database schema. Currently, the |
parameterSets |
The parameter set for the batch operation. The SQL statement is executed as many times as the number of parameter sets provided. To execute a SQL statement with no parameters, use one of the following options:
Array parameters are not supported. |
transactionId |
The identifier of a transaction that was started by using the
If the SQL statement is not part of a transaction, don't set this parameter. |
Starts a SQL transaction
Description
Starts a SQL transaction.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_begin_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_begin_transaction(
resourceArn,
secretArn,
database = NULL,
schema = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
secretArn |
[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. |
database |
The name of the database. |
schema |
The name of the database schema. |
Ends a SQL transaction started with the BeginTransaction operation and commits the changes
Description
Ends a SQL transaction started with the begin_transaction
operation and commits the changes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_commit_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_commit_transaction(resourceArn, secretArn, transactionId)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
secretArn |
[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. |
transactionId |
[required] The identifier of the transaction to end and commit. |
Runs one or more SQL statements
Description
Runs one or more SQL statements.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_execute_sql/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_execute_sql(
dbClusterOrInstanceArn,
awsSecretStoreArn,
sqlStatements,
database = NULL,
schema = NULL
)
Arguments
dbClusterOrInstanceArn |
[required] The ARN of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
awsSecretStoreArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret. For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret. |
sqlStatements |
[required] One or more SQL statements to run on the DB cluster. You can separate SQL statements from each other with a semicolon (;). Any valid SQL statement is permitted, including data definition, data manipulation, and commit statements. |
database |
The name of the database. |
schema |
The name of the database schema. |
Runs a SQL statement against a database
Description
Runs a SQL statement against a database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_execute_statement(
resourceArn,
secretArn,
sql,
database = NULL,
schema = NULL,
parameters = NULL,
transactionId = NULL,
includeResultMetadata = NULL,
continueAfterTimeout = NULL,
resultSetOptions = NULL,
formatRecordsAs = NULL
)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
secretArn |
[required] The ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret. For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret. |
sql |
[required] The SQL statement to run. |
database |
The name of the database. |
schema |
The name of the database schema. Currently, the |
parameters |
The parameters for the SQL statement. Array parameters are not supported. |
transactionId |
The identifier of a transaction that was started by using the
If the SQL statement is not part of a transaction, don't set this parameter. |
includeResultMetadata |
A value that indicates whether to include metadata in the results. |
continueAfterTimeout |
A value that indicates whether to continue running the statement after the call times out. By default, the statement stops running when the call times out. For DDL statements, we recommend continuing to run the statement after the call times out. When a DDL statement terminates before it is finished running, it can result in errors and possibly corrupted data structures. |
resultSetOptions |
Options that control how the result set is returned. |
formatRecordsAs |
A value that indicates whether to format the result set as a single JSON
string. This parameter only applies to For usage information about the JSON format for result sets, see Using the Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. |
Performs a rollback of a transaction
Description
Performs a rollback of a transaction. Rolling back a transaction cancels its changes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_rollback_transaction/ for full documentation.
Usage
rdsdataservice_rollback_transaction(resourceArn, secretArn, transactionId)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster. |
secretArn |
[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. |
transactionId |
[required] The identifier of the transaction to roll back. |
Amazon Redshift
Description
Overview
This is an interface reference for Amazon Redshift. It contains documentation for one of the programming or command line interfaces you can use to manage Amazon Redshift clusters. Note that Amazon Redshift is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces may require techniques, such as polling or asynchronous callback handlers, to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a change is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the next maintenance window. For a summary of the Amazon Redshift cluster management interfaces, go to Using the Amazon Redshift Management Interfaces.
Amazon Redshift manages all the work of setting up, operating, and scaling a data warehouse: provisioning capacity, monitoring and backing up the cluster, and applying patches and upgrades to the Amazon Redshift engine. You can focus on using your data to acquire new insights for your business and customers.
If you are a first-time user of Amazon Redshift, we recommend that you begin by reading the Amazon Redshift Getting Started Guide.
If you are a database developer, the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide explains how to design, build, query, and maintain the databases that make up your data warehouse.
Usage
redshift(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- redshift( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
accept_reserved_node_exchange | Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs |
add_partner | Adds a partner integration to a cluster |
associate_data_share_consumer | From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn) |
authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress | Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group |
authorize_data_share | From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities |
authorize_endpoint_access | Grants access to a cluster |
authorize_snapshot_access | Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot |
batch_delete_cluster_snapshots | Deletes a set of cluster snapshots |
batch_modify_cluster_snapshots | Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots |
cancel_resize | Cancels a resize operation for a cluster |
copy_cluster_snapshot | Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot |
create_authentication_profile | Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters |
create_cluster | Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters |
create_cluster_parameter_group | Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group |
create_cluster_security_group | Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group |
create_cluster_snapshot | Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster |
create_cluster_subnet_group | Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group |
create_custom_domain_association | Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster |
create_endpoint_access | Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint |
create_event_subscription | Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription |
create_hsm_client_certificate | Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases |
create_hsm_configuration | Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM) |
create_integration | Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift |
create_redshift_idc_application | Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center |
create_scheduled_action | Creates a scheduled action |
create_snapshot_copy_grant | Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region |
create_snapshot_schedule | Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule |
create_tags | Adds tags to a cluster |
create_usage_limit | Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster |
deauthorize_data_share | From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare |
delete_authentication_profile | Deletes an authentication profile |
delete_cluster | Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created |
delete_cluster_parameter_group | Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group |
delete_cluster_security_group | Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group |
delete_cluster_snapshot | Deletes the specified manual snapshot |
delete_cluster_subnet_group | Deletes the specified cluster subnet group |
delete_custom_domain_association | Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster |
delete_endpoint_access | Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint |
delete_event_subscription | Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription |
delete_hsm_client_certificate | Deletes the specified HSM client certificate |
delete_hsm_configuration | Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration |
delete_integration | Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift |
delete_partner | Deletes a partner integration from a cluster |
delete_redshift_idc_application | Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource |
delete_scheduled_action | Deletes a scheduled action |
delete_snapshot_copy_grant | Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant |
delete_snapshot_schedule | Deletes a snapshot schedule |
delete_tags | Deletes tags from a resource |
delete_usage_limit | Deletes a usage limit from a cluster |
deregister_namespace | Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog |
describe_account_attributes | Returns a list of attributes attached to an account |
describe_authentication_profiles | Describes an authentication profile |
describe_cluster_db_revisions | Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision objects |
describe_cluster_parameter_groups | Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group |
describe_cluster_parameters | Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group |
describe_clusters | Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties |
describe_cluster_security_groups | Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups |
describe_cluster_snapshots | Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots |
describe_cluster_subnet_groups | Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups |
describe_cluster_tracks | Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks |
describe_cluster_versions | Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions |
describe_custom_domain_associations | Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster |
describe_data_shares | Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account |
describe_data_shares_for_consumer | Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier |
describe_data_shares_for_producer | Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier |
describe_default_cluster_parameters | Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family |
describe_endpoint_access | Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint |
describe_endpoint_authorization | Describes an endpoint authorization |
describe_event_categories | Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type |
describe_events | Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days |
describe_event_subscriptions | Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account |
describe_hsm_client_certificates | Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate |
describe_hsm_configurations | Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration |
describe_inbound_integrations | Returns a list of inbound integrations |
describe_integrations | Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift |
describe_logging_status | Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster |
describe_node_configuration_options | Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type |
describe_orderable_cluster_options | Returns a list of orderable cluster options |
describe_partners | Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster |
describe_redshift_idc_applications | Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications |
describe_reserved_node_exchange_status | Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange |
describe_reserved_node_offerings | Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you |
describe_reserved_nodes | Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes |
describe_resize | Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster |
describe_scheduled_actions | Describes properties of scheduled actions |
describe_snapshot_copy_grants | Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region |
describe_snapshot_schedules | Returns a list of snapshot schedules |
describe_storage | Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage |
describe_table_restore_status | Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the RestoreTableFromClusterSnapshot API action |
describe_tags | Returns a list of tags |
describe_usage_limits | Shows usage limits on a cluster |
disable_logging | Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster |
disable_snapshot_copy | Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster |
disassociate_data_share_consumer | From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare |
enable_logging | Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster |
enable_snapshot_copy | Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster |
failover_primary_compute | Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone |
get_cluster_credentials | Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database |
get_cluster_credentials_with_iam | Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database |
get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options | Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange |
get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings | Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node |
get_resource_policy | Get the resource policy for a specified resource |
list_recommendations | List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account |
modify_aqua_configuration | This operation is retired |
modify_authentication_profile | Modifies an authentication profile |
modify_cluster | Modifies the settings for a cluster |
modify_cluster_db_revision | Modifies the database revision of a cluster |
modify_cluster_iam_roles | Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services |
modify_cluster_maintenance | Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster |
modify_cluster_parameter_group | Modifies the parameters of a parameter group |
modify_cluster_snapshot | Modifies the settings for a snapshot |
modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule | Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster |
modify_cluster_subnet_group | Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets |
modify_custom_domain_association | Contains information for changing a custom domain association |
modify_endpoint_access | Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint |
modify_event_subscription | Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription |
modify_integration | Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift |
modify_redshift_idc_application | Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application |
modify_scheduled_action | Modifies a scheduled action |
modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period | Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region |
modify_snapshot_schedule | Modifies a snapshot schedule |
modify_usage_limit | Modifies a usage limit in a cluster |
pause_cluster | Pauses a cluster |
purchase_reserved_node_offering | Allows you to purchase reserved nodes |
put_resource_policy | Updates the resource policy for a specified resource |
reboot_cluster | Reboots a cluster |
register_namespace | Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog |
reject_data_share | From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare |
reset_cluster_parameter_group | Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default" |
resize_cluster | Changes the size of the cluster |
restore_from_cluster_snapshot | Creates a new cluster from a snapshot |
restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot | Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot |
resume_cluster | Resumes a paused cluster |
revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress | Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group |
revoke_endpoint_access | Revokes access to a cluster |
revoke_snapshot_access | Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot |
rotate_encryption_key | Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster |
update_partner_status | Updates the status of a partner integration |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- redshift()
svc$accept_reserved_node_exchange(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs
Description
Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_accept_reserved_node_exchange/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_accept_reserved_node_exchange(
ReservedNodeId,
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeId |
[required] A string representing the node identifier of the DC1 Reserved Node to be exchanged. |
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId |
[required] The unique identifier of the DC2 Reserved Node offering to be used for
the exchange. You can obtain the value for the parameter by calling
|
Adds a partner integration to a cluster
Description
Adds a partner integration to a cluster. This operation authorizes a partner to push status updates for the specified database. To complete the integration, you also set up the integration on the partner website.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_add_partner/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_add_partner(AccountId, ClusterIdentifier, DatabaseName, PartnerName)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster that receives data from the partner. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database that receives data from the partner. |
PartnerName |
[required] The name of the partner that is authorized to send data. |
From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn)
Description
From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn). If you make this association, the consumer can consume the datashare.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_associate_data_share_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_associate_data_share_consumer(
DataShareArn,
AssociateEntireAccount = NULL,
ConsumerArn = NULL,
ConsumerRegion = NULL,
AllowWrites = NULL
)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare that the consumer is to use. |
AssociateEntireAccount |
A value that specifies whether the datashare is associated with the entire account. |
ConsumerArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace associated with the datashare. |
ConsumerRegion |
From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with all existing and future namespaces in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. |
AllowWrites |
If set to true, allows write operations for a datashare. |
Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group
Description
Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group. Depending on whether the application accessing your cluster is running on the Internet or an Amazon EC2 instance, you can authorize inbound access to either a Classless Interdomain Routing (CIDR)/Internet Protocol (IP) range or to an Amazon EC2 security group. You can add as many as 20 ingress rules to an Amazon Redshift security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress(
ClusterSecurityGroupName,
CIDRIP = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the security group to which the ingress rule is added. |
CIDRIP |
The IP range to be added the Amazon Redshift security group. |
EC2SecurityGroupName |
The EC2 security group to be added the Amazon Redshift security group. |
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the security group specified by the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services Access Key ID is not an acceptable value. Example: |
From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities
Description
From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities. To authorize a datashare for a data consumer, the producer account must have the correct access permissions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_data_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_authorize_data_share(
DataShareArn,
ConsumerIdentifier,
AllowWrites = NULL
)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare namespace that producers are to authorize sharing for. |
ConsumerIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the data consumer that is authorized to access the datashare. This identifier is an Amazon Web Services account ID or a keyword, such as ADX. |
AllowWrites |
If set to true, allows write operations for a datashare. |
Grants access to a cluster
Description
Grants access to a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_authorize_endpoint_access(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Account,
VpcIds = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier of the cluster to grant access to. |
Account |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID to grant access to. |
VpcIds |
The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifiers to grant access to. |
Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot
Description
Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_snapshot_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_authorize_snapshot_access(
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotArn = NULL,
SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
AccountWithRestoreAccess
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier of the snapshot the account is authorized to restore. |
SnapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to authorize access to. |
SnapshotClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from.
|
AccountWithRestoreAccess |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account authorized to restore the specified snapshot. To share a snapshot with Amazon Web Services Support, specify amazon-redshift-support. |
Deletes a set of cluster snapshots
Description
Deletes a set of cluster snapshots.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_batch_delete_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_batch_delete_cluster_snapshots(Identifiers)
Arguments
Identifiers |
[required] A list of identifiers for the snapshots that you want to delete. |
Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots
Description
Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_batch_modify_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_batch_modify_cluster_snapshots(
SnapshotIdentifierList,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
Force = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifierList |
[required] A list of snapshot identifiers you want to modify. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If you specify the value -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. The number must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. If you decrease the manual snapshot retention period from its current value, existing manual snapshots that fall outside of the new retention period will return an error. If you want to suppress the errors and delete the snapshots, use the force option. |
Force |
A boolean value indicating whether to override an exception if the retention period has passed. |
Cancels a resize operation for a cluster
Description
Cancels a resize operation for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_cancel_resize/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_cancel_resize(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier for the cluster that you want to cancel a resize operation for. |
Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot
Description
Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot. The source must be an automated snapshot and it must be in the available state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_copy_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_copy_cluster_snapshot(
SourceSnapshotIdentifier,
SourceSnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
TargetSnapshotIdentifier,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier for the source snapshot. Constraints:
|
SourceSnapshotClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster the source snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name. Constraints:
|
TargetSnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier given to the new manual snapshot. Constraints:
|
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. The default value is -1. |
Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters
Description
Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_authentication_profile(
AuthenticationProfileName,
AuthenticationProfileContent
)
Arguments
AuthenticationProfileName |
[required] The name of the authentication profile to be created. |
AuthenticationProfileContent |
[required] The content of the authentication profile in JSON format. The maximum length of the JSON string is determined by a quota for your account. |
Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters
Description
Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_cluster(
DBName = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier,
ClusterType = NULL,
NodeType,
MasterUsername,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
Port = NULL,
ClusterVersion = NULL,
AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
NumberOfNodes = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
Encrypted = NULL,
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
ElasticIp = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
AdditionalInfo = NULL,
IamRoles = NULL,
MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
SnapshotScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL,
DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
LoadSampleData = NULL,
ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
IpAddressType = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL,
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL
)
Arguments
DBName |
The name of the first database to be created when the cluster is created. To create additional databases after the cluster is created, connect to the cluster with a SQL client and use SQL commands to create a database. For more information, go to Create a Database in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide. Default: Constraints:
|
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the cluster. You use this identifier to refer to the cluster for any subsequent cluster operations such as deleting or modifying. The identifier also appears in the Amazon Redshift console. Constraints:
Example: |
ClusterType |
The type of the cluster. When cluster type is specified as
Valid Values: Default: |
NodeType |
[required] The node type to be provisioned for the cluster. For information about node types, go to Working with Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Valid Values: |
MasterUsername |
[required] The user name associated with the admin user account for the cluster that is being created. Constraints:
|
MasterUserPassword |
The password associated with the admin user account for the cluster that is being created. You can't use Constraints:
|
ClusterSecurityGroups |
A list of security groups to be associated with this cluster. Default: The default cluster security group for Amazon Redshift. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster. Default: The default VPC security group is associated with the cluster. |
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
The name of a cluster subnet group to be associated with this cluster. If this parameter is not provided the resulting cluster will be deployed outside virtual private cloud (VPC). |
AvailabilityZone |
The EC2 Availability Zone (AZ) in which you want Amazon Redshift to provision the cluster. For example, if you have several EC2 instances running in a specific Availability Zone, then you might want the cluster to be provisioned in the same zone in order to decrease network latency. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the region that is specified by the endpoint. Example: Constraint: The specified Availability Zone must be in the same region as the current endpoint. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range (in UTC) during which automated cluster maintenance can occur. Format: Default: A 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time per region, occurring on a random day of the week. For more information about the time blocks for each region, see Maintenance Windows in Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
ClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group to be associated with this cluster. Default: The default Amazon Redshift cluster parameter group. For information about the default parameter group, go to Working with Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups Constraints:
|
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value
is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are
disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with
You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days. Default: Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The default number of days to retain a manual snapshot. If the value is -1, the snapshot is retained indefinitely. This setting doesn't change the retention period of existing snapshots. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. |
Port |
The port number on which the cluster accepts incoming connections. The cluster is accessible only via the JDBC and ODBC connection strings. Part of the connection string requires the port on which the cluster will listen for incoming connections. Default: Valid Values:
|
ClusterVersion |
The version of the Amazon Redshift engine software that you want to deploy on the cluster. The version selected runs on all the nodes in the cluster. Constraints: Only version 1.0 is currently available. Example: |
AllowVersionUpgrade |
If When a new major version of the Amazon Redshift engine is released, you can request that the service automatically apply upgrades during the maintenance window to the Amazon Redshift engine that is running on your cluster. Default: |
NumberOfNodes |
The number of compute nodes in the cluster. This parameter is required
when the ClusterType parameter is specified as For information about determining how many nodes you need, go to Working with Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. If you don't specify this parameter, you get a single-node cluster. When requesting a multi-node cluster, you must specify the number of nodes that you want in the cluster. Default: Constraints: Value must be at least 1 and no more than 100. |
PubliclyAccessible |
If Default: false |
Encrypted |
If Default: true |
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM. |
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM. |
ElasticIp |
The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster. Constraints: The cluster must be provisioned in EC2-VPC and publicly-accessible through an Internet gateway. Don't specify the Elastic IP address for a publicly accessible cluster with availability zone relocation turned on. For more information about provisioning clusters in EC2-VPC, go to Supported Platforms to Launch Your Cluster in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
KmsKeyId |
The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that you want to use to encrypt data in the cluster. |
EnhancedVpcRouting |
An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. If this option is Default: false |
AdditionalInfo |
Reserved. |
IamRoles |
A list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services. You must supply the IAM roles in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format. The maximum number of IAM roles that you can associate is subject to a quota. For more information, go to Quotas and limits in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
MaintenanceTrackName |
An optional parameter for the name of the maintenance track for the
cluster. If you don't provide a maintenance track name, the cluster is
assigned to the |
SnapshotScheduleIdentifier |
A unique identifier for the snapshot schedule. |
AvailabilityZoneRelocation |
The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster is created. |
AquaConfigurationStatus |
This parameter is retired. It does not set the AQUA configuration status. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator). |
DefaultIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was created. |
LoadSampleData |
A flag that specifies whether to load sample data once the cluster is created. |
ManageMasterPassword |
If |
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store
the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter
if |
IpAddressType |
The IP address types that the cluster supports. Possible values are
|
MultiAZ |
If true, Amazon Redshift will deploy the cluster in two Availability Zones (AZ). |
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn |
The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application. |
Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group
Description
Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_cluster_parameter_group(
ParameterGroupName,
ParameterGroupFamily,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group. Constraints:
This value is stored as a lower-case string. |
ParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The Amazon Redshift engine version to which the cluster parameter group applies. The cluster engine version determines the set of parameters. To get a list of valid parameter group family names, you can call
|
Description |
[required] A description of the parameter group. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group
Description
Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group. You use security groups to control access to non-VPC clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_cluster_security_group(
ClusterSecurityGroupName,
Description,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name for the security group. Amazon Redshift stores the value as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
Description |
[required] A description for the security group. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster
Description
Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster. The cluster must be in the available
state.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_cluster_snapshot(
SnapshotIdentifier,
ClusterIdentifier,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the snapshot that you are requesting. This identifier must be unique for all snapshots within the Amazon Web Services account. Constraints:
Example: |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier for which you want a snapshot. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. The default value is -1. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group
Description
Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group. You must provide a list of one or more subnets in your existing Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC) when creating Amazon Redshift subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_cluster_subnet_group(
ClusterSubnetGroupName,
Description,
SubnetIds,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name for the subnet group. Amazon Redshift stores the value as a lowercase string. Constraints:
Example: |
Description |
[required] A description for the subnet group. |
SubnetIds |
[required] An array of VPC subnet IDs. A maximum of 20 subnets can be modified in a single request. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster
Description
Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster. Properties include the custom domain name, the cluster the custom domain is associated with, and the certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_custom_domain_association(
CustomDomainName,
CustomDomainCertificateArn,
ClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
CustomDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name for a custom domain association. |
CustomDomainCertificateArn |
[required] The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the custom domain name association. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier that the custom domain is associated with. |
Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_endpoint_access(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ResourceOwner = NULL,
EndpointName,
SubnetGroupName,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier of the cluster to access. |
ResourceOwner |
The Amazon Web Services account ID of the owner of the cluster. This is only required if the cluster is in another Amazon Web Services account. |
EndpointName |
[required] The Redshift-managed VPC endpoint name. An endpoint name must contain 1-30 characters. Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen(-). The first character must be a letter. The name can't contain two consecutive hyphens or end with a hyphen. |
SubnetGroupName |
[required] The subnet group from which Amazon Redshift chooses the subnet to deploy the endpoint. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
The security group that defines the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint. |
Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
Description
Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription. This action requires an ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of an Amazon SNS topic created by either the Amazon Redshift console, the Amazon SNS console, or the Amazon SNS API. To obtain an ARN with Amazon SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn,
SourceType = NULL,
SourceIds = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Severity = NULL,
Enabled = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the event subscription to be created. Constraints:
|
SnsTopicArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic used to transmit the event notifications. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it. |
SourceType |
The type of source that will be generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a cluster, you would set this parameter to cluster. If this value is not specified, events are returned for all Amazon Redshift objects in your Amazon Web Services account. You must specify a source type in order to specify source IDs. Valid values: cluster, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, cluster-snapshot, and scheduled-action. |
SourceIds |
A list of one or more identifiers of Amazon Redshift source objects. All of the objects must be of the same type as was specified in the source type parameter. The event subscription will return only events generated by the specified objects. If not specified, then events are returned for all objects within the source type specified. Example: my-cluster-1, my-cluster-2 Example: my-snapshot-20131010 |
EventCategories |
Specifies the Amazon Redshift event categories to be published by the event notification subscription. Values: configuration, management, monitoring, security, pending |
Severity |
Specifies the Amazon Redshift event severity to be published by the event notification subscription. Values: ERROR, INFO |
Enabled |
A boolean value; set to |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases
Description
Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_hsm_client_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_hsm_client_certificate(
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
[required] The identifier to be assigned to the new HSM client certificate that the cluster will use to connect to the HSM to use the database encryption keys. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM)
Description
Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM). After creating the HSM configuration, you can specify it as a parameter when creating a cluster. The cluster will then store its encryption keys in the HSM.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_hsm_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_hsm_configuration(
HsmConfigurationIdentifier,
Description,
HsmIpAddress,
HsmPartitionName,
HsmPartitionPassword,
HsmServerPublicCertificate,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
[required] The identifier to be assigned to the new Amazon Redshift HSM configuration. |
Description |
[required] A text description of the HSM configuration to be created. |
HsmIpAddress |
[required] The IP address that the Amazon Redshift cluster must use to access the HSM. |
HsmPartitionName |
[required] The name of the partition in the HSM where the Amazon Redshift clusters will store their database encryption keys. |
HsmPartitionPassword |
[required] The password required to access the HSM partition. |
HsmServerPublicCertificate |
[required] The HSMs public certificate file. When using Cloud HSM, the file name is server.pem. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_integration(
SourceArn,
TargetArn,
IntegrationName,
KMSKeyId = NULL,
TagList = NULL,
AdditionalEncryptionContext = NULL,
Description = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database to use as the source for replication. |
TargetArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift data warehouse to use as the target for replication. |
IntegrationName |
[required] The name of the integration. |
KMSKeyId |
An Key Management Service (KMS) key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the integration. If you don't specify an encryption key, the default Amazon Web Services owned key is used. |
TagList |
A list of tags. |
AdditionalEncryptionContext |
An optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional contextual information about the data. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide. You can only include this parameter if you specify the |
Description |
A description of the integration. |
Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center
Description
Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_redshift_idc_application(
IdcInstanceArn,
RedshiftIdcApplicationName,
IdentityNamespace = NULL,
IdcDisplayName,
IamRoleArn,
AuthorizedTokenIssuerList = NULL,
ServiceIntegrations = NULL
)
Arguments
IdcInstanceArn |
[required] The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the IAM Identity Center instance where Amazon Redshift creates a new managed application. |
RedshiftIdcApplicationName |
[required] The name of the Redshift application in IAM Identity Center. |
IdentityNamespace |
The namespace for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It determines which managed application verifies the connection token. |
IdcDisplayName |
[required] The display name for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It appears in the console. |
IamRoleArn |
[required] The IAM role ARN for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It has the required permissions to be assumed and invoke the IDC Identity Center API. |
AuthorizedTokenIssuerList |
The token issuer list for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. |
ServiceIntegrations |
A collection of service integrations for the Redshift IAM Identity Center application. |
Creates a scheduled action
Description
Creates a scheduled action. A scheduled action contains a schedule and an Amazon Redshift API action. For example, you can create a schedule of when to run the resize_cluster
API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_scheduled_action(
ScheduledActionName,
TargetAction,
Schedule,
IamRole,
ScheduledActionDescription = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Enable = NULL
)
Arguments
ScheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action. The name must be unique within an account. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
TargetAction |
[required] A JSON format string of the Amazon Redshift API operation with input parameters. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
Schedule |
[required] The schedule in |
IamRole |
[required] The IAM role to assume to run the target action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
ScheduledActionDescription |
The description of the scheduled action. |
StartTime |
The start time in UTC of the scheduled action. Before this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
EndTime |
The end time in UTC of the scheduled action. After this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
Enable |
If true, the schedule is enabled. If false, the scheduled action does
not trigger. For more information about |
Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region
Description
Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_snapshot_copy_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_snapshot_copy_grant(
SnapshotCopyGrantName,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotCopyGrantName |
[required] The name of the snapshot copy grant. This name must be unique in the region for the Amazon Web Services account. Constraints:
|
KmsKeyId |
The unique identifier of the encrypted symmetric key to which to grant Amazon Redshift permission. If no key is specified, the default key is used. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule
Description
Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_snapshot_schedule(
ScheduleDefinitions = NULL,
ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
ScheduleDescription = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
DryRun = NULL,
NextInvocations = NULL
)
Arguments
ScheduleDefinitions |
The definition of the snapshot schedule. The definition is made up of schedule expressions, for example "cron(30 12 *)" or "rate(12 hours)". |
ScheduleIdentifier |
A unique identifier for a snapshot schedule. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed for the identifier. |
ScheduleDescription |
The description of the snapshot schedule. |
Tags |
An optional set of tags you can use to search for the schedule. |
DryRun |
|
NextInvocations |
Adds tags to a cluster
Description
Adds tags to a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_tags(ResourceName, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to which you want to add the tag or tags.
For example, |
Tags |
[required] One or more name/value pairs to add as tags to the specified resource.
Each tag name is passed in with the parameter |
Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster
Description
Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster. The usage limit is identified by the returned usage limit identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_create_usage_limit(
ClusterIdentifier,
FeatureType,
LimitType,
Amount,
Period = NULL,
BreachAction = NULL,
Tags = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster that you want to limit usage. |
FeatureType |
[required] The Amazon Redshift feature that you want to limit. |
LimitType |
[required] The type of limit. Depending on the feature type, this can be based on a
time duration or data size. If |
Amount |
[required] The limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in minutes. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB). The value must be a positive number. |
Period |
The time period that the amount applies to. A |
BreachAction |
The action that Amazon Redshift takes when the limit is reached. The default is log. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit. |
Tags |
A list of tag instances. |
From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare
Description
From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_deauthorize_data_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_deauthorize_data_share(DataShareArn, ConsumerIdentifier)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
[required] The namespace Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to remove authorization from. |
ConsumerIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the data consumer that is to have authorization removed from the datashare. This identifier is an Amazon Web Services account ID or a keyword, such as ADX. |
Deletes an authentication profile
Description
Deletes an authentication profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_authentication_profile(AuthenticationProfileName)
Arguments
AuthenticationProfileName |
[required] The name of the authentication profile to delete. |
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created
Description
Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created. A successful response from the web service indicates that the request was received correctly. Use describe_clusters
to monitor the status of the deletion. The delete operation cannot be canceled or reverted once submitted. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_cluster(
ClusterIdentifier,
SkipFinalClusterSnapshot = NULL,
FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
FinalClusterSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to be deleted. Constraints:
|
SkipFinalClusterSnapshot |
Determines whether a final snapshot of the cluster is created before
Amazon Redshift deletes the cluster. If The FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter must be specified if
SkipFinalClusterSnapshot is Default: |
FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier of the final snapshot that is to be created immediately
before deleting the cluster. If this parameter is provided,
SkipFinalClusterSnapshot must be Constraints:
|
FinalClusterSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. The default value is -1. |
Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group
Description
Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_cluster_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to be deleted. Constraints:
|
Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group
Description
Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_security_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_cluster_security_group(ClusterSecurityGroupName)
Arguments
ClusterSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster security group to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified manual snapshot
Description
Deletes the specified manual snapshot. The snapshot must be in the available
state, with no other users authorized to access the snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_cluster_snapshot(
SnapshotIdentifier,
SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the manual snapshot to be deleted. Constraints: Must be the name of an existing snapshot that is in the
|
SnapshotClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name. Constraints: Must be the name of valid cluster. |
Deletes the specified cluster subnet group
Description
Deletes the specified cluster subnet group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_cluster_subnet_group(ClusterSubnetGroupName)
Arguments
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster subnet group name to be deleted. |
Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster
Description
Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_custom_domain_association(ClusterIdentifier, CustomDomainName)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to delete a custom domain association for. |
CustomDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name for the custom domain association. |
Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_endpoint_access(EndpointName)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] The Redshift-managed VPC endpoint to delete. |
Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
Description
Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the Amazon Redshift event notification subscription to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified HSM client certificate
Description
Deletes the specified HSM client certificate.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_hsm_client_certificate/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_hsm_client_certificate(HsmClientCertificateIdentifier)
Arguments
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the HSM client certificate to be deleted. |
Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration
Description
Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_hsm_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_hsm_configuration(HsmConfigurationIdentifier)
Arguments
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Redshift HSM configuration to be deleted. |
Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_integration(IntegrationArn)
Arguments
IntegrationArn |
[required] The unique identifier of the integration to delete. |
Deletes a partner integration from a cluster
Description
Deletes a partner integration from a cluster. Data can still flow to the cluster until the integration is deleted at the partner's website.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_partner/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_partner(
AccountId,
ClusterIdentifier,
DatabaseName,
PartnerName
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster that receives data from the partner. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database that receives data from the partner. |
PartnerName |
[required] The name of the partner that is authorized to send data. |
Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application
Description
Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_redshift_idc_application(RedshiftIdcApplicationArn)
Arguments
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn |
[required] The ARN for a deleted Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application. |
Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource
Description
Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_resource_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is deleted. |
Deletes a scheduled action
Description
Deletes a scheduled action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_scheduled_action(ScheduledActionName)
Arguments
ScheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action to delete. |
Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant
Description
Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_snapshot_copy_grant/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_snapshot_copy_grant(SnapshotCopyGrantName)
Arguments
SnapshotCopyGrantName |
[required] The name of the snapshot copy grant to delete. |
Deletes a snapshot schedule
Description
Deletes a snapshot schedule.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_snapshot_schedule(ScheduleIdentifier)
Arguments
ScheduleIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier of the snapshot schedule to delete. |
Deletes tags from a resource
Description
Deletes tags from a resource. You must provide the ARN of the resource from which you want to delete the tag or tags.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_tags(ResourceName, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceName |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) from which you want to remove the tag or
tags. For example, |
TagKeys |
[required] The tag key that you want to delete. |
Deletes a usage limit from a cluster
Description
Deletes a usage limit from a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_delete_usage_limit(UsageLimitId)
Arguments
UsageLimitId |
[required] The identifier of the usage limit to delete. |
Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog
Description
Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_deregister_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_deregister_namespace(NamespaceIdentifier, ConsumerIdentifiers)
Arguments
NamespaceIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster or serverless namespace that you want to deregister. |
ConsumerIdentifiers |
[required] An array containing the ID of the consumer account that you want to deregister the cluster or serverless namespace from. |
Returns a list of attributes attached to an account
Description
Returns a list of attributes attached to an account
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_account_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_account_attributes(AttributeNames = NULL)
Arguments
AttributeNames |
A list of attribute names. |
Describes an authentication profile
Description
Describes an authentication profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_authentication_profiles/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_authentication_profiles(AuthenticationProfileName = NULL)
Arguments
AuthenticationProfileName |
The name of the authentication profile to describe. If not specified then all authentication profiles owned by the account are listed. |
Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision objects
Description
Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_db_revisions/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_db_revisions(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
A unique identifier for a cluster whose |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords
value, a value is returned in the Default: 100 Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point for returning a
set of response records. When the results of a
Constraints: You can specify either the |
Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group
Description
Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group. For each parameter group, the response includes the parameter group name, description, and parameter group family name. You can optionally specify a name to retrieve the description of a specific parameter group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_parameter_groups(
ParameterGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
The name of a specific parameter group for which to return details. By default, details about all parameter groups and the default parameter group are returned. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster
parameter groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with
keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster
parameter groups that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are
tagged with values called |
Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group
Description
Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group. For each parameter the response includes information such as parameter name, description, data type, value, whether the parameter value is modifiable, and so on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_parameters(
ParameterGroupName,
Source = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of a cluster parameter group for which to return details. |
Source |
The parameter types to return. Specify Default: All parameter types returned. Valid Values: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups
Description
Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups. If the name of a security group is specified, the response will contain only information about only that security group.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_security_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_security_groups(
ClusterSecurityGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSecurityGroupName |
The name of a cluster security group for which you are requesting details. You must specify either the Marker parameter or a ClusterSecurityGroupName parameter, but not both. Example: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
Constraints: You must specify either the ClusterSecurityGroupName parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both. |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster
security groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have security groups that are tagged with keys
called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster
security groups that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have security groups that are
tagged with values called |
Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots
Description
Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots. By default, this operation returns information about all snapshots of all clusters that are owned by your Amazon Web Services account. No information is returned for snapshots owned by inactive Amazon Web Services accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_snapshots(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotArn = NULL,
SnapshotType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
OwnerAccount = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL,
ClusterExists = NULL,
SortingEntities = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster which generated the requested snapshots. |
SnapshotIdentifier |
The snapshot identifier of the snapshot about which to return information. |
SnapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to describe cluster snapshots. |
SnapshotType |
The type of snapshots for which you are requesting information. By default, snapshots of all types are returned. Valid Values: |
StartTime |
A value that requests only snapshots created at or after the specified time. The time value is specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: |
EndTime |
A time value that requests only snapshots created at or before the specified time. The time value is specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
OwnerAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Use this field to filter the results to snapshots owned by a particular account. To describe snapshots you own, either specify your Amazon Web Services account, or do not specify the parameter. |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster
snapshots that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have snapshots that are tagged with keys
called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster
snapshots that are associated with the specified tag value or values.
For example, suppose that you have snapshots that are tagged with values
called |
ClusterExists |
A value that indicates whether to return snapshots only for an existing cluster. You can perform table-level restore only by using a snapshot of an existing cluster, that is, a cluster that has not been deleted. Values for this parameter work as follows:
|
SortingEntities |
Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups
Description
Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups. By default, this operation returns information about all cluster subnet groups that are defined in your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_subnet_groups(
ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
The name of the cluster subnet group for which information is requested. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster
subnet groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have subnet groups that are tagged with keys
called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster
subnet groups that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have subnet groups that are tagged
with values called |
Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks
Description
Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_tracks/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_tracks(
MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
MaintenanceTrackName |
The name of the maintenance track. |
MaxRecords |
An integer value for the maximum number of maintenance tracks to return. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions
Description
Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions. You can call this operation even before creating any clusters to learn more about the Amazon Redshift versions. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_versions/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_cluster_versions(
ClusterVersion = NULL,
ClusterParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterVersion |
The specific cluster version to return. Example: |
ClusterParameterGroupFamily |
The name of a specific cluster parameter group family to return details for. Constraints:
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties
Description
Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties. This operation supports pagination. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_clusters(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier of a cluster whose properties you are requesting. This parameter is case sensitive. The default is that all clusters defined for an account are returned. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
Constraints: You can specify either the ClusterIdentifier parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both. |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching clusters
that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose
that you have clusters that are tagged with keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching clusters
that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example,
suppose that you have clusters that are tagged with values called
|
Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster
Description
Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_custom_domain_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_custom_domain_associations(
CustomDomainName = NULL,
CustomDomainCertificateArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
CustomDomainName |
The custom domain name for the custom domain association. |
CustomDomainCertificateArn |
The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the custom domain association. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum records setting for the associated custom domain. |
Marker |
The marker for the custom domain association. |
Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account
Description
Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_data_shares(
DataShareArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the datashare to describe details of. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier
Description
Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares_for_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_data_shares_for_consumer(
ConsumerArn = NULL,
Status = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ConsumerArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace that returns in the list of datashares. |
Status |
An identifier giving the status of a datashare in the consumer cluster. If this field is specified, Amazon Redshift returns the list of datashares that have the specified status. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier
Description
Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares_for_producer/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_data_shares_for_producer(
ProducerArn = NULL,
Status = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ProducerArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the producer namespace that returns in the list of datashares. |
Status |
An identifier giving the status of a datashare in the producer. If this field is specified, Amazon Redshift returns the list of datashares that have the specified status. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family
Description
Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_default_cluster_parameters(
ParameterGroupFamily,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupFamily |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group family. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_endpoint_access(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ResourceOwner = NULL,
EndpointName = NULL,
VpcId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier associated with the described endpoint. |
ResourceOwner |
The Amazon Web Services account ID of the owner of the cluster. |
EndpointName |
The name of the endpoint to be described. |
VpcId |
The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifier with access to the cluster. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Describes an endpoint authorization
Description
Describes an endpoint authorization.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_endpoint_authorization/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_endpoint_authorization(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Account = NULL,
Grantee = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier of the cluster to access. |
Account |
The Amazon Web Services account ID of either the cluster owner (grantor)
or grantee. If |
Grantee |
Indicates whether to check authorization from a grantor or grantee point of view. If true, Amazon Redshift returns endpoint authorizations that you've been granted. If false (default), checks authorization from a grantor point of view. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type
Description
Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type. For a list of the event categories and source types, go to Amazon Redshift Event Notifications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL)
Arguments
SourceType |
The source type, such as cluster or parameter group, to which the described event categories apply. Valid values: cluster, cluster-snapshot, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, and scheduled-action. |
Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account
Description
Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account. If you specify a subscription name, lists the description for that subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_event_subscriptions(
SubscriptionName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
The name of the Amazon Redshift event notification subscription to be described. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a DescribeEventSubscriptions
request exceed the value specified in |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching event
notification subscriptions that are associated with the specified key or
keys. For example, suppose that you have subscriptions that are tagged
with keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching event
notification subscriptions that are associated with the specified tag
value or values. For example, suppose that you have subscriptions that
are tagged with values called |
Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days
Description
Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular cluster, security group, snapshot or parameter group can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the past hour of events are returned.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_events/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_events(
SourceIdentifier = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Duration = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
SourceIdentifier |
The identifier of the event source for which events will be returned. If this parameter is not specified, then all sources are included in the response. Constraints: If SourceIdentifier is supplied, SourceType must also be provided.
|
SourceType |
The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned. Constraints: If SourceType is supplied, SourceIdentifier must also be provided.
|
StartTime |
The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: |
EndTime |
The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page. Example: |
Duration |
The number of minutes prior to the time of the request for which to retrieve events. For example, if the request is sent at 18:00 and you specify a duration of 60, then only events which have occurred after 17:00 will be returned. Default: |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate
Description
Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate. If no certificate ID is specified, returns information about all the HSM certificates owned by your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_hsm_client_certificates/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_hsm_client_certificates(
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
The identifier of a specific HSM client certificate for which you want information. If no identifier is specified, information is returned for all HSM client certificates owned by your Amazon Web Services account. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching HSM client
certificates that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have HSM client certificates that are tagged
with keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching HSM
client certificates that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have HSM client certificates that
are tagged with values called |
Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration
Description
Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration. If no configuration ID is specified, returns information about all the HSM configurations owned by your Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_hsm_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_hsm_configurations(
HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
The identifier of a specific Amazon Redshift HSM configuration to be described. If no identifier is specified, information is returned for all HSM configurations owned by your Amazon Web Services account. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching HSM
configurations that are associated with the specified key or keys. For
example, suppose that you have HSM configurations that are tagged with
keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching HSM
configurations that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have HSM configurations that are
tagged with values called |
Returns a list of inbound integrations
Description
Returns a list of inbound integrations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_inbound_integrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_inbound_integrations(
IntegrationArn = NULL,
TargetArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the inbound integration. |
TargetArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the target of an inbound integration. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift
Description
Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_integrations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_integrations(
IntegrationArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
Filters = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationArn |
The unique identifier of the integration. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Filters |
A filter that specifies one or more resources to return. |
Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
Description
Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_logging_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_logging_status(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster from which to get the logging status. Example: |
Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type
Description
Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_node_configuration_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_node_configuration_options(
ActionType,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotArn = NULL,
OwnerAccount = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ActionType |
[required] The action type to evaluate for possible node configurations. Specify "restore-cluster" to get configuration combinations based on an existing snapshot. Specify "recommend-node-config" to get configuration recommendations based on an existing cluster or snapshot. Specify "resize-cluster" to get configuration combinations for elastic resize based on an existing cluster. |
ClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster to evaluate for possible node configurations. |
SnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier of the snapshot to evaluate for possible node configurations. |
SnapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to describe node configuration. |
OwnerAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Required if you are restoring a snapshot you do not own, optional if you own the snapshot. |
Filters |
A set of name, operator, and value items to filter the results. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 100, maximum 500. |
Returns a list of orderable cluster options
Description
Returns a list of orderable cluster options. Before you create a new cluster you can use this operation to find what options are available, such as the EC2 Availability Zones (AZ) in the specific Amazon Web Services Region that you can specify, and the node types you can request. The node types differ by available storage, memory, CPU and price. With the cost involved you might want to obtain a list of cluster options in the specific region and specify values when creating a cluster. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_orderable_cluster_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_orderable_cluster_options(
ClusterVersion = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterVersion |
The version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified version. Default: All versions. Constraints: Must be one of the version returned from
|
NodeType |
The node type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified node type. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster
Description
Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_partners/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_partners(
AccountId,
ClusterIdentifier,
DatabaseName = NULL,
PartnerName = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster whose partner integration is being described. |
DatabaseName |
The name of the database whose partner integration is being described. If database name is not specified, then all databases in the cluster are described. |
PartnerName |
The name of the partner that is being described. If partner name is not specified, then all partner integrations are described. |
Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications
Description
Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_redshift_idc_applications/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_redshift_idc_applications(
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn |
The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value. |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the command. If the Marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange
Description
Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange. Statuses include such values as in progress and requested.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_node_exchange_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_reserved_node_exchange_status(
ReservedNodeId = NULL,
ReservedNodeExchangeRequestId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeId |
The identifier of the source reserved node in a reserved-node exchange request. |
ReservedNodeExchangeRequestId |
The identifier of the reserved-node exchange request. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you
Description
Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you. These descriptions help you determine which reserve node offering you want to purchase. You then use the unique offering ID in you call to purchase_reserved_node_offering
to reserve one or more nodes for your Amazon Redshift cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_node_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_reserved_node_offerings(
ReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeOfferingId |
The unique identifier for the offering. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes
Description
Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_nodes/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_reserved_nodes(
ReservedNodeId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeId |
Identifier for the node reservation. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster
Description
Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster. If no resize operation has ever been initiated for the specified cluster, a HTTP 404
error is returned. If a resize operation was initiated and completed, the status of the resize remains as SUCCEEDED
until the next resize.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_resize/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_resize(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of a cluster whose resize progress you are requesting. This parameter is case-sensitive. By default, resize operations for all clusters defined for an Amazon Web Services account are returned. |
Describes properties of scheduled actions
Description
Describes properties of scheduled actions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_scheduled_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_scheduled_actions(
ScheduledActionName = NULL,
TargetActionType = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Active = NULL,
Filters = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ScheduledActionName |
The name of the scheduled action to retrieve. |
TargetActionType |
The type of the scheduled actions to retrieve. |
StartTime |
The start time in UTC of the scheduled actions to retrieve. Only active scheduled actions that have invocations after this time are retrieved. |
EndTime |
The end time in UTC of the scheduled action to retrieve. Only active scheduled actions that have invocations before this time are retrieved. |
Active |
If true, retrieve only active scheduled actions. If false, retrieve only disabled scheduled actions. |
Filters |
List of scheduled action filters. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region
Description
Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_snapshot_copy_grants/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_snapshot_copy_grants(
SnapshotCopyGrantName = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotCopyGrantName |
The name of the snapshot copy grant. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a Constraints: You can specify either the SnapshotCopyGrantName parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both. |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching resources
that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose
that you have resources tagged with keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching
resources that are associated with the specified value or values. For
example, suppose that you have resources tagged with values called
|
Returns a list of snapshot schedules
Description
Returns a list of snapshot schedules.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_snapshot_schedules/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_snapshot_schedules(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier for the cluster whose snapshot schedules you want to view. |
ScheduleIdentifier |
A unique identifier for a snapshot schedule. |
TagKeys |
The key value for a snapshot schedule tag. |
TagValues |
The value corresponding to the key of the snapshot schedule tag. |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response
records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response,
you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned
marker value in the |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number or response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage
Description
Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_storage/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_storage()
Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the RestoreTableFromClusterSnapshot API action
Description
Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot
API action. If you don't specify a value for the TableRestoreRequestId
parameter, then describe_table_restore_status
returns the status of all table restore requests ordered by the date and time of the request in ascending order. Otherwise describe_table_restore_status
returns the status of the table specified by TableRestoreRequestId
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_table_restore_status(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
TableRestoreRequestId = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The Amazon Redshift cluster that the table is being restored to. |
TableRestoreRequestId |
The identifier of the table restore request to return status for. If you
don't specify a |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more
records exist than the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns a list of tags
Description
Returns a list of tags. You can return tags from a specific resource by specifying an ARN, or you can return all tags for a given type of resource, such as clusters, snapshots, and so on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_tags/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_tags(
ResourceName = NULL,
ResourceType = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceName |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which you want to describe the tag or
tags. For example, |
ResourceType |
The type of resource with which you want to view tags. Valid resource types are:
For more information about Amazon Redshift resource types and constructing ARNs, go to Specifying Policy Elements: Actions, Effects, Resources, and Principals in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number or response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response
records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response,
you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned
marker value in the |
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching resources
that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose
that you have resources tagged with keys called |
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching
resources that are associated with the specified value or values. For
example, suppose that you have resources tagged with values called
|
Shows usage limits on a cluster
Description
Shows usage limits on a cluster. Results are filtered based on the combination of input usage limit identifier, cluster identifier, and feature type parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_usage_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_describe_usage_limits(
UsageLimitId = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
FeatureType = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL,
TagKeys = NULL,
TagValues = NULL
)
Arguments
UsageLimitId |
The identifier of the usage limit to describe. |
ClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster for which you want to describe usage limits. |
FeatureType |
The feature type for which you want to describe usage limits. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified Default: Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100. |
Marker |
An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set
of response records. When the results of a
|
TagKeys |
A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching usage limit
objects that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example,
suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with keys called
|
TagValues |
A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching usage
limit objects that are associated with the specified tag value or
values. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are
tagged with values called |
Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
Description
Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disable_logging/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_disable_logging(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster on which logging is to be stopped. Example: |
Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster
Description
Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disable_snapshot_copy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_disable_snapshot_copy(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the source cluster that you want to disable copying of snapshots to a destination region. Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that has cross-region snapshot copy enabled. |
From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare
Description
From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disassociate_data_share_consumer/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_disassociate_data_share_consumer(
DataShareArn,
DisassociateEntireAccount = NULL,
ConsumerArn = NULL,
ConsumerRegion = NULL
)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to remove association for. |
DisassociateEntireAccount |
A value that specifies whether association for the datashare is removed from the entire account. |
ConsumerArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace that association for the datashare is removed from. |
ConsumerRegion |
From a datashare consumer account, removes association of a datashare from all the existing and future namespaces in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. |
Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
Description
Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_enable_logging/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_enable_logging(
ClusterIdentifier,
BucketName = NULL,
S3KeyPrefix = NULL,
LogDestinationType = NULL,
LogExports = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster on which logging is to be started. Example: |
BucketName |
The name of an existing S3 bucket where the log files are to be stored. Constraints:
|
S3KeyPrefix |
The prefix applied to the log file names. Valid characters are any letter from any language, any whitespace
character, any numeric character, and the following characters:
underscore ( |
LogDestinationType |
The log destination type. An enum with possible values of |
LogExports |
The collection of exported log types. Possible values are
|
Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster
Description
Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_enable_snapshot_copy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_enable_snapshot_copy(
ClusterIdentifier,
DestinationRegion,
RetentionPeriod = NULL,
SnapshotCopyGrantName = NULL,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the source cluster to copy snapshots from. Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that does not already have cross-region snapshot copy enabled. |
DestinationRegion |
[required] The destination Amazon Web Services Region that you want to copy snapshots to. Constraints: Must be the name of a valid Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference. |
RetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain automated snapshots in the destination region after they are copied from the source region. Default: 7. Constraints: Must be at least 1 and no more than 35. |
SnapshotCopyGrantName |
The name of the snapshot copy grant to use when snapshots of an Amazon Web Services KMS-encrypted cluster are copied to the destination region. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days to retain newly copied snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. |
Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone
Description
Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_failover_primary_compute/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_failover_primary_compute(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which the primary compute unit will be failed over to another Availability Zone. |
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database
Description
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database. The action returns the database user name prefixed with IAM:
if AutoCreate
is False
or IAMA:
if AutoCreate
is True
. You can optionally specify one or more database user groups that the user will join at log on. By default, the temporary credentials expire in 900 seconds. You can optionally specify a duration between 900 seconds (15 minutes) and 3600 seconds (60 minutes). For more information, see Using IAM Authentication to Generate Database User Credentials in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_cluster_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_get_cluster_credentials(
DbUser,
DbName = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
AutoCreate = NULL,
DbGroups = NULL,
CustomDomainName = NULL
)
Arguments
DbUser |
[required] The name of a database user. If a user name matching For more information, see CREATE USER in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide. Constraints:
|
DbName |
The name of a database that Constraints:
|
ClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the cluster that contains the database for which you are requesting credentials. This parameter is case sensitive. |
DurationSeconds |
The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires. Constraint: minimum 900, maximum 3600. Default: 900 |
AutoCreate |
Create a database user with the name specified for the user named in
|
DbGroups |
A list of the names of existing database groups that the user named in
Database group name constraints
|
CustomDomainName |
The custom domain name for the cluster credentials. |
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database
Description
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database. The database user is mapped 1:1 to the source Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity. For more information about IAM identities, see IAM Identities (users, user groups, and roles) in the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management User Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_cluster_credentials_with_iam/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_get_cluster_credentials_with_iam(
DbName = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
DurationSeconds = NULL,
CustomDomainName = NULL
)
Arguments
DbName |
The name of the database for which you are requesting credentials. If
the database name is specified, the IAM policy must allow access to the
resource |
ClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the cluster that contains the database for which you are requesting credentials. |
DurationSeconds |
The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires. Range: 900-3600. Default: 900. |
CustomDomainName |
The custom domain name for the IAM message cluster credentials. |
Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange
Description
Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange. These options include information about the source reserved node and target reserved node offering. Details include the node type, the price, the node count, and the offering type.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options(
ActionType,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ActionType |
[required] The action type of the reserved-node configuration. The action type can be an exchange initiated from either a snapshot or a resize. |
ClusterIdentifier |
The identifier for the cluster that is the source for a reserved-node exchange. |
SnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier for the snapshot that is the source for the reserved-node exchange. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the
number of remaining response records exceeds the specified |
Marker |
An optional pagination token provided by a previous
|
Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node
Description
Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings(
ReservedNodeId,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeId |
[required] A string representing the node identifier for the DC1 Reserved Node to be exchanged. |
MaxRecords |
An integer setting the maximum number of ReservedNodeOfferings to retrieve. |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of ReservedNodeOfferings. |
Get the resource policy for a specified resource
Description
Get the resource policy for a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is fetched. |
List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account
Description
List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_list_recommendations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_list_recommendations(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
NamespaceArn = NULL,
MaxRecords = NULL,
Marker = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The unique identifier of the Amazon Redshift cluster for which the list of Advisor recommendations is returned. If the neither the cluster identifier and the cluster namespace ARN parameters are specified, then recommendations for all clusters in the account are returned. |
NamespaceArn |
The Amazon Redshift cluster namespace Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which the list of Advisor recommendations is returned. If the neither the cluster identifier and the cluster namespace ARN parameters are specified, then recommendations for all clusters in the account are returned. |
MaxRecords |
The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value. |
Marker |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the command. If the Marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
This operation is retired
Description
This operation is retired. Calling this operation does not change AQUA configuration. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator).
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_aqua_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_aqua_configuration(
ClusterIdentifier,
AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to be modified. |
AquaConfigurationStatus |
This parameter is retired. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator). |
Modifies an authentication profile
Description
Modifies an authentication profile.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_authentication_profile(
AuthenticationProfileName,
AuthenticationProfileContent
)
Arguments
AuthenticationProfileName |
[required] The name of the authentication profile to replace. |
AuthenticationProfileContent |
[required] The new content of the authentication profile in JSON format. The maximum length of the JSON string is determined by a quota for your account. |
Modifies the settings for a cluster
Description
Modifies the settings for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster(
ClusterIdentifier,
ClusterType = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
NumberOfNodes = NULL,
ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
MasterUserPassword = NULL,
ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
ClusterVersion = NULL,
AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
NewClusterIdentifier = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
ElasticIp = NULL,
EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
Encrypted = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
Port = NULL,
ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
IpAddressType = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster to be modified. Example: |
ClusterType |
The new cluster type. When you submit your cluster resize request, your existing cluster goes
into a read-only mode. After Amazon Redshift provisions a new cluster
based on your resize requirements, there will be outage for a period
while the old cluster is deleted and your connection is switched to the
new cluster. You can use Valid Values: |
NodeType |
The new node type of the cluster. If you specify a new node type, you must also specify the number of nodes parameter. For more information about resizing clusters, go to Resizing Clusters in Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Valid Values: |
NumberOfNodes |
The new number of nodes of the cluster. If you specify a new number of nodes, you must also specify the node type parameter. For more information about resizing clusters, go to Resizing Clusters in Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Valid Values: Integer greater than |
ClusterSecurityGroups |
A list of cluster security groups to be authorized on this cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Security groups currently associated with the cluster, and not in the list of groups to apply, will be revoked from the cluster. Constraints:
|
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. |
MasterUserPassword |
The new password for the cluster admin user. This change is
asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the
request and the completion of the request, the You can't use Operations never return the password, so this operation provides a way to regain access to the admin user account for a cluster if the password is lost. Default: Uses existing setting. Constraints:
|
ClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the cluster parameter group to apply to this cluster. This
change is applied only after the cluster is rebooted. To reboot a
cluster use Default: Uses existing setting. Constraints: The cluster parameter group must be in the same parameter group family that matches the cluster version. |
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value
is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are
disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with
If you decrease the automated snapshot retention period from its current value, existing automated snapshots that fall outside of the new retention period will be immediately deleted. You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days. Default: Uses existing setting. Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The default for number of days that a newly created manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. This value doesn't retroactively change the retention periods of existing manual snapshots. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. The default value is -1. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, if necessary. If system maintenance is necessary during the window, it may result in an outage. This maintenance window change is made immediately. If the new maintenance window indicates the current time, there must be at least 120 minutes between the current time and end of the window in order to ensure that pending changes are applied. Default: Uses existing setting. Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi, for example Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes. |
ClusterVersion |
The new version number of the Amazon Redshift engine to upgrade to. For major version upgrades, if a non-default cluster parameter group is currently in use, a new cluster parameter group in the cluster parameter group family for the new version must be specified. The new cluster parameter group can be the default for that cluster parameter group family. For more information about parameters and parameter groups, go to Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Example: |
AllowVersionUpgrade |
If Default: |
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM. |
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM. |
NewClusterIdentifier |
The new identifier for the cluster. Constraints:
Example: |
PubliclyAccessible |
If Default: false |
ElasticIp |
The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster. Constraints: The cluster must be provisioned in EC2-VPC and publicly-accessible through an Internet gateway. For more information about provisioning clusters in EC2-VPC, go to Supported Platforms to Launch Your Cluster in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
EnhancedVpcRouting |
An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. If this option is Default: false |
MaintenanceTrackName |
The name for the maintenance track that you want to assign for the
cluster. This name change is asynchronous. The new track name stays in
the |
Encrypted |
Indicates whether the cluster is encrypted. If the value is encrypted
(true) and you provide a value for the If the value is not encrypted (false), then the cluster is decrypted. |
KmsKeyId |
The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that you want to use to encrypt data in the cluster. |
AvailabilityZoneRelocation |
The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster modification is complete. |
AvailabilityZone |
The option to initiate relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster to the target Availability Zone. |
Port |
The option to change the port of an Amazon Redshift cluster. Valid Values:
|
ManageMasterPassword |
If |
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store
the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter
if |
IpAddressType |
The IP address types that the cluster supports. Possible values are
|
MultiAZ |
If true and the cluster is currently only deployed in a single Availability Zone, the cluster will be modified to be deployed in two Availability Zones. |
Modifies the database revision of a cluster
Description
Modifies the database revision of a cluster. The database revision is a unique revision of the database running in a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_db_revision/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_db_revision(ClusterIdentifier, RevisionTarget)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of a cluster whose database revision you want to modify. Example: |
RevisionTarget |
[required] The identifier of the database revision. You can retrieve this value
from the response to the
|
Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services
Description
Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_iam_roles/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_iam_roles(
ClusterIdentifier,
AddIamRoles = NULL,
RemoveIamRoles = NULL,
DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which you want to associate or disassociate IAM roles. |
AddIamRoles |
Zero or more IAM roles to associate with the cluster. The roles must be in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format. |
RemoveIamRoles |
Zero or more IAM roles in ARN format to disassociate from the cluster. |
DefaultIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was last modified. |
Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster
Description
Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_maintenance/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_maintenance(
ClusterIdentifier,
DeferMaintenance = NULL,
DeferMaintenanceIdentifier = NULL,
DeferMaintenanceStartTime = NULL,
DeferMaintenanceEndTime = NULL,
DeferMaintenanceDuration = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the cluster. |
DeferMaintenance |
A boolean indicating whether to enable the deferred maintenance window. |
DeferMaintenanceIdentifier |
A unique identifier for the deferred maintenance window. |
DeferMaintenanceStartTime |
A timestamp indicating the start time for the deferred maintenance window. |
DeferMaintenanceEndTime |
A timestamp indicating end time for the deferred maintenance window. If you specify an end time, you can't specify a duration. |
DeferMaintenanceDuration |
An integer indicating the duration of the maintenance window in days. If you specify a duration, you can't specify an end time. The duration must be 45 days or less. |
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group
Description
Modifies the parameters of a parameter group. For the parameters parameter, it can't contain ASCII characters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, Parameters)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the parameter group to be modified. |
Parameters |
[required] An array of parameters to be modified. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request. For each parameter to be modified, you must supply at least the parameter name and parameter value; other name-value pairs of the parameter are optional. For the workload management (WLM) configuration, you must supply all the name-value pairs in the wlm_json_configuration parameter. |
Modifies the settings for a snapshot
Description
Modifies the settings for a snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot(
SnapshotIdentifier,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
Force = NULL
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the snapshot whose setting you want to modify. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. If the manual snapshot falls outside of the new retention period, you can specify the force option to immediately delete the snapshot. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. |
Force |
A Boolean option to override an exception if the retention period has already passed. |
Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster
Description
Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule(
ClusterIdentifier,
ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
DisassociateSchedule = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] A unique identifier for the cluster whose snapshot schedule you want to modify. |
ScheduleIdentifier |
A unique alphanumeric identifier for the schedule that you want to associate with the cluster. |
DisassociateSchedule |
A boolean to indicate whether to remove the assoiciation between the cluster and the schedule. |
Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets
Description
Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets. The operation replaces the existing list of subnets with the new list of subnets.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_cluster_subnet_group(
ClusterSubnetGroupName,
Description = NULL,
SubnetIds
)
Arguments
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
[required] The name of the subnet group to be modified. |
Description |
A text description of the subnet group to be modified. |
SubnetIds |
[required] An array of VPC subnet IDs. A maximum of 20 subnets can be modified in a single request. |
Contains information for changing a custom domain association
Description
Contains information for changing a custom domain association.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_custom_domain_association(
CustomDomainName,
CustomDomainCertificateArn,
ClusterIdentifier
)
Arguments
CustomDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name for a changed custom domain association. |
CustomDomainCertificateArn |
[required] The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the changed custom domain association. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to change a custom domain association for. |
Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
Description
Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_endpoint_access(EndpointName, VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL)
Arguments
EndpointName |
[required] The endpoint to be modified. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
The complete list of VPC security groups associated with the endpoint after the endpoint is modified. |
Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
Description
Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_event_subscription(
SubscriptionName,
SnsTopicArn = NULL,
SourceType = NULL,
SourceIds = NULL,
EventCategories = NULL,
Severity = NULL,
Enabled = NULL
)
Arguments
SubscriptionName |
[required] The name of the modified Amazon Redshift event notification subscription. |
SnsTopicArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic to be used by the event notification subscription. |
SourceType |
The type of source that will be generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a cluster, you would set this parameter to cluster. If this value is not specified, events are returned for all Amazon Redshift objects in your Amazon Web Services account. You must specify a source type in order to specify source IDs. Valid values: cluster, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, cluster-snapshot, and scheduled-action. |
SourceIds |
A list of one or more identifiers of Amazon Redshift source objects. All of the objects must be of the same type as was specified in the source type parameter. The event subscription will return only events generated by the specified objects. If not specified, then events are returned for all objects within the source type specified. Example: my-cluster-1, my-cluster-2 Example: my-snapshot-20131010 |
EventCategories |
Specifies the Amazon Redshift event categories to be published by the event notification subscription. Values: configuration, management, monitoring, security, pending |
Severity |
Specifies the Amazon Redshift event severity to be published by the event notification subscription. Values: ERROR, INFO |
Enabled |
A Boolean value indicating if the subscription is enabled. |
Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
Description
Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_integration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_integration(
IntegrationArn,
Description = NULL,
IntegrationName = NULL
)
Arguments
IntegrationArn |
[required] The unique identifier of the integration to modify. |
Description |
A new description for the integration. |
IntegrationName |
A new name for the integration. |
Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application
Description
Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_redshift_idc_application(
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn,
IdentityNamespace = NULL,
IamRoleArn = NULL,
IdcDisplayName = NULL,
AuthorizedTokenIssuerList = NULL,
ServiceIntegrations = NULL
)
Arguments
RedshiftIdcApplicationArn |
[required] The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center. |
IdentityNamespace |
The namespace for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It determines which managed application verifies the connection token. |
IamRoleArn |
The IAM role ARN associated with the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It has the required permissions to be assumed and invoke the IDC Identity Center API. |
IdcDisplayName |
The display name for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It appears on the console. |
AuthorizedTokenIssuerList |
The authorized token issuer list for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. |
ServiceIntegrations |
A collection of service integrations associated with the application. |
Modifies a scheduled action
Description
Modifies a scheduled action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_scheduled_action(
ScheduledActionName,
TargetAction = NULL,
Schedule = NULL,
IamRole = NULL,
ScheduledActionDescription = NULL,
StartTime = NULL,
EndTime = NULL,
Enable = NULL
)
Arguments
ScheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action to modify. |
TargetAction |
A modified JSON format of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
Schedule |
A modified schedule in either |
IamRole |
A different IAM role to assume to run the target action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
ScheduledActionDescription |
A modified description of the scheduled action. |
StartTime |
A modified start time of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
EndTime |
A modified end time of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction. |
Enable |
A modified enable flag of the scheduled action. If true, the scheduled action is active. If false, the scheduled action is disabled. |
Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region. By default, this operation only changes the retention period of copied automated snapshots. The retention periods for both new and existing copied automated snapshots are updated with the new retention period. You can set the manual option to change only the retention periods of copied manual snapshots. If you set this option, only newly copied manual snapshots have the new retention period.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period(
ClusterIdentifier,
RetentionPeriod,
Manual = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which you want to change the retention period for either automated or manual snapshots that are copied to a destination Amazon Web Services Region. Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that has cross-region snapshot copy enabled. |
RetentionPeriod |
[required] The number of days to retain automated snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region. By default, this only changes the retention period of copied automated snapshots. If you decrease the retention period for automated snapshots that are copied to a destination Amazon Web Services Region, Amazon Redshift deletes any existing automated snapshots that were copied to the destination Amazon Web Services Region and that fall outside of the new retention period. Constraints: Must be at least 1 and no more than 35 for automated snapshots. If you specify the If you specify the value of -1 newly copied manual snapshots are retained indefinitely. Constraints: The number of days must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653 for manual snapshots. |
Manual |
Indicates whether to apply the snapshot retention period to newly copied manual snapshots instead of automated snapshots. |
Modifies a snapshot schedule
Description
Modifies a snapshot schedule. Any schedule associated with a cluster is modified asynchronously.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_snapshot_schedule(ScheduleIdentifier, ScheduleDefinitions)
Arguments
ScheduleIdentifier |
[required] A unique alphanumeric identifier of the schedule to modify. |
ScheduleDefinitions |
[required] An updated list of schedule definitions. A schedule definition is made up of schedule expressions, for example, "cron(30 12 *)" or "rate(12 hours)". |
Modifies a usage limit in a cluster
Description
Modifies a usage limit in a cluster. You can't modify the feature type or period of a usage limit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_modify_usage_limit(UsageLimitId, Amount = NULL, BreachAction = NULL)
Arguments
UsageLimitId |
[required] The identifier of the usage limit to modify. |
Amount |
The new limit amount. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit. |
BreachAction |
The new action that Amazon Redshift takes when the limit is reached. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit. |
Pauses a cluster
Description
Pauses a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_pause_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_pause_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to be paused. |
Allows you to purchase reserved nodes
Description
Allows you to purchase reserved nodes. Amazon Redshift offers a predefined set of reserved node offerings. You can purchase one or more of the offerings. You can call the describe_reserved_node_offerings
API to obtain the available reserved node offerings. You can call this API by providing a specific reserved node offering and the number of nodes you want to reserve.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_purchase_reserved_node_offering/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_purchase_reserved_node_offering(
ReservedNodeOfferingId,
NodeCount = NULL
)
Arguments
ReservedNodeOfferingId |
[required] The unique identifier of the reserved node offering you want to purchase. |
NodeCount |
The number of reserved nodes that you want to purchase. Default: |
Updates the resource policy for a specified resource
Description
Updates the resource policy for a specified resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_put_resource_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)
Arguments
ResourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is updated. |
Policy |
[required] The content of the resource policy being updated. |
Reboots a cluster
Description
Reboots a cluster. This action is taken as soon as possible. It results in a momentary outage to the cluster, during which the cluster status is set to rebooting
. A cluster event is created when the reboot is completed. Any pending cluster modifications (see modify_cluster
) are applied at this reboot. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reboot_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_reboot_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier. |
Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog
Description
Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_register_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_register_namespace(NamespaceIdentifier, ConsumerIdentifiers)
Arguments
NamespaceIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster or serverless namespace that you want to register. |
ConsumerIdentifiers |
[required] An array containing the ID of the consumer account that you want to register the namespace to. |
From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare
Description
From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reject_data_share/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_reject_data_share(DataShareArn)
Arguments
DataShareArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to reject. |
Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default"
Description
Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default". To reset the entire parameter group specify the ResetAllParameters parameter. For parameter changes to take effect you must reboot any associated clusters.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reset_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_reset_cluster_parameter_group(
ParameterGroupName,
ResetAllParameters = NULL,
Parameters = NULL
)
Arguments
ParameterGroupName |
[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to be reset. |
ResetAllParameters |
If Default: |
Parameters |
An array of names of parameters to be reset. If ResetAllParameters option is not used, then at least one parameter name must be supplied. Constraints: A maximum of 20 parameters can be reset in a single request. |
Changes the size of the cluster
Description
Changes the size of the cluster. You can change the cluster's type, or change the number or type of nodes. The default behavior is to use the elastic resize method. With an elastic resize, your cluster is available for read and write operations more quickly than with the classic resize method.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_resize_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_resize_cluster(
ClusterIdentifier,
ClusterType = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
NumberOfNodes = NULL,
Classic = NULL,
ReservedNodeId = NULL,
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier for the cluster to resize. |
ClusterType |
The new cluster type for the specified cluster. |
NodeType |
The new node type for the nodes you are adding. If not specified, the cluster's current node type is used. |
NumberOfNodes |
The new number of nodes for the cluster. If not specified, the cluster's current number of nodes is used. |
Classic |
A boolean value indicating whether the resize operation is using the
classic resize process. If you don't provide this parameter or set the
value to |
ReservedNodeId |
The identifier of the reserved node. |
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId |
The identifier of the target reserved node offering. |
Creates a new cluster from a snapshot
Description
Creates a new cluster from a snapshot. By default, Amazon Redshift creates the resulting cluster with the same configuration as the original cluster from which the snapshot was created, except that the new cluster is created with the default cluster security and parameter groups. After Amazon Redshift creates the cluster, you can use the modify_cluster
API to associate a different security group and different parameter group with the restored cluster. If you are using a DS node type, you can also choose to change to another DS node type of the same size during restore.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_restore_from_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_restore_from_cluster_snapshot(
ClusterIdentifier,
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotArn = NULL,
SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Port = NULL,
AvailabilityZone = NULL,
AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
OwnerAccount = NULL,
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
ElasticIp = NULL,
ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
NodeType = NULL,
EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
AdditionalInfo = NULL,
IamRoles = NULL,
MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
SnapshotScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
NumberOfNodes = NULL,
AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL,
DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
ReservedNodeId = NULL,
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL,
Encrypted = NULL,
ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
IpAddressType = NULL,
MultiAZ = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster that will be created from restoring the snapshot. Constraints:
|
SnapshotIdentifier |
The name of the snapshot from which to create the new cluster. This
parameter isn't case sensitive. You must specify this parameter or
Example: |
SnapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the
message to restore from a cluster. You must specify this parameter or
|
SnapshotClusterIdentifier |
The name of the cluster the source snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name. |
Port |
The port number on which the cluster accepts connections. Default: The same port as the original cluster. Valid values: For clusters with DC2 nodes, must be within the range
|
AvailabilityZone |
The Amazon EC2 Availability Zone in which to restore the cluster. Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone. Example: |
AllowVersionUpgrade |
If Default: |
ClusterSubnetGroupName |
The name of the subnet group where you want to cluster restored. A snapshot of cluster in VPC can be restored only in VPC. Therefore, you must provide subnet group name where you want the cluster restored. |
PubliclyAccessible |
If Default: false |
OwnerAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Required if you are restoring a snapshot you do not own, optional if you own the snapshot. |
HsmClientCertificateIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM. |
HsmConfigurationIdentifier |
Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM. |
ElasticIp |
The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster. Don't specify the Elastic IP address for a publicly accessible cluster with availability zone relocation turned on. |
ClusterParameterGroupName |
The name of the parameter group to be associated with this cluster. Default: The default Amazon Redshift cluster parameter group. For information about the default parameter group, go to Working with Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups. Constraints:
|
ClusterSecurityGroups |
A list of security groups to be associated with this cluster. Default: The default cluster security group for Amazon Redshift. Cluster security groups only apply to clusters outside of VPCs. |
VpcSecurityGroupIds |
A list of Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster. Default: The default VPC security group is associated with the cluster. VPC security groups only apply to clusters in VPCs. |
PreferredMaintenanceWindow |
The weekly time range (in UTC) during which automated cluster maintenance can occur. Format: Default: The value selected for the cluster from which the snapshot was taken. For more information about the time blocks for each region, see Maintenance Windows in Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window. |
AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value
is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are
disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with
You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days. Default: The value selected for the cluster from which the snapshot was taken. Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35. |
ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
The default number of days to retain a manual snapshot. If the value is -1, the snapshot is retained indefinitely. This setting doesn't change the retention period of existing snapshots. The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653. |
KmsKeyId |
The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that encrypts data in the cluster restored from a shared snapshot. You can also provide the key ID when you restore from an unencrypted snapshot to an encrypted cluster in the same account. Additionally, you can specify a new KMS key ID when you restore from an encrypted snapshot in the same account in order to change it. In that case, the restored cluster is encrypted with the new KMS key ID. |
NodeType |
The node type that the restored cluster will be provisioned with. If you have a DC instance type, you must restore into that same instance type and size. In other words, you can only restore a dc2.large node type into another dc2 type. For more information about node types, see About Clusters and Nodes in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
EnhancedVpcRouting |
An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. If this option is Default: false |
AdditionalInfo |
Reserved. |
IamRoles |
A list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services. You must supply the IAM roles in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format. The maximum number of IAM roles that you can associate is subject to a quota. For more information, go to Quotas and limits in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide. |
MaintenanceTrackName |
The name of the maintenance track for the restored cluster. When you
take a snapshot, the snapshot inherits the |
SnapshotScheduleIdentifier |
A unique identifier for the snapshot schedule. |
NumberOfNodes |
The number of nodes specified when provisioning the restored cluster. |
AvailabilityZoneRelocation |
The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster is restored. |
AquaConfigurationStatus |
This parameter is retired. It does not set the AQUA configuration status. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator). |
DefaultIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was last modified while it was restored from a snapshot. |
ReservedNodeId |
The identifier of the target reserved node offering. |
TargetReservedNodeOfferingId |
The identifier of the target reserved node offering. |
Encrypted |
Enables support for restoring an unencrypted snapshot to a cluster encrypted with Key Management Service (KMS) and a customer managed key. |
ManageMasterPassword |
If |
MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store
the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter
if |
IpAddressType |
The IP address type for the cluster. Possible values are |
MultiAZ |
If true, the snapshot will be restored to a cluster deployed in two Availability Zones. |
Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot
Description
Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot. You must create the new table within the Amazon Redshift cluster that the snapshot was taken from.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot(
ClusterIdentifier,
SnapshotIdentifier,
SourceDatabaseName,
SourceSchemaName = NULL,
SourceTableName,
TargetDatabaseName = NULL,
TargetSchemaName = NULL,
NewTableName,
EnableCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Redshift cluster to restore the table to. |
SnapshotIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the snapshot to restore the table from. This snapshot
must have been created from the Amazon Redshift cluster specified by the
|
SourceDatabaseName |
[required] The name of the source database that contains the table to restore from. |
SourceSchemaName |
The name of the source schema that contains the table to restore from.
If you do not specify a |
SourceTableName |
[required] The name of the source table to restore from. |
TargetDatabaseName |
The name of the database to restore the table to. |
TargetSchemaName |
The name of the schema to restore the table to. |
NewTableName |
[required] The name of the table to create as a result of the current request. |
EnableCaseSensitiveIdentifier |
Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are
case sensitive. If |
Resumes a paused cluster
Description
Resumes a paused cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_resume_cluster/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_resume_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The identifier of the cluster to be resumed. |
Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group
Description
Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group. To add an ingress rule, see authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress
. For information about managing security groups, go to Amazon Redshift Cluster Security Groups in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress(
ClusterSecurityGroupName,
CIDRIP = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterSecurityGroupName |
[required] The name of the security Group from which to revoke the ingress rule. |
CIDRIP |
The IP range for which to revoke access. This range must be a valid
Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) block of IP addresses. If |
EC2SecurityGroupName |
The name of the EC2 Security Group whose access is to be revoked. If
|
EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId |
The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the security
group specified in the Example: |
Revokes access to a cluster
Description
Revokes access to a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_revoke_endpoint_access(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Account = NULL,
VpcIds = NULL,
Force = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster to revoke access from. |
Account |
The Amazon Web Services account ID whose access is to be revoked. |
VpcIds |
The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifiers for which access is to be revoked. |
Force |
Indicates whether to force the revoke action. If true, the Redshift-managed VPC endpoints associated with the endpoint authorization are also deleted. |
Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot
Description
Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot. If the account is currently restoring the snapshot, the restore will run to completion.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_snapshot_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_revoke_snapshot_access(
SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
SnapshotArn = NULL,
SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
AccountWithRestoreAccess
)
Arguments
SnapshotIdentifier |
The identifier of the snapshot that the account can no longer access. |
SnapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to revoke access. |
SnapshotClusterIdentifier |
The identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name. |
AccountWithRestoreAccess |
[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account that can no longer restore the specified snapshot. |
Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster
Description
Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_rotate_encryption_key/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_rotate_encryption_key(ClusterIdentifier)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The unique identifier of the cluster that you want to rotate the encryption keys for. Constraints: Must be the name of valid cluster that has encryption enabled. |
Updates the status of a partner integration
Description
Updates the status of a partner integration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_update_partner_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshift_update_partner_status(
AccountId,
ClusterIdentifier,
DatabaseName,
PartnerName,
Status,
StatusMessage = NULL
)
Arguments
AccountId |
[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster. |
ClusterIdentifier |
[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster whose partner integration status is being updated. |
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database whose partner integration status is being updated. |
PartnerName |
[required] The name of the partner whose integration status is being updated. |
Status |
[required] The value of the updated status. |
StatusMessage |
The status message provided by the partner. |
Redshift Data API Service
Description
You can use the Amazon Redshift Data API to run queries on Amazon Redshift tables. You can run SQL statements, which are committed if the statement succeeds.
For more information about the Amazon Redshift Data API and CLI usage examples, see Using the Amazon Redshift Data API in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- redshiftdataapiservice( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_execute_statement | Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL) |
cancel_statement | Cancels a running query |
describe_statement | Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API |
describe_table | Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster |
execute_statement | Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL) |
get_statement_result | Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format |
get_statement_result_v2 | Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format |
list_databases | List the databases in a cluster |
list_schemas | Lists the schemas in a database |
list_statements | List of SQL statements |
list_tables | List the tables in a database |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- redshiftdataapiservice()
svc$batch_execute_statement(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)
Description
Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL). Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_batch_execute_statement(
ClientToken = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Database = NULL,
DbUser = NULL,
ResultFormat = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
SessionId = NULL,
SessionKeepAliveSeconds = NULL,
Sqls,
StatementName = NULL,
WithEvent = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Database |
The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
ResultFormat |
The data format of the result of the SQL statement. If no format is specified, the default is JSON. |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
SessionId |
The session identifier of the query. |
SessionKeepAliveSeconds |
The number of seconds to keep the session alive after the query finishes. The maximum time a session can keep alive is 24 hours. After 24 hours, the session is forced closed and the query is terminated. |
Sqls |
[required] One or more SQL statements to run. The SQL statements are run as a single transaction. They run serially in the order of the array. Subsequent SQL statements don\'t start until the previous statement in the array completes. If any SQL statement fails, then because they are run as one transaction, all work is rolled back.</p> |
StatementName |
The name of the SQL statements. You can name the SQL statements when you create them to identify the query. |
WithEvent |
A value that indicates whether to send an event to the Amazon EventBridge event bus after the SQL statements run. |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Cancels a running query
Description
Cancels a running query. To be canceled, a query must be running.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_cancel_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_cancel_statement(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the SQL statement to cancel. This value is a
universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data
API. This identifier is returned by |
Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API
Description
Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API. The information includes when the query started, when it finished, the query status, the number of rows returned, and the SQL statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_describe_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_describe_statement(Id)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the SQL statement to describe. This value is a
universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data
API. A suffix indicates the number of the SQL statement. For example,
|
Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster
Description
Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster. The information includes its columns. A token is returned to page through the column list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_describe_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_describe_table(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
Database,
DbUser = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
Schema = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
Table = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
ConnectedDatabase |
A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials. |
Database |
[required] The name of the database that contains the tables to be described. If
|
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tables to return in the response. If more tables
exist than fit in one response, then |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
Schema |
The schema that contains the table. If no schema is specified, then matching tables for all schemas are returned. |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
Table |
The table name. If no table is specified, then all tables for all matching schemas are returned. If no table and no schema is specified, then all tables for all schemas in the database are returned |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)
Description
Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL). This statement must be a single SQL statement. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_execute_statement/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_execute_statement(
ClientToken = NULL,
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Database = NULL,
DbUser = NULL,
Parameters = NULL,
ResultFormat = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
SessionId = NULL,
SessionKeepAliveSeconds = NULL,
Sql,
StatementName = NULL,
WithEvent = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request. |
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Database |
The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
Parameters |
The parameters for the SQL statement. |
ResultFormat |
The data format of the result of the SQL statement. If no format is specified, the default is JSON. |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
SessionId |
The session identifier of the query. |
SessionKeepAliveSeconds |
The number of seconds to keep the session alive after the query finishes. The maximum time a session can keep alive is 24 hours. After 24 hours, the session is forced closed and the query is terminated. |
Sql |
[required] The SQL statement text to run. |
StatementName |
The name of the SQL statement. You can name the SQL statement when you create it to identify the query. |
WithEvent |
A value that indicates whether to send an event to the Amazon EventBridge event bus after the SQL statement runs. |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format
Description
Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format. The execute_statement
or batch_execute_statement
operation that ran the SQL statement must have specified ResultFormat
as JSON
, or let the format default to JSON. A token is returned to page through the statement results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result(Id, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the SQL statement whose results are to be fetched.
This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon
Redshift Data API. A suffix indicates then number of the SQL statement.
For example, |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format
Description
Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format. The execute_statement
or batch_execute_statement
operation that ran the SQL statement must have specified ResultFormat
as CSV
. A token is returned to page through the statement results.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result_v2/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result_v2(Id, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
Id |
[required] The identifier of the SQL statement whose results are to be fetched.
This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon
Redshift Data API. A suffix indicates then number of the SQL statement.
For example, |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
List the databases in a cluster
Description
List the databases in a cluster. A token is returned to page through the database list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_list_databases(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
Database,
DbUser = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Database |
[required] The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of databases to return in the response. If more
databases exist than fit in one response, then |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Lists the schemas in a database
Description
Lists the schemas in a database. A token is returned to page through the schema list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_schemas/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_list_schemas(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
Database,
DbUser = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
SchemaPattern = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
ConnectedDatabase |
A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials. |
Database |
[required] The name of the database that contains the schemas to list. If
|
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of schemas to return in the response. If more schemas
exist than fit in one response, then |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
SchemaPattern |
A pattern to filter results by schema name. Within a schema pattern, "%" means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match any one character. Only schema name entries matching the search pattern are returned. |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
List of SQL statements
Description
List of SQL statements. By default, only finished statements are shown. A token is returned to page through the statement list.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_statements/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_list_statements(
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
RoleLevel = NULL,
StatementName = NULL,
Status = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of SQL statements to return in the response. If more
SQL statements exist than fit in one response, then |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
RoleLevel |
A value that filters which statements to return in the response. If true, all statements run by the caller's IAM role are returned. If false, only statements run by the caller's IAM role in the current IAM session are returned. The default is true. |
StatementName |
The name of the SQL statement specified as input to
|
Status |
The status of the SQL statement to list. Status values are defined as follows:
|
List the tables in a database
Description
List the tables in a database. If neither SchemaPattern
nor TablePattern
are specified, then all tables in the database are returned. A token is returned to page through the table list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftdataapiservice_list_tables(
ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
Database,
DbUser = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
SchemaPattern = NULL,
SecretArn = NULL,
TablePattern = NULL,
WorkgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
ClusterIdentifier |
The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
ConnectedDatabase |
A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials. |
Database |
[required] The name of the database that contains the tables to list. If
|
DbUser |
The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials. |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tables to return in the response. If more tables
exist than fit in one response, then |
NextToken |
A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request. |
SchemaPattern |
A pattern to filter results by schema name. Within a schema pattern, "%"
means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match
any one character. Only schema name entries matching the search pattern
are returned. If |
SecretArn |
The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager. |
TablePattern |
A pattern to filter results by table name. Within a table pattern, "%"
means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match
any one character. Only table name entries matching the search pattern
are returned. If |
WorkgroupName |
The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials. |
Redshift Serverless
Description
This is an interface reference for Amazon Redshift Serverless. It contains documentation for one of the programming or command line interfaces you can use to manage Amazon Redshift Serverless.
Amazon Redshift Serverless automatically provisions data warehouse capacity and intelligently scales the underlying resources based on workload demands. Amazon Redshift Serverless adjusts capacity in seconds to deliver consistently high performance and simplified operations for even the most demanding and volatile workloads. Amazon Redshift Serverless lets you focus on using your data to acquire new insights for your business and customers.
To learn more about Amazon Redshift Serverless, see What is Amazon Redshift Serverless?.
Usage
redshiftserverless(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- redshiftserverless( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot | Converts a recovery point to a snapshot |
create_custom_domain_association | Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless |
create_endpoint_access | Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint |
create_namespace | Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless |
create_scheduled_action | Creates a scheduled action |
create_snapshot | Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace |
create_snapshot_copy_configuration | Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region |
create_usage_limit | Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type |
create_workgroup | Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless |
delete_custom_domain_association | Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless |
delete_endpoint_access | Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint |
delete_namespace | Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless |
delete_resource_policy | Deletes the specified resource policy |
delete_scheduled_action | Deletes a scheduled action |
delete_snapshot | Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless |
delete_snapshot_copy_configuration | Deletes a snapshot copy configuration |
delete_usage_limit | Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless |
delete_workgroup | Deletes a workgroup |
get_credentials | Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless |
get_custom_domain_association | Gets information about a specific custom domain association |
get_endpoint_access | Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint |
get_namespace | Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless |
get_recovery_point | Returns information about a recovery point |
get_resource_policy | Returns a resource policy |
get_scheduled_action | Returns information about a scheduled action |
get_snapshot | Returns information about a specific snapshot |
get_table_restore_status | Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus object |
get_usage_limit | Returns information about a usage limit |
get_workgroup | Returns information about a specific workgroup |
list_custom_domain_associations | Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless |
list_endpoint_access | Returns an array of EndpointAccess objects and relevant information |
list_managed_workgroups | Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account |
list_namespaces | Returns information about a list of specified namespaces |
list_recovery_points | Returns an array of recovery points |
list_scheduled_actions | Returns a list of scheduled actions |
list_snapshot_copy_configurations | Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations |
list_snapshots | Returns a list of snapshots |
list_table_restore_status | Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus objects |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists the tags assigned to a resource |
list_usage_limits | Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless |
list_workgroups | Returns information about a list of specified workgroups |
put_resource_policy | Creates or updates a resource policy |
restore_from_recovery_point | Restore the data from a recovery point |
restore_from_snapshot | Restores a namespace from a snapshot |
restore_table_from_recovery_point | Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance |
restore_table_from_snapshot | Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance |
tag_resource | Assigns one or more tags to a resource |
untag_resource | Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource |
update_custom_domain_association | Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain |
update_endpoint_access | Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint |
update_namespace | Updates a namespace with the specified settings |
update_scheduled_action | Updates a scheduled action |
update_snapshot | Updates a snapshot |
update_snapshot_copy_configuration | Updates a snapshot copy configuration |
update_usage_limit | Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless |
update_workgroup | Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- redshiftserverless()
svc$convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Converts a recovery point to a snapshot
Description
Converts a recovery point to a snapshot. For more information about recovery points and snapshots, see Working with snapshots and recovery points.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot(
recoveryPointId,
retentionPeriod = NULL,
snapshotName,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
recoveryPointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point. |
retentionPeriod |
How long to retain the snapshot. |
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot. |
tags |
An array of Tag objects to associate with the created snapshot. |
Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_custom_domain_association(
customDomainCertificateArn,
customDomainName,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
customDomainCertificateArn |
[required] The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN). |
customDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name to associate with the workgroup. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database. |
Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint
Description
Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_endpoint_access(
endpointName,
ownerAccount = NULL,
subnetIds,
vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
endpointName |
[required] The name of the VPC endpoint. An endpoint name must contain 1-30 characters. Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen(-). The first character must be a letter. The name can't contain two consecutive hyphens or end with a hyphen. |
ownerAccount |
The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup. |
subnetIds |
[required] The unique identifers of subnets from which Amazon Redshift Serverless chooses one to deploy a VPC endpoint. |
vpcSecurityGroupIds |
The unique identifiers of the security group that defines the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup to associate with the VPC endpoint. |
Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_namespace(
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
adminUserPassword = NULL,
adminUsername = NULL,
dbName = NULL,
defaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
iamRoles = NULL,
kmsKeyId = NULL,
logExports = NULL,
manageAdminPassword = NULL,
namespaceName,
redshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store
the namespace's admin credentials secret. You can only use this
parameter if |
adminUserPassword |
The password of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace. You can't use |
adminUsername |
The username of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace. |
dbName |
The name of the first database created in the namespace. |
defaultIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to set as a default in the namespace. |
iamRoles |
A list of IAM roles to associate with the namespace. |
kmsKeyId |
The ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service key used to encrypt your data. |
logExports |
The types of logs the namespace can export. Available export types are
|
manageAdminPassword |
If |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace. |
redshiftIdcApplicationArn |
The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center. |
tags |
A list of tag instances. |
Creates a scheduled action
Description
Creates a scheduled action. A scheduled action contains a schedule and an Amazon Redshift API action. For example, you can create a schedule of when to run the create_snapshot
API operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_scheduled_action(
enabled = NULL,
endTime = NULL,
namespaceName,
roleArn,
schedule,
scheduledActionDescription = NULL,
scheduledActionName,
startTime = NULL,
targetAction
)
Arguments
enabled |
Indicates whether the schedule is enabled. If false, the scheduled
action does not trigger. For more information about |
endTime |
The end time in UTC when the schedule is no longer active. After this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace for which to create a scheduled action. |
roleArn |
[required] The ARN of the IAM role to assume to run the scheduled action. This IAM role must have permission to run the Amazon Redshift Serverless API operation in the scheduled action. This IAM role must allow the Amazon Redshift scheduler to schedule creating snapshots. (Principal scheduler.redshift.amazonaws.com) to assume permissions on your behalf. For more information about the IAM role to use with the Amazon Redshift scheduler, see Using Identity-Based Policies for Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide |
schedule |
[required] The schedule for a one-time (at timestamp format) or recurring (cron format) scheduled action. Schedule invocations must be separated by at least one hour. Times are in UTC.
|
scheduledActionDescription |
The description of the scheduled action. |
scheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action. |
startTime |
The start time in UTC when the schedule is active. Before this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. |
targetAction |
[required] |
Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace
Description
Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace. For more information about snapshots, see Working with snapshots and recovery points.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_snapshot(
namespaceName,
retentionPeriod = NULL,
snapshotName,
tags = NULL
)
Arguments
namespaceName |
[required] The namespace to create a snapshot for. |
retentionPeriod |
How long to retain the created snapshot. |
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot. |
tags |
An array of Tag objects to associate with the snapshot. |
Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region
Description
Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_snapshot_copy_configuration(
destinationKmsKeyId = NULL,
destinationRegion,
namespaceName,
snapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)
Arguments
destinationKmsKeyId |
The KMS key to use to encrypt your snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. |
destinationRegion |
[required] The destination Amazon Web Services Region that you want to copy snapshots to. |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to copy snapshots from. |
snapshotRetentionPeriod |
The retention period of the snapshots that you copy to the destination Amazon Web Services Region. |
Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type
Description
Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type. The usage limit is identified by the returned usage limit identifier.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_usage_limit(
amount,
breachAction = NULL,
period = NULL,
resourceArn,
usageType
)
Arguments
amount |
[required] The limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in Redshift Processing Units (RPU) consumed per hour. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB) of data transferred between Regions in cross-account sharing. The value must be a positive number. |
breachAction |
The action that Amazon Redshift Serverless takes when the limit is reached. The default is log. |
period |
The time period that the amount applies to. A weekly period begins on Sunday. The default is monthly. |
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift Serverless resource to create the usage limit for. |
usageType |
[required] The type of Amazon Redshift Serverless usage to create a usage limit for. |
Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_workgroup/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_create_workgroup(
baseCapacity = NULL,
configParameters = NULL,
enhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
ipAddressType = NULL,
maxCapacity = NULL,
namespaceName,
port = NULL,
pricePerformanceTarget = NULL,
publiclyAccessible = NULL,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
subnetIds = NULL,
tags = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
baseCapacity |
The base data warehouse capacity of the workgroup in Redshift Processing Units (RPUs). |
configParameters |
An array of parameters to set for advanced control over a database. The
options are |
enhancedVpcRouting |
The value that specifies whether to turn on enhanced virtual private cloud (VPC) routing, which forces Amazon Redshift Serverless to route traffic through your VPC instead of over the internet. |
ipAddressType |
The IP address type that the workgroup supports. Possible values are
|
maxCapacity |
The maximum data-warehouse capacity Amazon Redshift Serverless uses to serve queries. The max capacity is specified in RPUs. |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to associate with the workgroup. |
port |
The custom port to use when connecting to a workgroup. Valid port ranges are 5431-5455 and 8191-8215. The default is 5439. |
pricePerformanceTarget |
An object that represents the price performance target settings for the workgroup. |
publiclyAccessible |
A value that specifies whether the workgroup can be accessed from a public network. |
securityGroupIds |
An array of security group IDs to associate with the workgroup. |
subnetIds |
An array of VPC subnet IDs to associate with the workgroup. |
tags |
A array of tag instances. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the created workgroup. |
Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_custom_domain_association(
customDomainName,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
customDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database. |
Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint
Description
Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_endpoint_access(endpointName)
Arguments
endpointName |
[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to delete. |
Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless. Before you delete the namespace, you can create a final snapshot that has all of the data within the namespace.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_namespace(
finalSnapshotName = NULL,
finalSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
namespaceName
)
Arguments
finalSnapshotName |
The name of the snapshot to be created before the namespace is deleted. |
finalSnapshotRetentionPeriod |
How long to retain the final snapshot. |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to delete. |
Deletes the specified resource policy
Description
Deletes the specified resource policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_resource_policy(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the policy to delete. |
Deletes a scheduled action
Description
Deletes a scheduled action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_scheduled_action(scheduledActionName)
Arguments
scheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action to delete. |
Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot(snapshotName)
Arguments
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot to be deleted. |
Deletes a snapshot copy configuration
Description
Deletes a snapshot copy configuration
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot_copy_configuration(
snapshotCopyConfigurationId
)
Arguments
snapshotCopyConfigurationId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot copy configuration to delete. |
Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_usage_limit(usageLimitId)
Arguments
usageLimitId |
[required] The unique identifier of the usage limit to delete. |
Deletes a workgroup
Description
Deletes a workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_workgroup/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_delete_workgroup(workgroupName)
Arguments
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup to be deleted. |
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_credentials/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_credentials(
customDomainName = NULL,
dbName = NULL,
durationSeconds = NULL,
workgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
customDomainName |
The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. The custom domain name or the workgroup name must be included in the request. |
dbName |
The name of the database to get temporary authorization to log on to. Constraints:
|
durationSeconds |
The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires. The minimum is 900 seconds, and the maximum is 3600 seconds. |
workgroupName |
The name of the workgroup associated with the database. |
Gets information about a specific custom domain association
Description
Gets information about a specific custom domain association.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_custom_domain_association(
customDomainName,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
customDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database. |
Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint
Description
Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_endpoint_access(endpointName)
Arguments
endpointName |
[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to return information for. |
Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_namespace(namespaceName)
Arguments
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to retrieve information for. |
Returns information about a recovery point
Description
Returns information about a recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_recovery_point(recoveryPointId)
Arguments
recoveryPointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point to return information for. |
Returns a resource policy
Description
Returns a resource policy.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_resource_policy(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to return. |
Returns information about a scheduled action
Description
Returns information about a scheduled action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_scheduled_action(scheduledActionName)
Arguments
scheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action. |
Returns information about a specific snapshot
Description
Returns information about a specific snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_snapshot(
ownerAccount = NULL,
snapshotArn = NULL,
snapshotName = NULL
)
Arguments
ownerAccount |
The owner Amazon Web Services account of a snapshot shared with another user. |
snapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to return. |
snapshotName |
The name of the snapshot to return. |
Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus object
Description
Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus
object.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_table_restore_status(tableRestoreRequestId)
Arguments
tableRestoreRequestId |
[required] The ID of the
|
Returns information about a usage limit
Description
Returns information about a usage limit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_usage_limit(usageLimitId)
Arguments
usageLimitId |
[required] The unique identifier of the usage limit to return information for. |
Returns information about a specific workgroup
Description
Returns information about a specific workgroup.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_workgroup/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_get_workgroup(workgroupName)
Arguments
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup to return information for. |
Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_custom_domain_associations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_custom_domain_associations(
customDomainCertificateArn = NULL,
customDomainName = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
customDomainCertificateArn |
The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN). |
customDomainName |
The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. |
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
nextToken |
When |
Returns an array of EndpointAccess objects and relevant information
Description
Returns an array of EndpointAccess
objects and relevant information.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_endpoint_access(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
ownerAccount = NULL,
vpcId = NULL,
workgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
ownerAccount |
The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup. |
vpcId |
The unique identifier of the virtual private cloud with access to Amazon Redshift Serverless. |
workgroupName |
The name of the workgroup associated with the VPC endpoint to return. |
Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account
Description
Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_managed_workgroups/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_managed_workgroups(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
sourceArn = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results. |
nextToken |
If your initial ListManagedWorkgroups operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following ListManagedWorkgroups operations, which returns results in the next page. |
sourceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the managed workgroup in the AWS Glue Data Catalog. |
Returns information about a list of specified namespaces
Description
Returns information about a list of specified namespaces.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_namespaces/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_namespaces(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
nextToken |
If your initial |
Returns an array of recovery points
Description
Returns an array of recovery points.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_recovery_points/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_recovery_points(
endTime = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
namespaceArn = NULL,
namespaceName = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
startTime = NULL
)
Arguments
endTime |
The time when creation of the recovery point finished. |
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
namespaceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the namespace from which to list recovery points. |
namespaceName |
The name of the namespace to list recovery points for. |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
startTime |
The time when the recovery point's creation was initiated. |
Returns a list of scheduled actions
Description
Returns a list of scheduled actions. You can use the flags to filter the list of returned scheduled actions.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_scheduled_actions/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_scheduled_actions(
maxResults = NULL,
namespaceName = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. Use |
namespaceName |
The name of namespace associated with the scheduled action to retrieve. |
nextToken |
If |
Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations
Description
Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_snapshot_copy_configurations/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_snapshot_copy_configurations(
maxResults = NULL,
namespaceName = NULL,
nextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
namespaceName |
The namespace from which to list all snapshot copy configurations. |
nextToken |
If |
Returns a list of snapshots
Description
Returns a list of snapshots.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_snapshots/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_snapshots(
endTime = NULL,
maxResults = NULL,
namespaceArn = NULL,
namespaceName = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
ownerAccount = NULL,
startTime = NULL
)
Arguments
endTime |
The timestamp showing when the snapshot creation finished. |
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
namespaceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the namespace from which to list all snapshots. |
namespaceName |
The namespace from which to list all snapshots. |
nextToken |
If |
ownerAccount |
The owner Amazon Web Services account of the snapshot. |
startTime |
The time when the creation of the snapshot was initiated. |
Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus objects
Description
Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus
objects.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_table_restore_status(
maxResults = NULL,
namespaceName = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
workgroupName = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results. |
namespaceName |
The namespace from which to list all of the statuses of
|
nextToken |
If your initial
|
workgroupName |
The workgroup from which to list all of the statuses of
|
Lists the tags assigned to a resource
Description
Lists the tags assigned to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to list tags for. |
Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_usage_limits/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_usage_limits(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
resourceArn = NULL,
usageType = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
nextToken |
If your initial
|
resourceArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the resource whose usage limits you want to list. |
usageType |
The Amazon Redshift Serverless feature whose limits you want to see. |
Returns information about a list of specified workgroups
Description
Returns information about a list of specified workgroups.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_workgroups/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_list_workgroups(
maxResults = NULL,
nextToken = NULL,
ownerAccount = NULL
)
Arguments
maxResults |
An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to
return. You can use |
nextToken |
If your initial ListWorkgroups operation returns a |
ownerAccount |
The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup. |
Creates or updates a resource policy
Description
Creates or updates a resource policy. Currently, you can use policies to share snapshots across Amazon Web Services accounts.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_put_resource_policy(policy, resourceArn)
Arguments
policy |
[required] The policy to create or update. For example, the following policy grants a user authorization to restore a snapshot.
|
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the account to create or update a resource policy for. |
Restore the data from a recovery point
Description
Restore the data from a recovery point.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_from_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_restore_from_recovery_point(
namespaceName,
recoveryPointId,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to restore data into. |
recoveryPointId |
[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point to restore from. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup used to restore data. |
Restores a namespace from a snapshot
Description
Restores a namespace from a snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_restore_from_snapshot(
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
manageAdminPassword = NULL,
namespaceName,
ownerAccount = NULL,
snapshotArn = NULL,
snapshotName = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the namespace's admin credentials secret. |
manageAdminPassword |
If |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to restore the snapshot to. |
ownerAccount |
The Amazon Web Services account that owns the snapshot. |
snapshotArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to restore from. Required
if restoring from Amazon Redshift Serverless to a provisioned cluster.
Must not be specified at the same time as The format of the ARN is arn:aws:redshift:\<region\>:\<account_id\>:snapshot:\<cluster_identifier\>/\<snapshot_identifier\>. |
snapshotName |
The name of the snapshot to restore from. Must not be specified at the
same time as |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup used to restore the snapshot. |
Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance
Description
Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance. You can't use this operation to restore tables with interleaved sort keys.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_recovery_point/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_recovery_point(
activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL,
namespaceName,
newTableName,
recoveryPointId,
sourceDatabaseName,
sourceSchemaName = NULL,
sourceTableName,
targetDatabaseName = NULL,
targetSchemaName = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier |
Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are case sensitive. If true, the names are case sensitive. If false, the names are not case sensitive. The default is false. |
namespaceName |
[required] Namespace of the recovery point to restore from. |
newTableName |
[required] The name of the table to create from the restore operation. |
recoveryPointId |
[required] The ID of the recovery point to restore the table from. |
sourceDatabaseName |
[required] The name of the source database that contains the table being restored. |
sourceSchemaName |
The name of the source schema that contains the table being restored. |
sourceTableName |
[required] The name of the source table being restored. |
targetDatabaseName |
The name of the database to restore the table to. |
targetSchemaName |
The name of the schema to restore the table to. |
workgroupName |
[required] The workgroup to restore the table to. |
Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance
Description
Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance. You can't use this operation to restore tables with interleaved sort keys.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_snapshot(
activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL,
namespaceName,
newTableName,
snapshotName,
sourceDatabaseName,
sourceSchemaName = NULL,
sourceTableName,
targetDatabaseName = NULL,
targetSchemaName = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier |
Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are case sensitive. If true, the names are case sensitive. If false, the names are not case sensitive. The default is false. |
namespaceName |
[required] The namespace of the snapshot to restore from. |
newTableName |
[required] The name of the table to create from the restore operation. |
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot to restore the table from. |
sourceDatabaseName |
[required] The name of the source database that contains the table being restored. |
sourceSchemaName |
The name of the source schema that contains the table being restored. |
sourceTableName |
[required] The name of the source table being restored. |
targetDatabaseName |
The name of the database to restore the table to. |
targetSchemaName |
The name of the schema to restore the table to. |
workgroupName |
[required] The workgroup to restore the table to. |
Assigns one or more tags to a resource
Description
Assigns one or more tags to a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to tag. |
tags |
[required] The map of the key-value pairs used to tag the resource. |
Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource
Description
Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)
Arguments
resourceArn |
[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to remove tags from. |
tagKeys |
[required] The tag or set of tags to remove from the resource. |
Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain
Description
Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_custom_domain_association(
customDomainCertificateArn,
customDomainName,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
customDomainCertificateArn |
[required] The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN). This is optional. |
customDomainName |
[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database. |
Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint
Description
Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_endpoint_access(
endpointName,
vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)
Arguments
endpointName |
[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to update. |
vpcSecurityGroupIds |
The list of VPC security groups associated with the endpoint after the endpoint is modified. |
Updates a namespace with the specified settings
Description
Updates a namespace with the specified settings. Unless required, you can't update multiple parameters in one request. For example, you must specify both adminUsername
and adminUserPassword
to update either field, but you can't update both kmsKeyId
and logExports
in a single request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_namespace/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_namespace(
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
adminUserPassword = NULL,
adminUsername = NULL,
defaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
iamRoles = NULL,
kmsKeyId = NULL,
logExports = NULL,
manageAdminPassword = NULL,
namespaceName
)
Arguments
adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId |
The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store
the namespace's admin credentials secret. You can only use this
parameter if |
adminUserPassword |
The password of the administrator for the first database created in the
namespace. This parameter must be updated together with You can't use |
adminUsername |
The username of the administrator for the first database created in the
namespace. This parameter must be updated together with
|
defaultIamRoleArn |
The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to set as a default in
the namespace. This parameter must be updated together with |
iamRoles |
A list of IAM roles to associate with the namespace. This parameter must
be updated together with |
kmsKeyId |
The ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service key used to encrypt your data. |
logExports |
The types of logs the namespace can export. The export types are
|
manageAdminPassword |
If |
namespaceName |
[required] The name of the namespace to update. You can't update the name of a namespace once it is created. |
Updates a scheduled action
Description
Updates a scheduled action.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_scheduled_action(
enabled = NULL,
endTime = NULL,
roleArn = NULL,
schedule = NULL,
scheduledActionDescription = NULL,
scheduledActionName,
startTime = NULL,
targetAction = NULL
)
Arguments
enabled |
Specifies whether to enable the scheduled action. |
endTime |
The end time in UTC of the scheduled action to update. |
roleArn |
The ARN of the IAM role to assume to run the scheduled action. This IAM role must have permission to run the Amazon Redshift Serverless API operation in the scheduled action. This IAM role must allow the Amazon Redshift scheduler to schedule creating snapshots (Principal scheduler.redshift.amazonaws.com) to assume permissions on your behalf. For more information about the IAM role to use with the Amazon Redshift scheduler, see Using Identity-Based Policies for Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide |
schedule |
The schedule for a one-time (at timestamp format) or recurring (cron format) scheduled action. Schedule invocations must be separated by at least one hour. Times are in UTC.
|
scheduledActionDescription |
The descripion of the scheduled action to update to. |
scheduledActionName |
[required] The name of the scheduled action to update to. |
startTime |
The start time in UTC of the scheduled action to update to. |
targetAction |
Updates a snapshot
Description
Updates a snapshot.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_snapshot/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_snapshot(retentionPeriod = NULL, snapshotName)
Arguments
retentionPeriod |
The new retention period of the snapshot. |
snapshotName |
[required] The name of the snapshot. |
Updates a snapshot copy configuration
Description
Updates a snapshot copy configuration.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_snapshot_copy_configuration(
snapshotCopyConfigurationId,
snapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)
Arguments
snapshotCopyConfigurationId |
[required] The ID of the snapshot copy configuration to update. |
snapshotRetentionPeriod |
The new retention period of how long to keep a snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. |
Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless
Description
Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless. You can't update the usage type or period of a usage limit.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_usage_limit/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_usage_limit(
amount = NULL,
breachAction = NULL,
usageLimitId
)
Arguments
amount |
The new limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in Redshift Processing Units (RPU) consumed per hour. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB) of data transferred between Regions in cross-account sharing. The value must be a positive number. |
breachAction |
The new action that Amazon Redshift Serverless takes when the limit is reached. |
usageLimitId |
[required] The identifier of the usage limit to update. |
Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings
Description
Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings. You can't update multiple parameters in one request. For example, you can update baseCapacity
or port
in a single request, but you can't update both in the same request.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_workgroup/ for full documentation.
Usage
redshiftserverless_update_workgroup(
baseCapacity = NULL,
configParameters = NULL,
enhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
ipAddressType = NULL,
maxCapacity = NULL,
port = NULL,
pricePerformanceTarget = NULL,
publiclyAccessible = NULL,
securityGroupIds = NULL,
subnetIds = NULL,
workgroupName
)
Arguments
baseCapacity |
The new base data warehouse capacity in Redshift Processing Units (RPUs). |
configParameters |
An array of parameters to set for advanced control over a database. The
options are |
enhancedVpcRouting |
The value that specifies whether to turn on enhanced virtual private cloud (VPC) routing, which forces Amazon Redshift Serverless to route traffic through your VPC. |
ipAddressType |
The IP address type that the workgroup supports. Possible values are
|
maxCapacity |
The maximum data-warehouse capacity Amazon Redshift Serverless uses to serve queries. The max capacity is specified in RPUs. |
port |
The custom port to use when connecting to a workgroup. Valid port ranges are 5431-5455 and 8191-8215. The default is 5439. |
pricePerformanceTarget |
An object that represents the price performance target settings for the workgroup. |
publiclyAccessible |
A value that specifies whether the workgroup can be accessible from a public network. |
securityGroupIds |
An array of security group IDs to associate with the workgroup. |
subnetIds |
An array of VPC subnet IDs to associate with the workgroup. |
workgroupName |
[required] The name of the workgroup to update. You can't update the name of a workgroup once it is created. |
Objects exported from other packages
Description
These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.
- paws.common
config
,credentials
,creds
,list_paginators
,paginate
,paginate_lapply
,paginate_sapply
,paws_stream_parser
Amazon SimpleDB
Description
Amazon SimpleDB is a web service providing the core database functions of data indexing and querying in the cloud. By offloading the time and effort associated with building and operating a web-scale database, SimpleDB provides developers the freedom to focus on application development.
A traditional, clustered relational database requires a sizable upfront capital outlay, is complex to design, and often requires extensive and repetitive database administration. Amazon SimpleDB is dramatically simpler, requiring no schema, automatically indexing your data and providing a simple API for storage and access. This approach eliminates the administrative burden of data modeling, index maintenance, and performance tuning. Developers gain access to this functionality within Amazon's proven computing environment, are able to scale instantly, and pay only for what they use.
Visit http://aws.amazon.com/simpledb/ for more information.
Usage
simpledb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- simpledb( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
batch_delete_attributes | Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies |
batch_put_attributes | The BatchPutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items |
create_domain | The CreateDomain operation creates a new domain |
delete_attributes | Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item |
delete_domain | The DeleteDomain operation deletes a domain |
domain_metadata | Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values |
get_attributes | Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item |
list_domains | The ListDomains operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID |
put_attributes | The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item |
select | The Select operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames that match the select expression |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- simpledb()
svc$batch_delete_attributes(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies
Description
Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies. This enables Amazon SimpleDB to optimize requests, which generally yields better throughput.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_batch_delete_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_batch_delete_attributes(DomainName, Items)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain in which the attributes are being deleted. |
Items |
[required] A list of items on which to perform the operation. |
The BatchPutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items
Description
The batch_put_attributes
operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items. By using this operation, the client can perform multiple PutAttribute operation with a single call. This helps yield savings in round trips and latencies, enabling Amazon SimpleDB to optimize requests and generally produce better throughput.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_batch_put_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_batch_put_attributes(DomainName, Items)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain in which the attributes are being stored. |
Items |
[required] A list of items on which to perform the operation. |
The CreateDomain operation creates a new domain
Description
The create_domain
operation creates a new domain. The domain name should be unique among the domains associated with the Access Key ID provided in the request. The create_domain
operation may take 10 or more seconds to complete.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_create_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_create_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to create. The name can range between 3 and 255 characters and can contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_', '-', and '.'. |
Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item
Description
Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item. If all attributes of the item are deleted, the item is deleted.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_delete_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_delete_attributes(
DomainName,
ItemName,
Attributes = NULL,
Expected = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation. |
ItemName |
[required] The name of the item. Similar to rows on a spreadsheet, items represent individual objects that contain one or more value-attribute pairs. |
Attributes |
A list of Attributes. Similar to columns on a spreadsheet, attributes represent categories of data that can be assigned to items. |
Expected |
The update condition which, if specified, determines whether the specified attributes will be deleted or not. The update condition must be satisfied in order for this request to be processed and the attributes to be deleted. |
The DeleteDomain operation deletes a domain
Description
The delete_domain
operation deletes a domain. Any items (and their attributes) in the domain are deleted as well. The delete_domain
operation might take 10 or more seconds to complete.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_delete_domain/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_delete_domain(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain to delete. |
Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values
Description
Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_domain_metadata/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_domain_metadata(DomainName)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain for which to display the metadata of. |
Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item
Description
Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item. Optionally, the attributes returned can be limited to one or more attributes by specifying an attribute name parameter.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_get_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_get_attributes(
DomainName,
ItemName,
AttributeNames = NULL,
ConsistentRead = NULL
)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation. |
ItemName |
[required] The name of the item. |
AttributeNames |
The names of the attributes. |
ConsistentRead |
Determines whether or not strong consistency should be enforced when
data is read from SimpleDB. If |
The ListDomains operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID
Description
The list_domains
operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID. It returns domain names up to the limit set by MaxNumberOfDomains. A NextToken is returned if there are more than MaxNumberOfDomains
domains. Calling list_domains
successive times with the NextToken
provided by the operation returns up to MaxNumberOfDomains
more domain names with each successive operation call.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_list_domains/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_list_domains(MaxNumberOfDomains = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxNumberOfDomains |
The maximum number of domain names you want returned. The range is 1 to 100. The default setting is 100. |
NextToken |
A string informing Amazon SimpleDB where to start the next list of domain names. |
The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item
Description
The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item. The client may specify new attributes using a combination of the Attribute.X.Name
and Attribute.X.Value
parameters. The client specifies the first attribute by the parameters Attribute.0.Name
and Attribute.0.Value
, the second attribute by the parameters Attribute.1.Name
and Attribute.1.Value
, and so on.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_put_attributes/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_put_attributes(DomainName, ItemName, Attributes, Expected = NULL)
Arguments
DomainName |
[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation. |
ItemName |
[required] The name of the item. |
Attributes |
[required] The list of attributes. |
Expected |
The update condition which, if specified, determines whether the specified attributes will be updated or not. The update condition must be satisfied in order for this request to be processed and the attributes to be updated. |
The Select operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames that match the select expression
Description
The select
operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames
that match the select expression. select
is similar to the standard SQL SELECT statement.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_select/ for full documentation.
Usage
simpledb_select(SelectExpression, NextToken = NULL, ConsistentRead = NULL)
Arguments
SelectExpression |
[required] The expression used to query the domain. |
NextToken |
A string informing Amazon SimpleDB where to start the next list of
|
ConsistentRead |
Determines whether or not strong consistency should be enforced when
data is read from SimpleDB. If |
Amazon Timestream Query
Description
Amazon Timestream Query
Usage
timestreamquery(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- timestreamquery( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
cancel_query | Cancels a query that has been issued |
create_scheduled_query | Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule |
delete_scheduled_query | Deletes a given scheduled query |
describe_account_settings | Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload |
describe_endpoints | DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against |
describe_scheduled_query | Provides detailed information about a scheduled query |
execute_scheduled_query | You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually |
list_scheduled_queries | Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region |
list_tags_for_resource | List all tags on a Timestream query resource |
prepare_query | A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running |
query | Query is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data |
tag_resource | Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource |
untag_resource | Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource |
update_account_settings | Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured |
update_scheduled_query | Update a scheduled query |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- timestreamquery()
svc$cancel_query(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Cancels a query that has been issued
Description
Cancels a query that has been issued. Cancellation is provided only if the query has not completed running before the cancellation request was issued. Because cancellation is an idempotent operation, subsequent cancellation requests will return a CancellationMessage
, indicating that the query has already been canceled. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_cancel_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_cancel_query(QueryId)
Arguments
QueryId |
[required] The ID of the query that needs to be cancelled. |
Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule
Description
Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule. Timestream assumes the execution role provided as part of the ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn
parameter to run the query. You can use the NotificationConfiguration
parameter to configure notification for your scheduled query operations.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_create_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_create_scheduled_query(
Name,
QueryString,
ScheduleConfiguration,
NotificationConfiguration,
TargetConfiguration = NULL,
ClientToken = NULL,
ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn,
Tags = NULL,
KmsKeyId = NULL,
ErrorReportConfiguration
)
Arguments
Name |
[required] Name of the scheduled query. |
QueryString |
[required] The query string to run. Parameter names can be specified in the query
string The timestamp calculated according to the ScheduleConfiguration
parameter, will be the value of |
ScheduleConfiguration |
[required] The schedule configuration for the query. |
NotificationConfiguration |
[required] Notification configuration for the scheduled query. A notification is sent by Timestream when a query run finishes, when the state is updated or when you delete it. |
TargetConfiguration |
Configuration used for writing the result of a query. |
ClientToken |
Using a ClientToken makes the call to CreateScheduledQuery idempotent, in other words, making the same request repeatedly will produce the same result. Making multiple identical CreateScheduledQuery requests has the same effect as making a single request.
|
ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn |
[required] The ARN for the IAM role that Timestream will assume when running the scheduled query. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs to label the scheduled query. |
KmsKeyId |
The Amazon KMS key used to encrypt the scheduled query resource, at-rest. If the Amazon KMS key is not specified, the scheduled query resource will be encrypted with a Timestream owned Amazon KMS key. To specify a KMS key, use the key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name, prefix the name with alias/ If ErrorReportConfiguration uses |
ErrorReportConfiguration |
[required] Configuration for error reporting. Error reports will be generated when a problem is encountered when writing the query results. |
Deletes a given scheduled query
Description
Deletes a given scheduled query. This is an irreversible operation.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_delete_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_delete_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn)
Arguments
ScheduledQueryArn |
[required] The ARN of the scheduled query. |
Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload
Description
Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_describe_account_settings()
DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against
Description
DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against. This API is available through both Write and Query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_describe_endpoints()
Provides detailed information about a scheduled query
Description
Provides detailed information about a scheduled query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_describe_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn)
Arguments
ScheduledQueryArn |
[required] The ARN of the scheduled query. |
You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually
Description
You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_execute_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_execute_scheduled_query(
ScheduledQueryArn,
InvocationTime,
ClientToken = NULL,
QueryInsights = NULL
)
Arguments
ScheduledQueryArn |
[required] ARN of the scheduled query. |
InvocationTime |
[required] The timestamp in UTC. Query will be run as if it was invoked at this timestamp. |
ClientToken |
Not used. |
QueryInsights |
Encapsulates settings for enabling Enabling |
Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region
Description
Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region. list_scheduled_queries
is eventually consistent.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_list_scheduled_queries/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_list_scheduled_queries(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)
Arguments
MaxResults |
The maximum number of items to return in the output. If the total number
of items available is more than the value specified, a |
NextToken |
A pagination token to resume pagination. |
List all tags on a Timestream query resource
Description
List all tags on a Timestream query resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_list_tags_for_resource(
ResourceARN,
MaxResults = NULL,
NextToken = NULL
)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Timestream resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
MaxResults |
The maximum number of tags to return. |
NextToken |
A pagination token to resume pagination. |
A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running
Description
A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running. Timestream only supports using this operation with ValidateOnly
set to true
.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_prepare_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_prepare_query(QueryString, ValidateOnly = NULL)
Arguments
QueryString |
[required] The Timestream query string that you want to use as a prepared
statement. Parameter names can be specified in the query string |
ValidateOnly |
By setting this value to |
Query is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data
Description
query
is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_query(
QueryString,
ClientToken = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxRows = NULL,
QueryInsights = NULL
)
Arguments
QueryString |
[required] The query to be run by Timestream. |
ClientToken |
Unique, case-sensitive string of up to 64 ASCII characters specified
when a
|
NextToken |
A pagination token used to return a set of results. When the
Note the following when using NextToken in a query:
|
MaxRows |
The total number of rows to be returned in the
Otherwise, the initial invocation of If the row size is large (e.g. a row has many columns), Timestream may
return fewer rows to keep the response size from exceeding the 1 MB
limit. If |
QueryInsights |
Encapsulates settings for enabling Enabling |
Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource
Description
Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] Identifies the Timestream resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Timestream resource. |
Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource
Description
Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Timestream resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tags keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the Timestream resource. |
Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured
Description
Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured. If you reduce the value of MaxQueryTCU
to a desired configuration, the new value can take up to 24 hours to be effective.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_update_account_settings/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_update_account_settings(
MaxQueryTCU = NULL,
QueryPricingModel = NULL,
QueryCompute = NULL
)
Arguments
MaxQueryTCU |
The maximum number of compute units the service will use at any point in
time to serve your queries. To run queries, you must set a minimum
capacity of 4 TCU. You can set the maximum number of TCU in multiples of
4, for example, 4, 8, 16, 32, and so on. The maximum value supported for
The maximum value supported for |
QueryPricingModel |
The pricing model for queries in an account. The |
QueryCompute |
Modifies the query compute settings configured in your account, including the query pricing model and provisioned Timestream Compute Units (TCUs) in your account. This API is idempotent, meaning that making the same request multiple times will have the same effect as making the request once. |
Update a scheduled query
Description
Update a scheduled query.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_update_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamquery_update_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn, State)
Arguments
ScheduledQueryArn |
[required] ARN of the scheuled query. |
State |
[required] State of the scheduled query. |
Amazon Timestream Write
Description
Amazon Timestream is a fast, scalable, fully managed time-series database service that makes it easy to store and analyze trillions of time-series data points per day. With Timestream, you can easily store and analyze IoT sensor data to derive insights from your IoT applications. You can analyze industrial telemetry to streamline equipment management and maintenance. You can also store and analyze log data and metrics to improve the performance and availability of your applications.
Timestream is built from the ground up to effectively ingest, process, and store time-series data. It organizes data to optimize query processing. It automatically scales based on the volume of data ingested and on the query volume to ensure you receive optimal performance while inserting and querying data. As your data grows over time, Timestream’s adaptive query processing engine spans across storage tiers to provide fast analysis while reducing costs.
Usage
timestreamwrite(
config = list(),
credentials = list(),
endpoint = NULL,
region = NULL
)
Arguments
config |
Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.
|
credentials |
Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter
|
endpoint |
Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client. |
region |
Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client. |
Value
A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using
syntax like svc$operation(...)
, where svc
is the name you've assigned
to the client. The available operations are listed in the
Operations section.
Service syntax
svc <- timestreamwrite( config = list( credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string", close_connection = "logical", timeout = "numeric", s3_force_path_style = "logical", sts_regional_endpoint = "string" ), credentials = list( creds = list( access_key_id = "string", secret_access_key = "string", session_token = "string" ), profile = "string", anonymous = "logical" ), endpoint = "string", region = "string" )
Operations
create_batch_load_task | Creates a new Timestream batch load task |
create_database | Creates a new Timestream database |
create_table | Adds a new table to an existing database in your account |
delete_database | Deletes a given Timestream database |
delete_table | Deletes a given Timestream table |
describe_batch_load_task | Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details |
describe_database | Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database |
describe_endpoints | Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against |
describe_table | Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store |
list_batch_load_tasks | Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details |
list_databases | Returns a list of your Timestream databases |
list_tables | Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table |
list_tags_for_resource | Lists all tags on a Timestream resource |
resume_batch_load_task | Resume batch load task |
tag_resource | Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource |
untag_resource | Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource |
update_database | Modifies the KMS key for an existing database |
update_table | Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table |
write_records | Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream |
Examples
## Not run:
svc <- timestreamwrite()
svc$create_batch_load_task(
Foo = 123
)
## End(Not run)
Creates a new Timestream batch load task
Description
Creates a new Timestream batch load task. A batch load task processes data from a CSV source in an S3 location and writes to a Timestream table. A mapping from source to target is defined in a batch load task. Errors and events are written to a report at an S3 location. For the report, if the KMS key is not specified, the report will be encrypted with an S3 managed key when SSE_S3
is the option. Otherwise an error is thrown. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys. Service quotas apply. For details, see code sample.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_create_batch_load_task(
ClientToken = NULL,
DataModelConfiguration = NULL,
DataSourceConfiguration,
ReportConfiguration,
TargetDatabaseName,
TargetTableName,
RecordVersion = NULL
)
Arguments
ClientToken |
|
DataModelConfiguration |
|
DataSourceConfiguration |
[required] Defines configuration details about the data source for a batch load task. |
ReportConfiguration |
[required] |
TargetDatabaseName |
[required] Target Timestream database for a batch load task. |
TargetTableName |
[required] Target Timestream table for a batch load task. |
RecordVersion |
Creates a new Timestream database
Description
Creates a new Timestream database. If the KMS key is not specified, the database will be encrypted with a Timestream managed KMS key located in your account. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys. Service quotas apply. For details, see code sample.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_create_database(DatabaseName, KmsKeyId = NULL, Tags = NULL)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
KmsKeyId |
The KMS key for the database. If the KMS key is not specified, the database will be encrypted with a Timestream managed KMS key located in your account. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs to label the table. |
Adds a new table to an existing database in your account
Description
Adds a new table to an existing database in your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, table names must be at least unique within each Region if they are in the same database. You might have identical table names in the same Region if the tables are in separate databases. While creating the table, you must specify the table name, database name, and the retention properties. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_create_table(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
RetentionProperties = NULL,
Tags = NULL,
MagneticStoreWriteProperties = NULL,
Schema = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the Timestream table. |
RetentionProperties |
The duration for which your time-series data must be stored in the memory store and the magnetic store. |
Tags |
A list of key-value pairs to label the table. |
MagneticStoreWriteProperties |
Contains properties to set on the table when enabling magnetic store writes. |
Schema |
The schema of the table. |
Deletes a given Timestream database
Description
Deletes a given Timestream database. This is an irreversible operation. After a database is deleted, the time-series data from its tables cannot be recovered.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_delete_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_delete_database(DatabaseName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database to be deleted. |
Deletes a given Timestream table
Description
Deletes a given Timestream table. This is an irreversible operation. After a Timestream database table is deleted, the time-series data stored in the table cannot be recovered.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_delete_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_delete_table(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database where the Timestream database is to be deleted. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the Timestream table to be deleted. |
Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details
Description
Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_describe_batch_load_task(TaskId)
Arguments
TaskId |
[required] The ID of the batch load task. |
Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database
Description
Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_describe_database(DatabaseName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against
Description
Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against. This API operation is available through both the Write and Query APIs.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_describe_endpoints()
Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store
Description
Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_describe_table(DatabaseName, TableName)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the Timestream table. |
Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details
Description
Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_batch_load_tasks/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_list_batch_load_tasks(
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL,
TaskStatus = NULL
)
Arguments
NextToken |
A token to specify where to start paginating. This is the NextToken from a previously truncated response. |
MaxResults |
The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation. |
TaskStatus |
Status of the batch load task. |
Returns a list of your Timestream databases
Description
Returns a list of your Timestream databases. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_databases/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_list_databases(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)
Arguments
NextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation. |
MaxResults |
The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation. |
Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table
Description
Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table. See code sample for details.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_tables/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_list_tables(
DatabaseName = NULL,
NextToken = NULL,
MaxResults = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
The name of the Timestream database. |
NextToken |
The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation. |
MaxResults |
The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation. |
Lists all tags on a Timestream resource
Description
Lists all tags on a Timestream resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Timestream resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Resume batch load task
Description
Resume batch load task
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_resume_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_resume_batch_load_task(TaskId)
Arguments
TaskId |
[required] The ID of the batch load task to resume. |
Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource
Description
Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_tag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] Identifies the Timestream resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
Tags |
[required] The tags to be assigned to the Timestream resource. |
Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource
Description
Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_untag_resource/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)
Arguments
ResourceARN |
[required] The Timestream resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). |
TagKeys |
[required] A list of tags keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the Timestream resource. |
Modifies the KMS key for an existing database
Description
Modifies the KMS key for an existing database. While updating the database, you must specify the database name and the identifier of the new KMS key to be used (KmsKeyId
). If there are any concurrent update_database
requests, first writer wins.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_update_database/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_update_database(DatabaseName, KmsKeyId)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the database. |
KmsKeyId |
[required] The identifier of the new KMS key ( You can specify the
|
Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table
Description
Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table. Note that the change in retention duration takes effect immediately. For example, if the retention period of the memory store was initially set to 2 hours and then changed to 24 hours, the memory store will be capable of holding 24 hours of data, but will be populated with 24 hours of data 22 hours after this change was made. Timestream does not retrieve data from the magnetic store to populate the memory store.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_update_table/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_update_table(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
RetentionProperties = NULL,
MagneticStoreWriteProperties = NULL,
Schema = NULL
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the Timestream table. |
RetentionProperties |
The retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store. |
MagneticStoreWriteProperties |
Contains properties to set on the table when enabling magnetic store writes. |
Schema |
The schema of the table. |
Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream
Description
Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream. You can specify a single data point or a batch of data points to be inserted into the system. Timestream offers you a flexible schema that auto detects the column names and data types for your Timestream tables based on the dimension names and data types of the data points you specify when invoking writes into the database.
See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_write_records/ for full documentation.
Usage
timestreamwrite_write_records(
DatabaseName,
TableName,
CommonAttributes = NULL,
Records
)
Arguments
DatabaseName |
[required] The name of the Timestream database. |
TableName |
[required] The name of the Timestream table. |
CommonAttributes |
A record that contains the common measure, dimension, time, and version
attributes shared across all the records in the request. The measure and
dimension attributes specified will be merged with the measure and
dimension attributes in the records object when the data is written into
Timestream. Dimensions may not overlap, or a |
Records |
[required] An array of records that contain the unique measure, dimension, time, and version attributes for each time-series data point. |